Installation and Maintenance
IV
Octel 200 and Octel 300
Message Servers
Installation and Maintenance Manual
Serenade 2.0 and Serenade 3.0
July 1998
Lucent Technologies
Octel Messaging Division
1001 Murphy Ranch Road
Milpitas, CA 95035-7912 USA
Your comments are welcome. They can assist us in improving our products. Please address your
comments to techpubs@octel.com or to the EMG Technical Publications Manager at
Lucent Technologies
Octel Messaging Division (OMD)
1001 Murphy Ranch Road
Milpitas, CA 95035-7912
USA
408-324-2000
www.octel.com
This manual contains confidential and proprietary information of Octel Communications Corporation, a
subsidiary of Lucent Technologies and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States,
international copyright treaties, and all other applicable national laws. Any unauthorized use,
reproduction, or transfer of any information in this manual is strictly prohibited. Copyright 1998 by
Octel Communications Corporation, a subsidiary of Lucent Technologies. (subject to limited distribution
and restricted disclosure). All Rights Reserved.
This manual contains information regarding technology that is protected under one or more of the
following United States patents: Nos. 4,371,752; 4,580,012; 4,580,016; 4,581,486; 4,585,906; 4,602,129;
4,640,991; 4,652,700; 4,757,525; 4,471,807; 4,747,124, 4,783,796, and others; certain foreign patents,
and other pending United States and foreign patents.
Restricted Rights Notice
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in
subparagraphs (c) (1) of the Commercial Computer Software – Restricted Rights clause at FAR Section
52.227-19 and restrictions set forth in the accompanying end user agreement, or (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS Section 252.227-7013, whichever is applicable.
Unpublished – rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Lucent Technologies Octel
Messaging Division (OMD), 1001 Murphy Ranch Road, Milpitas, CA 95035-7912, USA.
All trademarks identified by the or symbol are trademarks or registered trademarks, respectively, of
Octel Communications Corporation, a subsidiary of Lucent Technologies. All other trademarks belong to
their respective owners.
This 3-volume Installation and Maintenance Manual supports the Octel 200 and Octel 300.
Part Number PB60014–01
July 1998
Printed in USA
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the back of this equipment is a label that
contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN)
for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that can be connected to the telephone line.
Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the device not ringing in response to an incoming
call. In most but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five(5.0). To be certain of the
number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs contact the
telephone company for the maximum REN in your area.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone, the telephone company will notify
you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised
of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that
could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance
notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with the equipment, please contact:
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) The TAC supports distributors, GBS customers, and direct field
service engineers in the United States of America.
408-922-1822
If the trouble is causing harm to the network, the telephone company may request that you remove the
equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
Repairs should be performed by Octel Communications Corporation or an authorized representative of
Octel Communications Corporation or the warranty or service agreement could be void.
This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service.
Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or
other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message
clearly contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or individual
sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or
individual.
If the O200 or O300 is to be used with a leased system, permission of the owner should be requested
before its connection. The O200 / O300 when using either the APIC or NPIC is intended only for
connection to a registered PBX and never directly to the network.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant
to Part 15 FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when this equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his/her own expense. Any changes or modifications to this
equipment not expressly approved by Octel Communications Corporation may void compliance with
FCC requirements and the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Introduction
The Octel Overture 300 message server is a 32 to 128 port voice messaging system and the Octel
Overture 200 message server is a 4 to 64 port voice messaging system. When installed at a customer’s
site, the message server attaches to the extension lines of a PABX or directly to the public network via
Direct Exchange Lines.
This document section describes certain operation requirements which must be complied with in the
United Kingdom to allow connection of the message server to a PABX or directly to the public network.
Failure to comply to the requirements described in this document may invalidate the
compliance of the apparatus, thus prohibiting its connection to the network in the United
Kingdom.
The approval of this apparatus will be invalidated if it is used with internal software not
formally accepted by BABT. The internal software is not accessible or alterable by the user.
There are no user serviceable parts, or user controls, in the system enclosure.
Interconnection directly, or by way of other apparatus, of Octel Overture 200 ports or
Octel Overture 300 ports with ports which do not comply with the requirements of BS6301
may produce hazardous conditions on the BT network. Advice should be obtained from
a competent engineer before such a connection is made.
When network addresses (telephone numbers) are manually entered into the system for
autoĆcalling, care should be exercised to ensure that the addresses are correct
This apparatus is not to be used for making calls to the BT emergency service.
Ringer Equivalence
Under normal operating conditions, this apparatus is not meant to form part of a multiple installation; the
port interfaces are the sole termination of the line. Additional apparatus, BT or otherwise, must not be
connected between this equipment and the PABX line or public network.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Functions
The Octel Overture 200 and the Octel Overture 300 message servers have the following functions.
-
Automatically answers calls redirected on no answer or busy conditions.
-
Interrogates the caller for any messages.
-
Stores the message.
-
Forwards the message as and when appropriate.
-
When connected to a PBX, the ability to answer and transfer a call.
-
The option to place outgoing calls (through a PBX, or directly into the public network) for the
purpose of delivering messages.
And the following outcalling functions.
-
The system operator can store predetermined numbers to be dialed for outcalls within the message
server. These numbers include pauses to allow for secondary proceed indications.
-
The message server automatically schedules multiple call repeat attempts as required for
unsuccessful outcalls. The times between calls and the number of repeat attempts conform to the
requirements of the appropriate UK specifications.
-
The message server is suitable for connection to a PABX that returns secondary proceed indication
through the use of dialing pauses, as described above. For PABXs that do not return secondary
proceed indication, the pauses are not used.
Pay Phones
The Octel Overture 200 and the Octel Overture 300 message servers are not suitable as an extension to a
pay phone.
Keys
When the message server is in operation, and is not being serviced by maintenance personnel, the key to
the enclosure shall be removed to prevent user (operator) access.
Outcall Configuration Requirements
The Octel Overture 200 and the Octel Overture 300 message servers have the capability to outcall via the
PABX or directly to the public network via Direct Exchange Lines. The message server uses
multi-frequency dialing. Loop disconnect dialing is not supported.
" A
Failure to comply to the requirements described in this document may invalidate the
compliance of the apparatus, thus prohibiting its connection to the network in the
United Kingdom.
System Parameters
The following System Parameters are particular to the requirements for the UK. The installation engineer
must verify that these parameters have the following assignments:
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
68
NET:REMOTE DELIVERY ATTEMPT LIMIT
20
69
NET:REMOTE DELAY BEFORE RETRY (MINUTES)
10
Delays in dialing strings (D character) between the PABX access code and the rest of the digits
must be between 3.5 and 8 seconds. Set D character timing in System Parameter 28 — “D”
CHARACTER DELAY TIME.
INFORMATION Table Indices
The following INFORMATION Table indices are particular to the requirements for the UK. The installation
engineer must verify that these indices have the following assignments:
15
OFFSITE SPEAK TIMES
4
16
OFFSITE SPEAK DELAY
5
The values for INFORMATION Table Indices 15 and 16 must be set so that the total offhook time is less
than 60 seconds. The above values meet that specification.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
! "
#
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment
meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements. Industry
Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities
of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable
method of connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual
service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The
customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of
service in some situations. Communication cables provided by the user to connect to the
telecommunications network must be not less than 26 AWG copper.
Repairs should be performed by Octel Communications Corporation or an authorized representative of
Octel Communications Corporation or the warranty or service agreement could be void. In the event that
this equipment malfunctions, the telecommunications company may request that the equipment be
disconnected.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This
precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate
electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. The equipment is installed by trained
personnel.
The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be
connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device, to prevent overloading. The termination on a
loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load
Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100.
The load number of this product O200 / O300 is 19.
This Class A digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulations (ICES).
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Industrie Canada:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le matériel
brouilleur du Canada (ICES).
AVIS: L’étiquette de L’Industrie Canada identifie le matériel homologué. Cette étiquette certifie que le
matériel est conforme à certaines normes de protection, d’exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de
télécommunications. Industrie Canada n’assure toutefois pas que le matériel fonctionnera à la
satisfaction de l’utilisateur.
Avant d’installer ce matériel, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est permis de le raccorder aux installations
de l’entreprise locale de télécommunication. Le matériel doit également être installé en suivant une
méthode acceptée de raccordement. L’abonné ne doit pas oublier qu’il est possible que la conformité aux
conditions énoncées ci–dessous n’empechent pas la dégradation du service dans certaines situations.
Les réparations de matériel homologué doivent être effectuées par un centre d’entretien canadien autorisé
designé par le fournisseur. La compagnie de télécommunications peut demander à l’utilisateur de
débrancher un appareil à la suite de reparations où de modifications effectuées par l’utilisateur ou à cause
de mauvais fonctionnement.
Pour sa propre protection, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer que tous les fils de mise à terre de la source
d’énergie électrique, les lignes téléphoniques et les canalisations d’eau métalliques, s’il y en a, sont
raccordées ensembles. Cette précaution est particulierement importante dans les régions rurales.
AVERTISSEMENT: L’utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements de lui–même; il doit
avoir recours à un service d’inspection des installations électriques, ou à un électricien, selon le cas.
La câble de télécommunications qui sont fournis par l’utilisateur ne doivent pas être infériers à 26 AWG
de cuivre.
L’Indice de Charge (IC) assigné à chaque dispositif terminal indique, pour éviter toute surcharge, le
pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut être racordée à un circuit téléphonique bouclé utilisé par ce
dispositif. La terminaison du circuit bouclé peut être constituée de n’importe quelle combinaison de
dispositifs, pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l’ensemble des dispositifs ne dépasse pas 100.
L’indice de charge de ce produit O200 / O300 est 19.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300 !
" !
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Understanding the INSTALL Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Using INSTALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Answering Questions in INSTALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Answering Questions About Other Telephone Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Exiting Before the INSTALL is Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
#
2.1
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
$
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
How the Octel Overture 200/300 Works with the Phone System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Determining Necessary Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Changes to Central Office Trunking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Phone System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Implementing the Octel Overture 200/300 on PBXs without DIL Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
PB60014–01
Receiving the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
PBX Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Terminal Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Pin Assignments for Message Server Cards and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Communicating with the Message Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Octel Overture 200/300 HarDware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Rack Mount Installation, Octel Overture 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Connecting the Phone System to the Octel Overture 200/300
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Octel Overture 200/300 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Testing the Installation and Telephone Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
" "!
(continued)
" "!
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Listing and Clearing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
System Performance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Network Traffic Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
User Message Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
User Calling Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Disk Usage Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Mailbox Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
User Status Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Integration Calling Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
System Performance by COS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
" " !
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Application Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Message Block and Message Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
"
!
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
Appendix A
LOG Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Call Processing Trace (CPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Call Detail Record Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Namesend Activity Trace Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Moves, Add, and Changes Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Server Activity Trace Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Call-Processing Trace Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-1
" $!" ! !
8.1
8.2
8.3
Boot ROM Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Hardware Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Traffic Peg Count Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
"
# "
9.1
9.2
9.3
Hardware Maintenance and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Hardware Replacement Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Message Server Assembly Descriptions and Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Table of Contents
(continued)
Chapter 10 Digital Trunk Interface Card (DTIC)
10.1
10.2
10.3
Digital Trunk Interface Card (DTIC) Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
How to Configure the DTIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Troubleshooting and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Chapter 11 LAN Card
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Installing and Configuring the LAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Testing the LAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Taking the LAN Card Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Internet Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11A-1
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11B-1
Octel Private MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11C-1
Chapter 12 Procedures
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
PB60014–01
Electronic Feature Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Floppy Diskette Backup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Floppy Diskette Restore Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Floppy Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40
Hard Disk Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41
Adding Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-71
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Octel Overture 200/300 Installation and Maintenance Manual
volume
Table of Contents Ċ Figures
Chapter 1 INSTALL
1-1
Order of Questions and Associated Tables in the INSTALL Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Chapter 2 Hardware
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
Octel Overture 200 Cabinet Shelf Structure, From the Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Octel Overture 200 Cabinet, Inside Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Octel Overture 200 Cabinet, Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Octel Overture 200 Cabinet, Inside Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Octel Overture 300 Cabinet Shelf Structure, From the Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Octel Overture 300 Cabinet, Inside Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Octel Overture 300 Cabinet, Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Octel Overture 300 Cabinet, Inside Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Chapter 3 Preparing the Phone System
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
Octel Overture 200/300 Connection to Phone System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
All Incoming Lines Directed to the Octel Overture 200/300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Incoming Calls Split Between Console and the Octel Overture 200/300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Sample Agency Letter for PE Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Service Provider Letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Directing Incoming Calls to the Octel Overture 200/300 When the PBX Does Not Offer a DIL Feature . . 3-12
Chapter 4 Installation
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
Octel Overture 200 Floor Plan for Installation in the US, Canada and Mexico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Octel Overture 300 Floor Plan for Installation for the US, Canada, and Mexico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Octel Overture 200 Direct-Connect Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Octel Overture 300 Direct-Connect Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Diagram of the Field Wiring for –48-Vdc Powered Octel Overture 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
First and Second RS-232C Serial-Port Cable Pinouts for Connection to Terminal Equipment (DTE) . . . . 4-17
Octel Overture 200/300 to External Modem Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
50-Pin Male Telco Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Octel Overture 200/300 Cabinet Installed in 19-Inch Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Typical Octel Overture 200/300 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Connector Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Example of Server-to-Block Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Chapter 6 Maintenance Commands
6-1
6-2
6-3
PB60014–01
Alarm Test Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Sequence Used by the Octel Overture 200/300 To Screen Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Ring/No Answer Tone-Timing Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Table of Contents Ċ Figures
(continued)
Chapter 8 System Errors and Traffic Pegs
8-1
Traffic Peg Count Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
Chapter 9 Hardware Replacement
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-15
9-16
9-17
9-18
9-19
9-20
9-21
9-22
9-23
9-24
9-25
9-26
9-27
9-28
9-29
9-30
9-31
Shelf Structure in the Octel Overture 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Inside Front View of Octel Overture 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Octel Overture 200 Cabinet Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Inside Rear View of Octel Overture 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Shelf Structure of Octel Overture 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Inside Front View of Octel Overture 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Rear View of Octel Overture 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Inside Rear View of Octel Overture 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Card Cage Showing a Printed Circuit Assembly and an Option Control Chip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
LED Placement on the LAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
DTIC–E1 Kit Installation for the Octel Overture 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
DTIC–E1 Kit Installation for the Octel Overture 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Fax Application Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
120–ohm DTIC–E1 Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Fax Application Processor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Octel Overture 200 Hard-Disk-Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Octel Overture 300 Hard-Disk-Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Octel Overture 300 Floppy-Disk-Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Octel Overture 200 Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Octel Overture 300 Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Motherboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
A.C. Backplane Power Harness Installation for Octel Overture 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
D.C. Backplane Power Harness Installation for Octel Overture 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Power-Filter Assembly for 120-Vac and 240-Vac Domestic Octel Overture 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Power-Filter Assembly for 240-Vac International Octel Overture 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Power-Filter Assembly for 48-Vdc Octel Overture 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Octel Overture 300 Disk-Drive Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Cutaway View of the Load-Resistor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Field Wiring for –48-Vdc Powered Octel Overture 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Option Control Chip (OCC) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Location of Option Control Chip (OCC) in the Octel Overture 200/300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Chapter 10 Digital Trunk Interface Card (DTIC)
10-1
DTIC Component Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300 "# # # $
% $
# #" ( "
#! !&!
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
Octel Overture 200/300 Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octel Overture 200 Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octel Overture 300 Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Unit d.c. Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
2-17
2-18
2-23
#! ! ! # '"#
3-1
PBX Features to Direct Trunks to the Octel Overture 200/300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
#! "# #
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
Input Circuit Current at Nominal Operating Line Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Input Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Equipment Provided by Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
DCE Pinouts for Cable Connections Between the RS-232C Terminal and the Octel Overture 200/300 . 4-17
Pinouts for External Modem Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Power Supply Output Rating and Acceptable Operating Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
66M4-4W Connector Block Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
#! # "
6-1
6-2
6-3
FINDMBOX Messages and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Abbreviations for Channel/Port State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Application Delays for Cadence Recognition, for Determining Tone On/Tone Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
#!
"
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
Trace Activity Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Transaction Type Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Descriptions of the CDR Status That Can Be Logged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Information Logged by Transaction Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Call Detail Record Size by Transaction Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Namesend Activity Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Event and Aux Activities in Namesend Activity Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
SAT Log Activity Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
#! '"# !! !" ! "
8-1
8-2
PB60014–01
Boot ROM Diagnostic Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Hardware Error Types and Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
11-1
11-2
LED Activity on the LAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
CD and CU for LAN — Messages and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
INTRODUCTION
Do I really have to read all this?
or
What's this manual all about, and how do I use it?
Read on. The answer to the first question is no; not right now. The answer to the second question is in the
pages that follow.
Welcome to the Octel Overture 200/300 Installation and Maintenance Manual
(I&M)
The Octel Overture 200/300 System Administrator’s Manual and the Octel Overture 200/300 Installation
and Maintenance Manual (I&M) contain information about the Octel Overture 200 and the Octel
Overture 300 message servers (Octel Overture 200/300).
The I&M manual is not designed to be used as a standalone reference manual. Together, the SAM
and I&M are the complete reference for the Octel Overture 200/300 message servers.
The Octel Overture 200/300 SAM & I&M volumes are designed to be used by people performing a
variety of job functions at various stages of learning about and implementing Octel Overture 200/300
message servers. Some volumes educate, while others serve as a reference.
The manuals is not designed to be read straight through, or used only in reference to a question about
Octel Overture 200/300 message servers. Instead, it offers a structure from which to approach Octel
Overture 200/300 message servers — a sequence which closely parallels the process of discovery,
assessment, design, and strategic implementation. It also suggests guidelines for directing readers to the
chapters that will benefit them the most, based on their interests, job functions, and customer needs.
This introduction is divided into the following segments that explain aspects of the manuals.
Conventions
Volume description
Chapters to read by job function
Product Description chapter descriptions
Conventions
The conventions used in this manual are described below.
PB60014–01
Text
This typeface represents normal text in this manual.
Common terms
The term Octel Overture 200/300 is used throughout this manual to
refer the Octel Overture 200 and the Octel Overture 300 message
server.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
The term is used to refer to the VMX 5000 and the
VMX 1000.
The term PBX is used to refer to Private Automatic Branch
Exchange, key telephone systems, and Centrex telephone service and
key telephone systems.
Refer to the System Administrator's Manual,
volume, Glossary, for a complete list of terms and definitions used
in this manual.
Quick Reference
Guide (QRG)
The Quick Reference Guide (QRG) appears at the beginning of
certain chapters and summarizes commands and key points that are
discussed in more detail within the chapter.
Octel Overture
200/300
screen sample
Octel Overture 200/300 screens are represented in the following type
face and are surrounded by a gray box:
-----SYSTEM SOFTWARE RELEASE S.X.X.X
(MM/DD/YY)----DAY MM/DD HH:MM:SS YYYY NAME ID:XXXXXX S/N:XXXXX PBX:XX
User entries
within screens
Commands entered from a terminal are represented in this type:
@INSTAL
PBX screens
This partial screen is a sample of the type face and format used to
represent PBX screens:
Page 3 of 3
STATION
DISPLAY BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
Keys on the
telephone key pad
and all terminals
Keys that are entered from a telephone key pad or terminal
function keys are represented within a box.
An example of a telephone key pad entry is:
An example of a key on a terminal is: Escape
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
9
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300 commands are executed by pressing either
the Return key or the Enter key, depending on which key is
available on the terminal. Enter is used throughout this manual
and is interchangeable with Return .
Octel Overture
200/300
When text represents a prompt spoken by the Octel Overture
200/300, it is printed in italics and enclosed in quotes.
Thank you. Just a moment."
This is the format for a note.
Please refer to the Configuration volume, User Table chapter.
The following lists the chapters in each of the three volumes in the Installation and Maintenance Manual.
Installation and Maintenance Volume
INSTALL
Hardware
Preparing the Phone System
Installation
Reports
Maintenance Commands
LOG Commands
System Errors and Traffic Pegs
Hardware Replacement
DTIC Card
LAN Card
Procedures
Integration Volume
Standard DTMF Integration
Adaptive Integration
Enhanced DTMF InĆband Integration
Centrex SMDI/SMSI
NEC NEAXĆ2400
Northern Telecom SLĆ1
AT&T (ATTIC Integration)
Definity G3
System 75/Definity G1
System 85/Definity G2
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
ROLM
CBX
9751 Model 30/80
Cortelco Millenium
Mitel
SX-200 Digital
SX-200/SX-100 Analog
SX-2000
Meridian 1
AT&T APIC Integration
Definity G3
System 75/Definity G1
System 85/Definity G2
Northern Telecom NPIC Integration
Networking
Networking
Analog Networking
Remote Analog Networking (Voicenet, OctelNet, and AMIS)
Collocated Analog Networking
Digital Networking (Remote and Domain)
Network Name Confirmation
Location Table
Numbering Plan Table
Route Table
Configuration Forms
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Chapters to Read by Job Function
Now, instead of reading the System Administrator’s Manual and Installation and Maintenance Manual
straight through, turn to the chapter that fits your needs, your job function, or your level of expertise with
Octel Overture 200/300 message servers. Refer to the following charts.
System Administrator’s Manual
General Description
Implementation
Introducing the
Message Server
Integration
Reports
Troubleshooting
Commands
LOG Commands
System Errors and
Traffic Pegs
Floppy Backup and
Restore
Customizing
SystemĆWide Features
Mailbox Features
Fax Mail Plus
Networking
Single Digit Menus
Incoming Call
Restriction
Call Queuing
OctelForms
Multilingual Prompts
LAN Backup and
Restore
VMX 5000 User
Interface
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Installation and Maintenance Manual
INSTALL
Hardware
Preparing the Phone
System
Installation
Reports
Maintenance
Commands
LOG Commands
System Errors and
Traffic Pegs
Hardware Replacement
DTIC Card
LAN Card
Procedures
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Chapter Description
The Octel Overture200/300 Installation and Maintenance Manual, Installation and Maintenance
volume, contains information about preparing for an Octel Overture 200/300 installation, and monitoring
and maintaining the Octel Overture 200/300 after installation. The following is a brief summary of each
chapter within the Installation and Maintenance volume.Voice 200, Voice 300, and Voice 250-i
PB60014–01
Chapter 1
INSTALL
The Install chapter provides instructions about using the INSTALL program
to install a new Octel Overture 200/300 message server and reinstall an
existing system.Voice 200, Voice 300, and Voice 250-i
Chapter 2
HARDWARE
This chapter discusses the Octel Overture 200/300 architecture. Included
are an overview of the hardware, description of Octel Overture 200 and
Octel Overture 300Voice 200, Voice 300, and Voice 250-i subsystems, and
diagrams of the systems.
Chapter 3
PREPARING THE
PHONE SYSTEM
Octel Overture 200/300 installation requires special attention to the
telephone system. This chapter includes topics such as how to identify
changes to the Central OfficePublic Exchange trunking, and how to make
the required changes to the phone system. Sample letters to the Central
OfficePublic Exchange and PBX service provider are included to ensure
smooth changes and transition to a new system.
Chapter 4
INSTALLATION
This chapter provides detailed instructions and procedures for installing an
Octel Overture 200/300. The entire process is presented, from receiving
and inspecting to the step-by-step testing of an installed system.
Chapter 5
REPORTS
This chapter describes the Octel Overture 200/300 reports. The reports are
valuable tools that allow service personnel to monitor Octel Overture
200/300 performance in both stand-alone and networked environments.
Each report is discussed in detail. This section also discusses how to
generate the reports and clear the data.
Chapter 6
MAINTENANCE
COMMANDS
This chapter describes the maintenance commands and diagnostics tests.
Chapter 7
LOG COMMANDS
This chapter describes the LOG commands including LOG, Call
Processing Trace and Call Detail Record.
Chapter 8
SYSTEM ERRORS AND
TRAFFIC PEGS
This chapter describes boot ROM, hardware errors and traffic pegs.
Chapter 9
HARDWARE
REPLACEMENT
This chapter describes the preventive maintenance requirements for Octel
Overture 200/300 message servers and the hardware replacement
procedures and lists the system components and part numbers.
Chapter 10
DTIC CARD
This chapter describes the Digital Trunk Interface Card (DTIC) used for
the DPNSS–ACULAB integration. The DTIC is a 30-port line card
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
designed to interface an Octel Overture 200/300 to E1 (European) trunks.
The chapter explains how to configure, troubleshoot, and maintain the
DTIC. The DTIC is applicable only to specific Octel channels in Europe
and is available only through those channels.
Chapter 11
LAN CARD
This chapter describes the LAN card and includes details about hardware,
installation, configuration, maintenance, and troubleshooting. The LAN
card is necessary for Digital Networking, LAN Backup and Restore, or the
Gateway Link feature.
Chapter 12
PROCEDURES
This chapter explains the Octel Overture 200/300 procedures. Included are
procedures for backing up, archiving, restoring, recovering and
maintaining the software and configuration database.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
1
INSTALL
Chapter Contents
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Understanding the INSTALL Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Using INSTALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Entering the INSTALL Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Exiting the INSTALL Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Modifying Tables While Using INSTALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
+ Auto-Increment, USER Table Input Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Adding Mailboxes in Ranges, USER Table Input Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Answering Questions in INSTALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Answering Questions About Other Telephone Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Exiting Before the INSTALL is Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Restarting INSTALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Exiting and Continuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Reinstalling an Installed Octel Overture 200/300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Figure
1-1
PB60014–01
Order of Questions and Associated Tables in the INSTALL Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
INSTALL Program
Command
Description
Enter INSTALL
@INSTA
Used to install a new Octel Overture 200/300.
Reinstall
@INSTA
Reinstall an existing system. Clears tables and messages.
Choices for preloading tables include: ALL TABLES, USER,
DISTRIBUTION LIST, and COS Tables.
Enter UPDATE program
while in the INSTALL
program
:.A (table name)
:.D (table name)
:.M (table name)
:.L (table name)
Allows you to enter the UPDATE program to list, add,
modify, or delete information in various tables during an
installation. Useful, for example, when you have forgotten to
add a Company Greeting mailbox to the USER Table and you
are trying to enter that mailbox into the INFORMATION Table.
Exit before complete
:.E
Saves all information up to this point. When INSTALL is
resumed, the program resumes.
The @ prompt is the operating system prompt displayed by the Octel Overture 200/300.
The : prompt is the INSTALL prompt.
The . prompt is the UPDATE prompt.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
INSTALL
1.1
1-1
UNDERSTANDING THE INSTALL PROGRAM
Use the INSTALL program to establish server parameters when you are installing the system. The
INSTALL program displays messages and questions on the terminal. Respond to the questions by
using the keyboard. Press the key to enter the data after you have completed each entry (on
some terminals, this key is marked ).
Some questions, such as “What is the PBX manufacturer?” are followed by a list of choices. Enter
the number corresponding to your choice. If the answer needed is not on the list, choose OTHER or
NONE as appropriate.
Some questions, such as “What is the company’s name?” require an answer to be typed rather than
selected from a list. The program specifies a minimum and maximum number of characters allowed
for the response. For example, the company name can be one to eight characters long.
The INSTALL program requires a response to each question. In some cases, you can press
without entering data, and INSTALL records a default answer. Default answers, often the most
commonly chosen answer to a question, are indicated in the following way:
Do you wish to set the system DATE and TIME? (Y/N, empty line = N)
The default answer for this question is N. If you press
shows an empty line, and INSTALL records an N.
without pressing a letter, the screen
Figure 1-1 shows the order in which information is requested when using the INSTALL program.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
1-2
Installation and Maintenance Volume
INSTALL Questions
1. a)
Manufacturer
SP 3a
Model
SP 3b
For each manufacturer and model, specific
system parameters are supplied from the
Serenade database. These vary, depending upon
the telephone system and installation. A few
examples follow:
b)
Installation name
SP 1
c)
System ID number
SP 2
e)
Alarm number
SP 31
f)
Forward string
SP 45
Cancel forward string
SP 46
Minimum length for
security codes
Default mailbox
security code
SP 144
g)
h)
SP 105
USER
MBX,EXT,COS or
MBX,COS (if mbx = ext)
SLOTS
Card, Port, Ext, COS, Mode, Outcall, Test
FLASH TIME, ms.
TRANSFER INIT
reconnect-RNA
reconnect-BUSY
transfer complete
SP 9
SP 13
ALTERNATE XFER
reconnect-RNA
reconnect-BUSY
transfer complete
SP 16
PBX INIT CODE
SP 33
You must include all companyĆ
greeting mailboxes, intercept
mailboxes, distributionĆlist pilot
numbers, extended mailboxes (pilot and
members), flexible menu mailboxes,
and system users (mailboxes with
extensions and mailboxes only).
Enter the COS, even if you have not
assigned the correct attributes.
Attributes can be added or deleted in
the UPDATE program.
NETWORK ROUTES
Route, Drop, Access
NETWORK LOCATION
Location Name, Protocol, Digital Networking
NETWORK NUMBERING
Location Name, Access,
Additional Digits
Figure 1-1 Order of Questions and Associated Tables in the INSTALL Program
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
INSTALL
1-3
INSTALL Questions (continued)
LIST
Distribution List number and members. All must previously have been
entered in the USER Table.
COS (Class of Service) Only changed during UPDATE.
INFORMATION TABLE
Different questions are asked, depending on whether the table applies to a
port or a mailbox.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
18
26
27
29
34
Intercept Mailbox
Company Greeting Mailbox
Call Blocking Number
Max Digit for Menu
Prefix Digits for Menu
Prefix Extension Number
Rings Before No Answer
Times to Retry on Busy
Use Alt Transfer Codes
Next Mailbox
AutoĆTransfer to Assistance
Message with AutoĆTransfer
Language
Logon Failure Transfer Mailbox
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
Intercept Mailbox
Call Blocking Number
Max Digit for Menu
Prefix Digits for Menu
Prefix Extension Number
Rings Before No Answer
Msg Wait Rings
Times to Retry on Busy
Use Alt Transfer Codes
Divert Msgs to Mailbox
Message Waiting Notification
Auto Greeting Activation
Offsite Attempt Times
Offsite Speak Times
Offsite Speak Delay
Offsite Prefix Digits
Next Mailbox
Offsite Dial System Parameter Digits
Offsite End System Parameter Digits
FIFO Queue Message Mailbox
Maximum Message Length
Maximum Number of Messages
Personal Assistance
Quick Greeting Activation
AutoĆTransfer to Assistance
Message with AutoĆTransfer
Announce Calls to Intercept
Language
Group Fax Number
Offsite Only if Urgent
Max Fax Delivery Attempts
Help Operator Mailbox
Override Trunk Group Number
Default Greeting Mailbox
SCHEDULE TABLE
Time period 1...8 plus Default Days/Start Time/Stop Time
Figure 1-1 Order of Questions and Associated Tables in the INSTALL Program (continued)
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
1-4
1.2
Installation and Maintenance Volume
USING INSTALL
The customer’s specific configuration needs should be determined and a configuration package
completed before the installation begins. Use the configuration package to answer each question in
the INSTALL program. A blank configuration package can be found at the end of the Understanding
Configuration chapter in the Configuration volume.
Follow the directions in the Installation and Maintenance volume, Installation chapter, Connecting
Terminals section, to connect your terminal to the Octel Overture200/300 message server.
Entering the INSTALL Program
Enter the maintenance-level password to access the message-server database. If this is a new
installation and the password has not been changed, enter the maintenance-level password set by the
manufacturer.
You should change the manufacturer password to
ensure the security of the server. Refer to the
Configuration volume, Understanding Configuration
chapter, Assuring Security section.
Caution!
At the @ prompt, on the terminal, type INSTA or INSTAL and press
the following messages:
. The terminal displays
@INSTA
–––––––– SYSTEM INSTALLATION DIALOG
DAY MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS SYSTEMNAME
––––––––
ID:XXXXX
S/N:XXXXXX
PBX:00
INSTALL then identifies the type of installation.
New installation.
INSTALL question 1 follows.
Installation is in progress.
INSTALL can continue, or it can start over.
Message server has previously been installed.
To reinstall the message server, you must enter the maintenance password to initiate the reinstall.
The reinstallation begins by erasing all stored information and messages. Do not use
reinstall unless you are prepared to lose messages.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
INSTALL
1-5
Exiting the INSTALL Program
When the program is completed, INSTALL displays the following prompts:
WARNING: FOR PROPER OPERATION SYSTEM MUST BE RESTARTED AFTER INSTALL!
INSTALL COMPLETE.
WAIT... DONE.
SAVE configuration to a DISKETTE? ( Y/N , empty line = N ).
:
DAY
MM/DD
––––––––
HH:MM:SS
YYYY
NAME
ID:
SYSTEM INSTALLATION COMPLETED
S/N:
PBX:
––––––––
Answer Y to copy all the data onto the configuration diskette as a backup. The Octel Overture
200/300 must be reloaded after the INSTALL is complete.
To exit before you have completed the INSTALL program, at the colon (:) type:
.E
When you type (.E) to exit, the portion of the completed configuration is saved to the hard disk. You
can continue the INSTALL later, from where you left off, or you can start the INSTALL over. Refer
to the Starting INSTALL Over section or the Exiting and Continuing section of this chapter.
Modifying Tables While Using INSTALL
While using the INSTALL program, you can access the UPDATE program to list, add, modify, or
delete information in the configuration tables.
The INSTALL program displays a colon (:) when it is waiting for a response. At the colon, type a dot
(.), which is the UPDATE prompt, then an L (list), an A (add), an M (modify), or a D (delete),
followed by the name of the table you want to alter. For example,
:.A USER
The INSTALL program activates the UPDATE program. Alter the tables as necessary. To exit
UPDATE, press at the colon. The INSTALL program resumes.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
1-6
Installation and Maintenance Volume
+ Auto-Increment, USER Table Input Aid
When entering a sequence of mailboxes into the USER Table, the auto-increment input aid allows
you to enter a + after the COS to automatically increment to the next sequential mailbox/extension
number. If the extension field is N, only the mailbox number is incremented. The COS is not
changed. Auto-increment does not cross over to a new first digit. If it is attempted, the Octel
Overture 200/300 prompts
SORRY, (“+”) AUTO–INCREMENT CAN’T CROSS FIRSTDIGIT BOUNDARY.
For example, to enter a sequence of mailbox numbers one by one, enter the mailbox, extension,
COS, and +. The next line displays the mailbox and COS, copied from the previous range, increasing
the number by one. To continue increasing, type a + after the COS. Press to go to the next
mailbox. To stop incrementing the numbers, do not enter the +, just press . The next line will
have no information in it, and the next mailbox may be entered.
The extension number does not need to match the mailbox number to use auto-increment. If mailbox
and extension numbers do not match, be sure the extension number is supposed to be incremented, as
well as the mailbox number. If not, do not use auto-increment.
This example shows how to enter mailbox information using auto-increment. The bold characters are
what was entered.
:4500,4501,0+
:4501,4502,0+
:4502,4503,0
:4700,N,1
:4800,N,5
Adding Mailboxes in Ranges, USER Table Input Aid
To add mailboxes in the USER Table in ranges, enter the first and last mailbox numbers, the first
extension number, and common COS. The mailbox and extension numbers are incremented by one,
and the COS remains the same for all entries.
This example shows how to enter mailbox information in ranges.
:4500–4599,4600,0
For this example, mailboxes 4500– 4599, with corresponding extension numbers 4600–4699, each
with COS 0, are added to the USER Table.
Octel Overture 200/300
Mailbox and extension numbers cannot cross a first digit boundary. Auto-increment cannot be
used when adding in ranges.
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
INSTALL
1.3
1-7
ANSWERING QUESTIONS IN INSTALL
During INSTALL, refer to the customer’s completed configuration package. The configuration
package supplies you with the information you need to answer the questions.
After entering the INSTALL program, if this is a new installation, the message server asks whether
the date and time should be set as shown. The INSTALL questions follow.
@INSTA
–––––––
SYSTEM INSTALLATION DIALOG –––––––
DAY MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
SYSTEMNAME ID:XXXXX
S/N:XXXXXX
PBX:00
NEW CONFIGURATION INSTALLATION.
Do you wish to set the system DATE and TIME? (Y/N, empty line = N)
:Y
Current DATE and TIME:
DAY MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM
Enter new DATE and TIME as: DAY MM/DD/YY HH:MM
or empty line for no change.
MOD:DAY
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM
DATE and TIME set to:
MON MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM
Is this correct? (Y/N, empty line = N):Y
All Messages older than this Date will be deleted.
Are you sure: (Y/N, empty line = N):
1. SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Question 1 is a series of questions that modify specific system parameters; the information entered is
automatically transferred into the SYSTEM PARAMETER Table.
Question 1. a) displays a list of telephone manufacturers from which to select.
Enter the number corresponding to the manufacturer’s name, and press
. After you have
selected the telephone manufacturer’s number, the model numbers for that manufacturer are listed.
Select the appropriate number for that model telephone system.
1.
a)
SYSTEM PARAMETERS.
Select the MANUFACTURER–NUMBER of your telephone system
from the following list.
0 – OTHER
1 – ITT
2 – TIE
.
.
:X
Select the MODEL–NUMBER of your telephone system
from the following list.
0
.
.
– OTHER
.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
1-8
Installation and Maintenance Volume
If the telephone manufacturer is not listed, enter 0 for Other and press . If 0 for Other
is selected, specific questions about the other telephone system are asked, before continuing
with question 1.b). Refer to the Answering Questions About Other Telephone Systems section
in this chapter, for an explanation of these questions.
After the telephone system model number has been selected, the next questions ask whether the
DTMFINT and TONEDET Tables should be reset. These questions are displayed even if the PBX
selected does not require the DTMFINT or TONEDET Tables. For both DTMFINT and TONEDET
Tables, the default or empty line is YES. Therefore, if you are installing a server that does not
require the DTMFINT or TONEDET Table, enter N.
Do you wish to RESET DTMFINT TABLE to FACTORY–DEFAULTS for
this PBX? (If ”YES” , ALL current values will be LOST!)
( Y/N, empty line = Y ):
LOADING CONFIGURATION DATA...DONE
Do you wish to RESET TONEDET TABLE to FACTORY–DEFAULTS for
this PBX? (If “YES” , ALL current values will be LOST!)
( Y/N, empty line = Y ):
Question 1. b) asks for the company name.
b)
What is the name of the company at which this system
is being installed? (1–8 characters).
:
This name is used for internal reports. Up to eight characters can be entered; use the entire name or
an abbreviation of the name.
Question 1. c) asks for the system ID number.
c)
What is the SYSTEM ID number? (1–6 digits).
:
The serial number of the message server can be used as the system ID number. The serial number is
printed on the message server/UL label located at the lower rear of the cabinet. It is important that a
different number be used for each Octel Overture 200/300. This number is used to distinguish among
Octel Overture 200/300 message servers and to identify the message server when an alarm call is
made.
Question 1. e) asks for the telephone number of the person who should receive alarm calls.
e)
Octel Overture 200/300
What extension or phone number should be called when an ALARM
is encountered? (If this is an outside call, precede it with
the EXTERNAL ACCESS CODE and an Expect–Dial–Tone, where necessary.)
( 1–20 chars. May include: 0–9,*,#, D=DELAY, E=EXPECT–DIAL–TONE
empty Line = NONE )
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
INSTALL
1-9
If something goes wrong with the message server, it can call and report the problem. This can be an
on- or off-premise number. Include access codes, if necessary. Enter a D for a delay after any access
codes you might use. (The length of the delay is determined by System Parameter 28.) Enter an E for
“expect dial tone.” Do not use any spaces.
Question 1. f) asks for the string of numbers to be dialed for the forwarding string and the
cancel-forwarding string when the message server is reloading or finished reloading.
f)
What is the forwarding string, including destination extension,
to be dialed when the system is reloading and cannot accept calls?
(May include: 0–9,*,#, D=DELAY, E=EXPECT DIAL TONE, or F=FLASH,
1–12 chars, empty line = NONE
)
:
What is the cancel–forwarding string, to be dialed when the system
has finished reloading and is ready to accept calls?
(May include: 0–9,*,#, D=DELAY, E=EXPECT DIAL TONE, or F=FLASH,
1–12 chars, empty line = NONE
)
:
While the Octel Overture 200/300 is reloading after a power failure, the ports can be forwarded to an
alternate answering point. Enter the code that causes incoming calls to ring at the alternate answering
location. If NONE is entered, all ports remain off hook (busy) when the message server is loading or
reloading.
The second part of this question asks for the cancel-forwarding number to be entered, which allows a
return to the Octel Overture 200/300 when the server is again operational.
Question 1. g) asks for the minimum length for all mailbox security codes.
g)
Enter the minimum length for all security codes.
(0–10, empty line = 0 )
:
The answer to this question defines the value for System Parameter 144 — MINIMUM LENGTH
FOR SECURITY CODES. The maximum length for a security code is 10 digits.
If this is changed after the initial installation, existing security codes with fewer digits are not
affected until the mailbox holder changes the security code.
Question 1. h) asks for the default security code for mailboxes that logon using a mailbox
number.
h)
PB60014–01
For mailboxes which logon via MAILBOX number (NO port/trunk cos attr 106)
enter the DEFAULT SECURITY CODE.
Note: This code will apply to all mailboxes which do not have a security
code defined.
(xx –10 digits, empty line = NONE
)
:
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
1-10
Installation and Maintenance Volume
If question 1. g) is configured, all new mailboxes must have a security code of the minimum length
or longer. The security code entered is the value defined for System Parameter 105 — DEFAULT
SECURITY CODE FOR MAILBOXES. This security code remains on each mailbox until a user
logs on to the mailbox and changes it.
The User ID Logon is not configured in the INSTALL program. Refer to the Feature
Description volume, Customizing System-Wide Features chapter, Mailbox Logon section.
XX is the value defined in question 1. g) for System Parameter 144. A default security code
must be set if the minimum length is greater than zero.
The security code assigned through this INSTALL question can be changed or deleted through
System Parameter 105. If the value of this parameter is modified, any existing mailboxes that already
have the default security code are automatically assigned the new default security code.
2. USER
2.
USER.
Enter each user’s MAILBOX, EXTENSION, and COS. Enter as:
(Mailbox=1–8 digits, Name=1–20 characters)
Extension=1–8 digits, COS=0–254, Enter NONE if desired for EXTENSION.
Enter “+” after COS to automatically increment:
MAILBOX, and EXTENSION.
Also, enter any mailboxes to be used as DISTRIBUTION LISTS.
To add users in a range, enter as:
MAILBOX1–MAILBOX2,EXTENSION,COS.
Enter empty line when done.
:2001–2019,2001,10
NOTE: MAILBOXES with first digit ”2” are 4 digits long.
:
Do you wish to add more users? (Y/N, empty line = Y)
:N
For each user, enter a mailbox number, extension number, and COS, separated only by commas. If
System Parameter 212 — USER I.D. LENGTH, is configured, enter the user ID number after the
mailbox number. Do not enter any spaces. Press after each line. Enter the numbers carefully
to avoid errors. You can correct mistakes later by using the MODIFY command in the UPDATE
program.
Define every mailbox, including individual mailboxes, information-only mailboxes, greeting
mailboxes, and distribution-list pilot numbers. Make sure to enter intercept mailboxes (numbers sent
when a caller does nothing or presses for assistance.)
In the INSTALL program, you can define users without the COS being created first in
UPDATE.
When adding multiple users that have the same COS, you can add them in a range. Refer to the
Adding Mailboxes in Ranges, USER Table Input Aid section in this chapter. You cannot cross
mailbox or extension first-digit boundaries when adding users in a range.
When adding a sequence of mailbox numbers one by one, you can enter a + after the COS to
automatically increment to the next sequential mailbox number. Refer to the + Auto-Increment,
USER Table Input Aid section in this chapter.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
INSTALL
1-11
After each mailbox is entered, a colon (:) is displayed, indicating that the next mailbox can be
entered.
Press at the colon when you are finished entering mailboxes. The message server prompts
Do you wish to add more users? Enter N.The INSTALL program goes to the next
question.
If you press before finishing, the Octel Overture 200/300 asks whether you want to exit the
USER Table. Simply respond NO to return to the USER Table. Mailboxes may also be added later
using UPDATE.
3. SLOTS
The SLOTS Table contains information about each line card slot, integration card slot, and
applications card slot. The SLOTS Table allows each line card and integration card to be configured
individually. Enter the slot number and the type of card to be installed.
.3. SLOTS
Enter SLOT NUMBER to INSTALL
INS:1
6 –LIC4
2 –SLIC
7 –DAC4
3 –RIC
10–LIC8
4 –ATTIC
11–TLC8
13–SIC8
18–LIC4I
5 –MITEL
23–DTC17–E1
26–DLC16
50–PICROLM
51–PICATT
52–PICNT
33–ILIC12FR
34–ILIC12UK
35–ILIC12JP
37–ILIC12GR
Enter Card Type.
SLOT 1 : 6
8 –ACP
17–FAX4
16–FAX8
22–LAN
When the configuration information for a port is the same information entered for the previous
port, only the extension number of the port need be entered, followed by . The
information for the remainder of the line is automatically entered.
Different cards can be configured within a single Octel Overture 200/300. The EntryWorks ACP card
can only be configured in slot 7 for the Octel Overture 200 and in slot 12 for the Octel Overture 300.
The dialog for configuring a telemarketing line card (TLC) is similar to the dialog for
configuring a line interface card (LIC).
After you enter the card type for DLC16, ILC12, and PIC, enter the LSTTAB Table to be referenced.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
1-12
Installation and Maintenance Volume
.SLOT 1:51
Enter LSPTAB table to be referenced for this slot.
0–DEFAULT
1–ILC12_FR.
2–ILC12_GE
3–DLC16_US
4–DLC16_AU
5–DLC16_GE
6–ILC12_US
7–DLC16_FR
8–TI
9–MD110-E1
10–DLC16_UK
11–ILC12_UK
12–DLC16_90
(Empty line = 0)
MOD:
Should this card be:
(1 – PRIMARY
2 – SECONDARY
3 – TERTIARY
N – no
) sync receiver of the master clock?
(1–3, N. Empty line = N):
When you install a PIC card, you must configure the system-clock (master clock) sync source. Refer
to the Configuration volume, Slots Table chapter, for information about the LSPTAB Table and the
master clock configuration.
The following examples show the dialog for configuring the different cards. Refer to the
Configuration volume, Slots Table chapter, Using UPDATE section, for information about
configuring the card types.
Direct Access Card (DAC)
SLOT 2:7
Enter information for each PORT.
Enter as: EXTENSION NUMBER connected to each port (1–8 digits),
CLASS–OF–SERVICE (0–254), SIGNALLING (DTMF, Rotary),
TRUNK TYPE (Wink, Immed, Delay, Loop, Ground).
1 :333,254,DTMF,DELAY
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
INSTALL
1-13
Integration Card
SLOT 4 :5
Enter information for each PORT.
Enter as: EXTENSION NUMBER connected to each port (1–8 digits),
CLASS–OF–SERVICE (0–254), ANSWER MODE (AX, CX, MX), USE PORT FOR
MESSAGE WAITING AND NETWORK OUTCALLING (Y/N), TEST CHANNEL (Y/N)
1 :334,250,AX,N,N
2 :
Configure Integration (1–4=Msg Waiting Link):1
Enter empty line when done.
INS:
Integration cards installed in the message server must be the same. Integration cards can be installed
in Slots A1 through A6 for the Octel Overture 200. For the Octel Overture 300, most integration
cards can be configured in any slot not used for line cards. ATTIC integration cards and SIC8 cards
cannot go in slot 12 of the Octel Overture 300.
Except for the AT&T System 75/Definity G1, and the G3 ATTIC integrations, each port can be
allocated to only one integration unit. Refer to the Integration volume for additional details about the
specific integration you are configuring.
The fax application processor card can be installed in any unoccupied slot in the Octel Overture
200/300 cabinet. The following is an example of the dialog for configuring a fax application
processor.
.SLOT 8:17
Enter information for each PORT.
Enter as: CLASS-OF-SERVICE ( 0–254 ), TEST CHANNEL (Y/N).
1:126,N
2:126,N
4. NETWORK ROUTES
5. NETWORK LOCATIONS
6. NET NUMBERING PLAN
Questions 4, 5, and 6 pertain to collocated message servers and multilocation networking.
For information about configuring networking, refer to the Networking volume.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
1-14
Installation and Maintenance Volume
4.
NETWORK ROUTES.
Enter the name for each NETWORK ROUTE, whether the route can be
dropped upon reconnect to caller, and the ACCESS DIGITS to be dialed.
ENTER AS:
ROUTE NAME (1–6 chars), DROP (Y or N), ACCESSDIG (1–29 digits)
ACCESS DIGITS may include: 0–9,*,# or any of the following:
D – delay.
E – wait for DIAL TONE here.
N – wait for DIAL–UP OCC DIAL TONE here.
P – dial PUBLIC NETWORK NUMBER here.
T – dial TIE NETWORK NUMBER here.
Enter empty line when done.
:33,N,456
:
5.
NETWORK LOCATIONS.
Enter requested information for all NETWORK LOCATIONS.
Enter new LOCATION NAME. (1–6 chars)
Enter empty line when done.
:(location name)
Does (location name) have a SYSTEM? (Y/N, empty line = Y)
:
Press
after each question to continue.
If you are installing a single-cabinet message server without remote networking, press
to skip to question 7. DISTRIBUTION LISTS.
If the (location name) does not have a SYSTEM, the next question is as follows:
Does (location name) have the same PBX type as SELF? (PBX type)
(Y/N, empty line = N) (If ”YES”, will do CALL–PROGRESS–DETECTION.)
:
If the (location name) does have a SYSTEM, enter the protocol to use, as follows:
Enter the PROTOCOL to use with (location name) (1,2,3,4,5,empty line =3)
If the above question is answered with 2, refer to the Networking volume, Analog Networking
chapter and Location Table chapter.
If the above question is answered with 4 for AMIS Analog networking, refer to the Networking
volume, Analog Networking chapter and Location Table chapter.
If the above question is answered with 5, refer to the Networking volume, Analog Networking
chapter and Location Table chapter.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
INSTALL
1-15
Is (location name) located on the same PBX as this system? (Y/N,empty line = N)
:
Enter ROUTE NAMES for up to three ROUTE CHOICES to (location name)
1:
2:
3:
.
Enter PUBLIC NETWORK NUMBER (PNN) to call (location name)
.
(May include: 0–9,*,#, D=DELAY, E=EXPECT DIAL TONE, or Cn.
1–12 chars, empty line = NONE
)
:
Enter TIE NETWORK NUMBER (TNN) to call (location name)
.
(May include: 0–9,*,#, D=DELAY, E=EXPECT DIAL TONE, or Cn.
1–7 chars, empty line = NONE
)
:
Is (location name)
:
accessible over the DIGITAL NETWORK? (Y/N, empty line = N)
If the above question is answered Y for Digital Networking, refer to the Networking volume, Digital
Networking chapter.
6.
NET NUMBERING PLAN.
Enter NUMBERING PLAN information for each NETWORK LOCATION.
Enter as:
LOCATION NAME, INITIAL DIGITS (1–8 digits), NET MAILBOX LENGTH (1–16),
NUM OF DIGITS TO STRIP(0–15)., NUM OF DIGITS TO STRIP FROM SELF(0–8)
Enter empty line when done.
7. LISTS
Question 7 is used to create System Distribution Lists.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
1-16
Installation and Maintenance Volume
7.
DISTRIBUTION LISTS.
Enter the LIST NUMBER. (1–16 digits).
This Number must already exist as a mailbox in the USER table.
Then enter each mailbox to be added to the list.(1–16 digits).
If the list exists, new mailboxes will be appended to existing ones.
Enter empty line when done.
Enter DISTRIBUTION LIST NUMBER.
ADD:4000
WARNING: MESSAGES IF ANY IN MAILBOX WILL BE LOST!
ARE YOU SURE (Y/N) ? (Y/N, EMPTY LINE = N):Y
NEW DISTRIBUTION LIST.
Enter each MAILBOX or RANGE to be added to this list.
During INSTALL, you can create system distribution lists and add member addresses. The
distribution list number and member numbers must already exist as a mailbox in the USER Table.
If distribution lists are not being added during INSTALL, press
through the UPDATE program.
. You can add them later,
8. COS
COS tables are not configured during the INSTALL program. When INSTALL is complete, enter the
UPDATE program and add attributes to the COS numbers that were defined for each port and
mailbox defined in the USER Table in question 2. Refer to the Configuration volume, COS chapter.
8.
COS.
UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL is complete.
9. INFORMATION TABLES
Question 9 lists the INFORMATION Table indexes for either port or mailbox configuration.
9.
INFORMATION TABLES.
Enter the INFORMATION TABLE number to be added. (1–255)
Enter empty line when done.
:254
Is TABLE 254 for a PORT/TRUNK? (If NO, it’s for a MAILBOX.)
(Y/N, empty line = N)
:Y
To COPY an existing INFORMATION TABLE, enter the TABLE NUMBER.
(1–255, empty line = NONE)
Define at least one port and one mailbox INFORMATION Table, because a default INFORMATION
Table must be entered for every SCHEDULE Table (Question 10).
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
INSTALL
1-17
The Octel Overture 200/300 obtains data from the INFORMATION Tables to determine how each
port and mailbox process the calls. The COS for each port and mailbox points the Octel Overture
200/300 to the SCHEDULE Table to determine which INFORMATION Table to use.
When adding an INFORMATION Table, be sure to answer the first question accurately — IS
TABLE X FOR A PORT/TRUNK? (If NO, it’s for a Mailbox.) This is important
because the subsequent questions are different for ports/trunks and mailboxes. For consistency and
clarity, number port INFORMATION Tables from 255, descending, and mailbox INFORMATION
Tables from 1, ascending.
Port INFORMATION Table Indexes
The following indexes are applicable to port INFORMATION Tables. Refer to the Configuration
volume, Information Table chapter, for details about each index.
Index 1. Each port/trunk INFORMATION Table must have an intercept position. The mailbox
must already exist in the USER Table.
1.
Index 2. A company greeting mailbox can be configured. If a mailbox number is not entered,
the manufacturer’s recorded generic greeting is used.
2.
PB60014–01
COMPANY GREETING MAILBOX
:
(1–8 digits, N = NONE, empty line = NONE
)
Index 3. The following index appears if the Incoming Call Restriction option is installed.
3.
INTERCEPT MAILBOX
(1–8 digits )
:
CALL BLOCKING NUMBER
:
(0–255, 0 = NONE, empty line = NONE)
Indexes 4 and 5. The following indexes appear if the Single Digit Menus option is installed.
Index 5 is not listed if index 4 is NONE.
4.
MAX DIGIT FOR MENU
:
(0–8, 0 = NONE, empty line = NONE)
5.
PREFIX DIGIT FOR MENU
(1–7 DIGITS, N = NONE, empty line = NONE)
:XX
WARNING: The following MAILBOXES must exist in the USER TABLE or in a
COLOCATED cabinet:
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
1-18
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Indexes 6, 7, 9, 10, and 18. The following five indexes are listed.
6.
PRE EXTENSION DIGITS
(1–12 digits; may include: 0–9, *, #, D=DELAY, E= EXPECT–DIAL–TONE,
N = NONE, empty line = NONE
)
(When caller dials EXTENSION that is not a defined MAILBOX.)
:
7.
RINGS BEFORE NO ANSWER
(3–20, empty line = 4
)
(When caller dials EXTENSION that is not a defined MAILBOX.)
:
9.
TIMES TO RETRY ON BUSY
(0–40, empty line = NONE)
(When caller dials EXTENSION that is not a defined MAILBOX.)
:
10.
USE ALT TRANSFER CODES
(Y/N, empty line = N)
(When caller dials EXTENSION that is not a defined MAILBOX.)
:
18.
NEXT MAILBOX
:
27.
AUTOTRANSFER TO ASSIST
:
MSG WITH AUTO TRANSFER
:
LANGUAGE: 0= NONE
1= ENGL US––V
2= SPANISH
(0–2, empty line = 0)
(Y/N, empty line = N)
VERSION
VERSION
8D
8D
Index 34. When index 34 is configured, callers are transferred to assistance instead of being
disconnected if their attempts to log on are unsuccessful.
34. LOGON FAILURE XFER MAILBOX
:
Octel Overture 200/300
(Y/N, empty line = N)
Index 29. The following index appears if the Multilingual Prompts option is installed. The
languages shown in index 29 depend on current settings. The following is an example where
English and Spanish are currently installed.
29.
)
Indexes 26 and 27. The following indexes are used with Personal Assistance, Adaptive Integration,
and with the DID/E&M Trunk Interface Module. Index 27 is not listed if index 26 is N.
26.
(1–8 digits, N = NONE, empty line = NONE
Serenade 3.0
(1–8 digits, N = NONE, empty line = NONE
)
PB60014–01
INSTALL
1-19
After index 34 is answered, the port INFORMATION Table is complete, as shown.
––– INFORMATION TABLE 254 COMPLETE –––
Enter the INFORMATION TABLE number to be added. (1–255)
Enter empty line when done.
Mailbox INFORMATION Table Indexes
The following indexes are applicable to the mailbox INFORMATION Table. Refer to the
Configuration volume, Information Table chapter, for details about each index.
Index 1. If an intercept mailbox is not defined for a mailbox, the call defaults to the Intercept
Mailbox defined for the port or trunk on which the call came in.
1.
Index 3. The following index appears if the Incoming Call Restriction option is installed.
3.
PB60014–01
INTERCEPT MAILBOX If none, uses PORT/TRUNK info.
(1–8 digits, N = NONE, empty line = NONE
)
:
CALL BLOCKING NUMBER
:
(0–255, 0 = NONE, empty line = NONE)
Indexes 4 and 5. The following indexes appear if the Single Digit Menus option is installed.
Index 5 is not listed if index 4 is NONE.
4.
MAX DIGIT FOR MENU
:
(0–8, 0 = NONE, empty line = NONE)
5.
PREFIX DIGIT FOR MENU
(1–7 DIGITS, N = NONE, empty line = NONE)
:XX
WARNING: The following MAILBOXES must exist in the USER Table:
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
1-20
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Indexes 6 through 13. The following indexes are listed.
6.
PRE EXTENSION DIGITS
(1–12 digits; may include: 0–9, *, #, D=DELAY, E= EXPECT–DIAL–TONE,
N = NONE, empty line = NONE
)
:
7.
RINGS BEFORE NO ANSWER
:
8.
MSG WAITING RINGS
:
9.
TIMES TO RETRY ON BUSY
:
(3–20, empty line = 4
(3–20, empty line = 4
)
)
(0–40, empty line = NONE)
10.
USE ALT TRANSFER CODE
:
(Y/N, empty line = N)
11.
DIVERT MSG TO MAILBOX
:
12.
MSG WAITING NOTIF
:
13.
AUTO GREETING ACTIVATION
(1–8 digits, N = NONE, empty line = NONE
)
(Y/N, empty line = Y)
(Y/N, empty line = N)
:
Index 14. The following index is only listed if index 12 is Y.
14.
OFFSITE ATTEMPT TIMES
:
(0–255, empty line = NONE)
Indexes 15, 16, and 17. The following indexes are not listed if index 14 is 0.
15. OFFSITE SPEAK TIMES
:
(0–8, empty line = 3)
16. OFFSITE SPEAK DELAY
:
(1–32 seconds, empty line = 5)
17. OFFSITE PREFIX DIGITS
(1–12 digits; may include: 0–9,*,#, D=DELAY, E=EXPECT–DIAL–TONE,
N=NONE, empty line=NONE)
:
Index 18. The following index is listed.
18.
Octel Overture 200/300
NEXT MAILBOX
:
Serenade 3.0
(1–8 digits, N = NONE, empty line = NONE
)
PB60014–01
INSTALL
Indexes 19 and 20. If the answer to index 18 is 0, indexes 19 and 20 are not listed. When index
20 is yes, the digit string to be dialed must be configured in System Parameter 259.
19. OFFSITE DIAL SYSP DIGS
:
(Y/N, empty line = N)
20. OFFSITE END SYSP DIGS
:
(Y/N, empty line = N)
Index 21. The following index appears if Call Queuing is installed.
21. FIFO QUEUE MSG MAILBOX
:
22. MAXIMUM MSG LENGTH
:
1-21
(1–8 digits, N = NONE, empty line = NONE)
(1–180 minutes, empty line = 6 minutes)
23.
MAX NUMBER OF MSGS
:
(1–60, empty line = 32
24.
PERSONAL ASSISTANCE
:
(Y/N, empty line = N)
)
Index 25. The following index appears if Adaptive Integration is installed.
25. QUICK GREETING ACTIV (Y/N, empty line = N)
:
26. AUTOTRANSFER TO ASSIST (Y/N, empty line = N)
:
27. MSG WITH AUTO TRANSFER (Y/N, empty line = N)
:
28. ANNOUNCE CALLS TO INT (Y/N, empty line = N)
:
Index 29. This index appears if Multilingual Prompts is installed. The languages shown in
Question 29 depend on current settings. The following is an example where English and Spanish
are currently installed.
29.
LANGUAGE: 0= NONE
1= ENGL US––V
2= SPANISH
(0–2, empty line = 0)
PB60014–01
VERSION
VERSION
8D
8D
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
1-22
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Indexes 30 and 32. These indexes appear if Fax Mail Plus is installed. For index 30, enter the
digits of the telephone number for the designated group fax delivery machine.
30.GROUP FAX NUMBER
(1–32 digits, may include: 0–9, *, #, D=DELAY, E=EXPECT-DIAL-TONE,
empty line = NONE
)
ADD:
Index 31. Enter YES in the following item to provide for offsite/pager outcalling to be made
only for urgent messages. The default is NO.
31. OFFSITE ONLY IF URGENT (Y/N, empty line N)
ADD:
32. MAX FAX DELIV ATTEMPTS
(0–255, 0=USE SYSTEM PARAMETER 209, 255=UNLIMITED, empty line=SYSP 209)
ADD:
Indexes 33, 35, and 36. Index 33 is operational only if the 5000 User Interface feature is
installed.
33.
HELP OPERATOR MAILBOX
:
(1–8 digits, N = NONE, empty line = NONE
35.
OVERRIDE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
:
36.
DEFAULT GREETING MAILBOX
:
)
(1–8 digits, N = NONE, empty line = NONE)
(1–8 digits, N = NONE, empty line = NONE)
After index 36 is answered, the mailbox INFORMATION Table is complete, as shown.
––– INFORMATION TABLE 1 COMPLETE –––
Enter the INFORMATION TABLE number to be added. (1–255)
Enter empty line when done.
10. SCHEDULE TABLES
Enter a SCHEDULE Table for each COS entered for the user mailboxes defined in Question 2.
The message server automatically requests a schedule for each COS number entered. Enter the
appropriate times, days, and INFORMATION Table numbers for each SCHEDULE Table time
period displayed. When finished with the time periods, enter an INFORMATION Table to be used
for the default times.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
INSTALL
10.
1-23
SCHEDULE TABLE.
– – – SCHEDULE FOR COS 10
– – –
TIME PERIOD 1:
Enter INFORMATION TABLE number to use. (1–255)
Enter empty line when done.
:
Enter applicable WEEKDAYS as: SU,MO,TU,WE,TH,FR,SA,HOL
(Empty line = MO,TU,WE,TH,FR)
:
Enter START time as: HOURS (00–23): MINUTES (00–59)
(Empty line = 00:00)
:
Enter STOP time as: HOURS (00–23): MINUTES (00–59)
(Empty line = 23:59)
:
TIME PERIOD 2:
Enter INFORMATION TABLE number to use. (1–255)
Enter empty line when done.
:
When you are finished entering all time periods for the SCHEDULE Table, press at the
colon. The message server prompts for the default INFORMATION Table number.
Enter the DEFAULT INFORMATION TABLE number to use outside the
TIME PERIODS specified for COS 10 . (1–255)
INSTALL COMPLETE.
WAIT... DONE.
SAVE configuration to a DISKETTE? ( Y/N , empty line = N ).
:
WARNING: FOR PROPER OPERATION SYSTEM MUST BE RESTARTED AFTER INSTALL!
DAY MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
––––––––
@
SYSTEMNAME
ID:XXXXXX
SYSTEM INSTALLATION COMPLETED
S/N:XXXXXX
PBX:00
––––––––
Save the configuration on your backup configuration diskette. Leave the diskette in the disk drive.
The Octel Overture 200/300 must be reloaded for to operate correctly. To reload the Octel Overture
200/300, at the @ prompt, enter
RESTA 2
After the message server has reloaded, it is recommended that you enter the UPDATE program and
use the LIST command to review the answers you just entered. You might also need to change some
of the system parameter values. Refer to the Configuration volume, System Parameter Table chapter,
in this volume.
Use the UPDATE program to modify system parameters and to set COS Attributes.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
1-24
1.4
Installation and Maintenance Volume
ANSWERING QUESTIONS ABOUT OTHER TELEPHONE
SYSTEMS
The INSTALL program asks the following questions when your telephone system manufacturer or
PBX model number is not listed in question 1.a).
Please answer the following questions for your telephone system:
How do you TRANSFER a call to another EXTENSION?
(May include: 0–9,*,#, D=DELAY, E=EXPECT DIAL TONE, or F=FLASH,
1–8 chars, empty line = NONE)
:FE
Enter the sequence of events when transferring a call before you enter the destination extension
number. For example, if the sequence is “flash,” wait for a dial tone, then enter the extension
number, type FE. (If the telephone hookswitch is pressed momentarily, that is considered a flash.)
Enter the sequence of events for a reconnection to the original caller.
How do you RE–CONNECT to the caller if the EXTENSION doesn’t answer?
(May include: 0–9,*,#, D=DELAY, E=EXPECT DIAL TONE, or F=FLASH,
1–8 chars, empty line = NONE)
:F
This is usually similar to transferring a call. For example, if FE is entered for a transfer, an F (flash)
is probably used for a reconnection.
Type the digits, if any, required to complete a transfer. If there are none, press
.
What digits, if any, are dialed before HANG–UP to COMPLETE a transfer?
(May include: 0–9,*,#, D=DELAY, E=EXPECT DIAL TONE, or F=FLASH,
1–8 chars, empty line = NONE)
:
A ringback is the sound you hear in the receiver when the telephone you are calling is ringing. The
standard ringback is one ring, alternating with silence. A double-interrupted ringback is two short
rings, and then silence. Enter Y for double ringback.
Does this telephone system give DOUBLE–INTERRUPTED RINGBACK
(Y/N, Empty line =N)
:Y
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
INSTALL
1-25
Some PBX systems may require a digit sequence to be dialed so that system
extensions get assigned to the incoming call group.
What digits, if any, should be dialed on all PORTS upon POWER–UP?
(May include: 0–9,*,#, D=DELAY, E=EXPECT DIAL TONE, or F=FLASH,
1–8 chars, Empty line = E)
:
End of telephone system specific questions.
At this point, the INSTALL program continues with question 1.b), Company Name. Refer to the
Answering Questions in INSTALL section.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
1-26
1.5
Installation and Maintenance Volume
EXITING BEFORE THE INSTALL IS COMPLETE
There are two ways that you can leave and reaccess the INSTALL program, shown in the following
examples. The first example shows what to do if you make a mistake during INSTALL and, instead
of correcting it, you choose to exit and start over. The second example shows what to do if you are
interrupted during INSTALL and choose to stop temporarily and continue later.
Restarting INSTALL
If you make a serious mistake, and you don’t want to fix it later, you can leave the program and start
over. At the point you wish to exit the program, type .E at the colon (:) prompt. The following
example, starting at question 1.c), shows how.
c)
What is the SYSTEM ID number? (1–6 digits).
:555
d)
How many (Overture 200/300) ports will be used? (1–8, empty line = 4)
:.E
EXITING INSTALL
WAIT...DONE.
–––––––––––––––SYSTEM INSTALLATION SUSPENDED––––––––––––––
@
When you want to return to the INSTALL program, type INSTA at the @ prompt, as shown:
@INSTA
–––––SYSTEM INSTALLATION DIALOG
MON
MM/DD
HH:MM:SS
YYYY
SYSTEM NAME
ID:000
You have an installation already in progress.
Do you wish to start over with a NEW INSTALLATION?
(Y/N, empty line = NO, continue installation in progress)
:Y
CLEARING ALL TABLES...DONE.
INITIALIZING ALL USER DIRECTORIES...DONE.
1.SYSTEM PARAMETERS.
a)Select the MANUFACTURER NUMBER ..... etc.
All the information entered earlier has been cleared. Begin again with the first question. Refer to the
Answering Questions in INSTALL section.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
INSTALL
1-27
Exiting and Continuing
If you start INSTALL and are interrupted, you can leave the program and continue later at the point
where you left off. The following example, starting at question 1.c), shows how.
c)
What is the SYSTEM ID number? (1–6 digits).
:555
d)
How many (Overture 200/300) ports will be used? (1–8, empty line = 4)
:.E
EXITING INSTALL
WAIT...DONE
–––––––––––––––SYSTEM INSTALLATION SUSPENDED–––––––––––––
@
Later, when you want to continue, type INSTA at the @ prompt, as shown.
@INSTA
–––––SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIALOG–––––
DAY
MM/DD
HH:MM:SS
YYYY
SYSTEM NAME
ID:000
You have an installation already in progress.
Do you wish to start over with a NEW INSTALLATION?
(Y/N, Empty line = NO, continue installation in progress)
d)How many ports will be used? (1–8, empty line = 4)
:
Begin entering data where you left off.
Reinstalling an Installed Octel Overture 200/300
After the Octel Overture 200/300 is installed, situations could arise that warrant a reinstallation of
the message server such as the following:
The PBX has been replaced.
There were errors during INSTALL. (Instituting a reinstallation might be more time-efficient
than correcting major errors.)
The server has been upgraded to a larger disk.
During a reinstallation, you can use the following options to:
PB60014–01
Reinstall the Octel Overture 200/300, answering every question in the INSTALL program.
Preload all the configuration tables from the backup configuration diskette.
Preload the specific range of tables.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
1-28
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Enter INSTA at the @ prompt. If you enter Y to reinstall the message server, the message server
prompts for a password. Enter the maintenance level password. If you do not enter a password or you
enter an incorrect password, the INSTALL program is aborted.
@INSTA
–––––––
SYSTEM INSTALLATION DIALOG –––––––
DAY MM/DD HH:MM:SS YYYY SYSTEM NAME ID:000
S/N:000000
PBX:00
SYSTEM HAS ALREADY BEEN INSTALLED.
Do you wish to RE–INSTALL? (Y/N, empty line = N)
<>
:Y
PASSWORD:
CLEARING ALL TABLES...DONE.
INITIALIZING ALL USER DIRECTORIES...DONE.
All the information entered earlier during the INSTALL is cleared. The message server prompts you
to preload any configuration tables from the backup configuration diskette.
Do you wish to PRE-LOAD any tables from a previous INSTALL
from your DISKETTE? (Y/N, empty line = N)
:
If you answer N, none of the database tables are loaded. The reinstallation begins with the first
INSTALL question. Refere to the Answering Questions in INSTALL section.
If tables should be preloaded, enter Y and insert the configuration-backup diskette in the message
server drive. The message server asks if all tables should be preloaded.
Insert desired DISKETTE in drive. Press RETURN when ready...
PRE–LOAD ALL configuration tables?
:Y
If you answer Y, the Octel Overture 200/300 preloads all of the system configuration tables. If you
answer N, the Octel Overture 200/300 responds with the following:
PRE–LOAD USERS, DIST. LIST, COS, SCHEDULE, INFO., HOLIDAY and NAMES tables?
If you answer Y, these tables are preloaded. If you answer N, no tables are preloaded.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
INSTALL
1-29
Answering Y To Preload All Tables
When preloading, all configuration tables are loaded. However, if a feature has not been purchased
for the message server, that table is not used.
@INSTA
SYSTEM HAS ALREADY BEEN INSTALLED.
Do you wish to RE–INSTALL? (Y/N, empty line = N)
<>
:Y
PASSWORD:
CLEARING ALL TABLES...DONE.
INITIALIZING ALL USER DIRECTORIES...DONE.
Do you wish to PRE–LOAD any tables from a previous INSTALL
from your DISKETTE? (Y/N, empty line = N)
:Y
Insert desired DISKETTE in drive. Press RETURN when ready...
PRE–LOAD ALL configuration tables?
:Y
Table PRELOAD COMPLETE.
1.
SYSTEM PARAMETERS.
Table PRE–LOADED from disk. UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL is complete.
2.
USER.
Table PRE–LOADED from disk. UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL is complete.
3.
SLOTS.
Table PRE–LOADED from disk. UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL is complete.
4.
NETWORK ROUTES.
Table PRE–LOADED from disk. UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL is complete.
5.
NETWORK LOCATIONS.
Table PRE–LOADED from disk. UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL is complete.
6.
NETWORK NUMBERING PLAN.
Table PRE–LOADED from disk. UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL is complete.
7.
DISTRIBUTION LISTS.
Table PRE–LOADED from disk. UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL is complete.
8.
COS.
Table PRE–LOADED from disk. UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL is complete.
9.
INFORMATION Tables.
Table PRE–LOADED from disk. UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL is complete.
10. SCHEDULE Table.
Table PRE–LOADED from disk. UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL is complete.
WARNING: FOR PROPER OPERATION SYSTEM MUST BE RESTARTED AFTER INSTALL:
INSTALL COMPLETE.
WAIT...DONE.
SAVE configuration to a DISKETTE? (Y/N, empty line = N).
:Y
You must reload the Octel Overture 200/300 for it to operate correctly. At the @ prompt, enter
RESTA 2. Make all UPDATE modifications after the message server has rebooted.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
1-30
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Answering N To Preload All Tables
When you answer N, no tables are preloaded.
@INSTA
SYSTEM HAS ALREADY BEEN INSTALLED.
Do you wish to RE–INSTALL? (Y/N, empty line = N)
<>
:Y
PASSWORD
CLEARING ALL Tables...Done.
INITIALIZING ALL USER DIRECTORIES...DONE.
Do you wish to PRE–LOAD any tables from a previous INSTALL
from your DISKETTE? (Y/N, empty line = N)
:Y
Insert desired DISKETTE in drive. Press RETURN when ready...
PRE–LOAD ALL configuration tables?
:N
RE–LOAD USERS, DIST. LIST, COS, SCHEDULE, INFO., HOLIDAY and NAMES tables?
:Y
PRE–LOAD NETWORKING Tables (ROUTE, LOCATION, and ACCESS)?
:N
Table PRE–LOAD COMPLETE.
1.
SYSTEM PARAMETERS.
The message server continues with the regular installation questions until it reaches 2. USER.
2.
USER
Table PRE–LOADED from disk. UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL is complete.
3.
SLOTS.
4.
NETWORK ROUTES
The following questions appear the same as in a regular installation.
Octel Overture 200/300
5.
NETWORK LOCATIONS.
6.
NETWORK NUMBERING PLAN.
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
INSTALL
7.
DISTRIBUTION LISTS.
Table PRE–LOADED from disk. UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL
is complete.
8.
COS.
Table PRE–LOADED from disk. UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL
is complete.
9.
INFORMATION TABLES.
Table PRE–LOADED from disk. UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL
is complete.
10.
SCHEDULE TABLES.
Table PRE–LOADED from disk. UPDATE if necessary when INSTALL
is complete.
1-31
Continue with the questions as shown in INSTALL, until this message appears:
WARNING: FOR PROPER OPERATION SYSTEM MUST BE RESTARTED AFTER INSTALL!
INSTALL COMPLETE.
WAIT...DONE.
SAVE configuration to a DISKETTE? (Y/N, empty line = N).
:Y
DAY MM/DD HH:MM:SS YYYY SYSTEM NAME ID:000000 S/N:000000 PBX:00
– – – – – – – – – – SYSTEM INSTALLATION COMPLETED – – – – – – –
For correct operation, you must reload the Octel Overture 200/300 after INSTALL. At the @ prompt,
type
RESTA 2
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2
HARDWARE
Chapter Contents
2.1
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Octel Overture 200/300 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Octel Overture 200 Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Octel Overture 300 Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Subsystem Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Line Interface Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Telemarketing Line Card (TLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Direct Access Card (DAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
EntryWorks ACP Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Fax Application Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
LAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Integration Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Voice Control Unit (VCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Central Processing Unit (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Power Supply Unit (PSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Option Control Chip (OCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Works for Serenade Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Octel Overture 300 Load/Backup Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Hard Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Figures
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200 Cabinet Shelf Structure, From the Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Octel Overture 200 Cabinet, Inside Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Octel Overture 200 Cabinet, Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Octel Overture 200 Cabinet, Inside Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Octel Overture 300 Cabinet Shelf Structure, From the Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Octel Overture 300 Cabinet, Inside Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Octel Overture 300 Cabinet, Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Octel Overture 300 Cabinet, Inside Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2
HARDWARE
Tables
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
Octel Overture 200/300 Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octel Overture 200 Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octel Overture 300 Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Unit d.c. Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2-14
2-17
2-18
2-23
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Hardware
Octel Overture 200 Message Server Specifications
Mailboxes
Up to 5,000 per cabinet With Capacity On Demand, mailboxes are
purchased as required.
Messages
Maximum number:
Maximum length:
60 per mailbox, configurable by COS
3.0 hours, configurable by COS
Capacity (per cabinet)
Voice Storage
Up to 540 hours per cabinet. With Capacity On Demand, storage hours are
purchased as required.
Redundant Voice Storage
Up to 270 hours, optional
Redundant System Storage
Standard with multiple-disk message servers
Ports
Up to 64 ports. With Capacity On Demand, ports are purchased as
required.
Maximum Cabinets per System
10 (with Collocated Analog Networking)
Classes of Service (COS)
255
Cabinet Specifications
Cabinet Dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
24.8 inches (63.0 cm)
13.0 inches (33.0 cm)
19.5 inches (49.5 cm)
Cabinet Weight
100 pounds (45.4 kg) maximum, depending on configuration
Air Intake
150 cfm
Air Filter
Washable, installed in door
Cable Access
Rear
Service Access
Front, locked door
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Hardware
Octel Overture 200 Message Server Specifications (continued)
Electrical Requirements
120-Vac System
Voltage Range
Frequency
Maximum Power
90–132 Vac
47–63 Hz
500 watts
230-Vac System
Voltage Range
Frequency
Maximum Power
180–260 Vac
47–63 Hz
500 watts
–48-Vdc System
Voltage Range
Maximum Power
42–60 Vdc
500 watts
Remote Alarm
Alarm Relay
Closures
Rating
Access
2 (Major, Minor)
0.5 A at 48 Vdc
Rear, DB9 connector
Alarm Callout
Automatic Callout to configurable service number
Alarm Types
Major Alarm, Minor Alarm
Temperature Alarm
At Alarm Temperatures <50F or >122F (<10C or >50C)
Environmental Requirements
Temperature
Operating (Sea Level)
Nonoperating
Gradient, Operating
Gradient, Nonoperating
50F (10C) to 104F (40C)
–50F (–10C) to 129F (54C)
18F (10C) per hour, maximum
36F (20C) per hour, maximum
Humidity, Operating
20–80%, noncondensing
Atmosphere, Particulate
Matter
80 micrograms per cubic millimeter (max)
Corrosive Gases
<10 ppm
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Hardware
Octel Overture 200 Message Server Specifications (continued)
Environmental Requirements (continued)
Altitude
Operating
Nonoperating, transit
Nonoperating, storage
–200 to 10,000 feet (–61 to 3,048 meters)
–200 to 40,000 feet (–61 to 12,192 meters)
–200 to 10,000 feet (–61 to 3,048 meters)
Vibration, operational at
22–500 Hz
0.1 g
Installation Environment
Equipment room or office
Flooring
No special requirements
Cabinet Clearance
Front
Rear
Sides
Top
22 inches (55.9 cm)
6 inches (15.2 cm)
1 inch (2.5 cm)
1 inch (2.5 cm)
Heat Dissipation
Maximum 500 watts (1706 Btu per hour) per cabinet, each cooled with
two internal, 4-inch (10.2-cm) fans
Interfaces
Telephone Ports
2-wire, 2500-type; 2-wire, DID-type, optional
Port Connector
50-pin telco, four ports per connector with 4-port LIC, eight ports per
connector with 8-port LIC, twelve ports per connector with 12-port ILC12,
and sixteen ports per connector with 16-port DLC16, rear access, and
sixteen ports per DAC I/O panel (four-port DAC)
System Serial Port
RS-232C, auto-baud-rate select, DB25, 300–19,200 bps
RS-232C Integration Port
RS-232C, 1200 bps, DB25
Internal Modem
300/1200/2400 baud; Bell 103/212A and CCITT V.22/CCITT V.22 bis,
one per cabinet, accessible from any telephony port
Works Serial Ports
Four RS-232C (2 DB9, 2 DB25) ports, rear access
Alarm Relay
DB9, rear access
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Hardware
Octel Overture 200 Message Server Specifications (continued)
Routine Maintenance
Air Filter Cleaning
At least yearly
Fan Inspection
At least yearly
System Protection
Overtemperature Shutdown
Disk Drive Spin Down
<41F or >131F (<5C or >55C), automatic recovery
Power Supply Shutdown
158F (70C), circuit breaker trip, manual recovery
Power Supply Unit Protection
Circuit Fuse
120-Vac systems
230-Vac systems
DC systems
10 A
5A
15 A
Overcurrent
Four d.c. outputs, over current protection, automatic recovery
Overvoltage
Power supply shut off
Overtemperature
Power supply shut off, automatic recovery
System Adjustments
Cabinet Adjustments
Levelers
Internal Adjustments
None
Time-of-Day Clock
Accuracy
± 1 min/mo, at 77F / 25C
Battery Hold Time
>1 year, at 77F / 25C
Battery Life
10 years, at 77F / 25C
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Hardware
Octel Overture 300 Message Server Specifications
Mailboxes
Messages
Maximum Number
Maximum Length
Up to 10,000 per cabinet. With Capacity On Demand, mailboxes
purchased as required
60 per mailbox, configurable by COS
3.0 hours, configurable by COS
Capacity (per cabinet)
Voice Storage
Up to 1085 hours per cabinet. With Capacity On Demand, storage hours
purchased as required
Redundant Voice Storage
Up to 542 hours, optional
Redundant System Storage
Standard with multiple-disk systems
Ports
Up to 128 ports. With Capacity On Demand, ports purchased as required
Maximum Cabinets per System
10 (with Collocated Analog Networking)
Classes of Service (COS)
255
Cabinet Specifications
Cabinet Dimensions
Height
Width
Depth
37.5 inches (95.3 cm)
17.5 inches (44.5 cm)
19.5 inches (49.5 cm)
Cabinet Weight
220 pounds (100 kg) maximum, depending on configuration
Air Intake
300 cfm
Air Filter
Washable, installed in door
Cable Access
Rear
Service Access
Front, locked door
Rack Mount
19-inch (48.3 cm), optional
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Hardware
Octel Overture 300 Message Server Specifications (continued)
Electrical Requirements
120-Vac System
Voltage Range
Frequency
Maximum Power
90–132 Vac
47–63 Hz
1000 watts
230-Vac System
Voltage Range
Frequency
Maximum Power
180–260 Vac
47–63 Hz
1000 watts
–48-Vdc System
Voltage Range
Maximum Power
42–60 Vdc
1000 watts
Remote Alarm
Alarm Relay
Closures
Rating
Access
2 (Major, Minor)
0.5 A at 48 Vdc
Rear, DB9 connector
Alarm Callout
Automatic Callout to configurable service number
Alarm Types
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Temperature Alarm
At Alarm Temperatures <50F or >122F (<10C or >50C)
Environmental Requirements
Temperature
Operating (Sea Level)
Nonoperating
Gradient, Operating
Gradient, Nonoperating
50F (10C) to 104F (40C)
–50F (–10C) to 129F (54C)
18F (10C) per hour, maximum
36F (20C) per hour, maximum
Humidity, Operating
20–80%, noncondensing
Atmosphere, Particulate
Matter
80 micrograms per cubic millimeter (max)
Corrosive Gases
<10 ppm
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Hardware
Octel Overture 300 Message Server Specifications (continued)
Environmental Requirements
(continued)
Altitude
Operating
Nonoperating, in transit
Nonoperating, in storage
–200 to 10,000 feet (–61 to 3,048 meters)
–200 to 40,000 feet (–61 to 12,192 meters)
–200 to 10,000 feet (–61 to 3,048 meters)
Vibration, operational at
22–500 Hz
0.1 g
Installation Environment
Equipment room or office
Flooring
No special requirements
Cabinet Clearance
Front
Rear
Sides
Top
Heat Dissipation
22 inches (55.9 cm)
6 inches (15.2 cm)
1 inch (2.5 cm)
1 inch (2.5 cm)
Maximum 1,000 watts (3412 Btu per hour) per cabinet, each cooled with
four internal, 4-inch (10.2-cm) fans
Interfaces
Telephone Ports
2-wire, 2500-type; 2-wire, DID-type, optional
Port Connector
50-pin telco, four ports per connector with 4-port LIC, eight ports per
connector with 8-port LIC, twelve ports per connector with 12-port ILC12,
and sixteen ports per connector with 16-port DLC16, rear access; and
sixteen ports per DAC I/O panel (four-port DAC)
Serial Port
RS-232C, auto-baud-rate select, DB25, 300–19,200 bps
RS-232C Integration Port
RS-232C, 1200 bps, DB25
Internal Modem
300/1200/2400 baud; Bell 103/212A and CCITT V.22/CCITT V.22bis, one
per cabinet, accessible from any telephony port
Works Serial Ports
Four RS-232C (2 DB9, 2 DB25) ports, rear access
Alarm Relay
DB9, rear access
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Hardware
Octel Overture 300 Message Server Specifications (continued)
Routine Maintenance
Air Filter Cleaning
At least yearly
Fan Inspection
At least yearly
System Protection
Overtemperature Shutdown
Disk Drive Spin Down
<41F or >131F (<5C or >55C), automatic recovery
Power Supply Shutdown
158F (70C), circuit breaker trip, manual recovery
Power Supply Unit Protection
Circuit Breaker
System overcurrent trip, manual recovery
Overcurrent
All six d.c. outputs, automatic recovery
Overvoltage
All six d.c. outputs, circuit breaker trip, manual recovery
Overtemperature
Circuit breaker trip, manual recovery
System Adjustments
Cabinet Adjustments
Levelers
Internal Adjustments
None
Time of Day Clock
Accuracy
± 1 min/mo, at 77F / 25C
Battery Hold Time
>1 year, at 77F / 25C
Battery Life
10 years, at 77F / 25C
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Hardware
2.1
2-1
HARDWARE
The Hardware chapter discusses the Octel Overture 200 and Octel Overture 300 message-server
architecture. Except where noted, the information is the same for both message servers.
Octel Overture 200/300 Cabinets
Octel Overture 200/300 cabinets are designed to allow all normal maintenance to be performed from
the front. All message server cabling is connected at the rear of the cabinet. No side access is
necessary.
The message server door should be closed and locked when access is not required. The door can be
removed, as needed.
The following connection points are found on the rear of an Octel Overture 200/300 message server:
System terminal port
Alarm port
50-pin telco connectors
RS-232C connectors
System Terminal Ports
The system terminal port is an RS-232C port used to communicate with the Octel Overture 200/300 for
message server configuration, error reporting, and other system maintenance. Two parallel connectors
to the system terminal port are located on the cabinet, one in the front (SP1) and one in the rear (J1).
Connection can be made to only one of these connectors at a time. If a terminal is to remain with the
message server permanently, use the rear connector. If a terminal is to be connected temporarily, use the
front connector. The front cabinet door must be open to use the front connection.
The system terminal port supports any ASCII send/receive serial terminal. Refer to the Installation
chapter, Connecting Terminals section, in this volume.
System Alarm Port
Major and minor alarm relays provide alarms for hardware errors. A dry-relay contact closure is
provided for the major and minor alarms. Refer to the Installation chapter, Connecting Terminals
section, of this manual for the pinout configuration for the alarm relays.
Relay controls are connected to the alarm relay port at the rear of the cabinet. The alarm relays are
located on the CPU board. Any hardware error closes the minor alarm relay. Any alarm call also
closes the major alarm relay. Refer to the Maintenance Commands chapter, Alarm Test section, in
this volume.
If power fails, both relays close the contacts. Both relays remain closed during power restoration
until the software boot process opens the relays. However, if there was an alarm condition before the
power failure or an alarm condition arises during the boot process, the relays remain closed until the
hardware errors are cleared.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2-2
Installation and Maintenance Volume
I/O Panel
Telco connectors with 50-pins, on the I/O panel, are used to connect cables from the various Octel
Overture 200/300 line interface cards (LIC), telemarketing cards (TLC), direct access cards (DAC),
and integration cards to the PBX.
RS-232C Connectors
RS-232 connectors are used for terminal communication. J2 is used for RS-232C integration.
Octel Overture 200 Cabinet
Each Octel Overture 200 cabinet is shipped fully assembled. The cabinet specifications are as
follows:
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
Clearances
Front:
Rear:
Side:
Top:
24.8 inches (63.0 cm)
13.0 inches (33.0 cm)
19.5 inches (49.5 cm)
100 pounds (45.4 kg) maximum
22 inches (56 cm)
6 inches (15 cm)
1 inch (2.5 cm)
1 inch (2.5 cm)
The Octel Overture 200 outer metal enclosure contains two shelves, with slots for various
configurations of disk drives and system cards. Figure 2-1 through Figure 2-4 show various views
and component locations for the Octel Overture 200 message server.
Shelf A
Shelf A contains 10 card slots, with slots A8–A10 reserved for the voice control unit (VCU) in slot
A8, the central processing unit (CPU) in slot A9, and the power supply unit (PSU) in slot A10. The
card slots in shelf A of the Octel Overture 200 cabinet could contain the following.
Slot Number(s)
Card Type/Other
A1–A6
LIC, TLC, DAC, or integration cards
A1–A7
Fax card
A5–A7
LAN card
A7
EntryWorks ACP card
A8
VCU
A9
CPU
A10
(PSU, which includes the floppy disk load device
The Octel Overture 200 can be configured with 4-port, 8-port, or 16-port line cards, in any
combination, to a maximum of 64 ports.
Refer to the Configuration volume, Slots Table chapter, for information about configuring the slots.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Hardware
2-3
Shelf B
Shelf B contains a slot for a Works for Serenade disk drive and three slots for system/voice disk
drives. The disk drive usage by slot number is as follows:
Slot Number
Type of Disk Drive Installed
B1
Works for Serenade disk drive
B2, B3
System/voice disk drives (data and voice storage)
B4
Voice disk drive
The system/voice and voice disk drives are loaded into the slots in the following order: B2, B3, B4.
A single-drive message server has a system/voice drive installed in slot B2; a two-drive message
server has system/voice drives installed in slots B2 and B3; a three-drive message server has
system/voice drives installed in slots B2 and B3 and a voice drive installed in slot B4.
Other Components
Two fans are located at the rear of the cabinet.
The washable air filter is located inside the front door of the cabinet. Air intake is from the front, and
air exhaust is from the rear of the cabinet.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2-4
Installation and Maintenance Volume
VCU Slot
CPU Slot
Front System
Terminal Port
Power Switch
Card Slots
A1 to A7
:
LIC, TLC, DAC, or
integration card
Power Supply
Unit
FAX card
System Fuse
LAN card
Reload Button
:
EntryWorks ACP
card
Floppy Diskette
Drive
Voice Disk
Drive
Works for
Serenade Disk
Drive
System/Voice
Disk Drives
Figure 2-1 Octel Overture 200 Cabinet Shelf Structure, From the Front
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Hardware
2-5
Front Door
VCU
(Slot A8)
Card Slot
Card Slot
System Terminal Port
(SP1 Connector)
CPU (Slot A9)
ON/OFF Switch
Power Supply/
Floppy Drive Unit
Reload Button
Fuse
Floppy Drive
Floppy Signal
Cable
Disk Drive
Assembly
Figure 2-2 Octel Overture 200 Cabinet, Inside Front View
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2-6
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Visual Mailbox
Connector (J4)
System
Terminal
Port (J1)
RSĆ232C
Connector
(J2)
Alarm Port (J3)
J1
J4
P7
Power Cord
P6
P5
J2
P4
J3
P3
P2
P1
I/O Panel
Figure 2-3 Octel Overture 200 Cabinet, Rear View
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Hardware
System
Terminal Port
2-7
Fan Power Harness
Connector
Motherboard
Power Cord
Receptacle
Figure 2-4 Octel Overture 200 Cabinet, Inside Rear View
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2-8
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Octel Overture 300 Cabinet
Each Octel Overture 300 message server is shipped fully assembled. The cabinet specifications are as
follows:
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
Clearances
Front:
Rear:
Side:
Top:
37.5 inches (95.3 cm)
17.5 inches (44.5 cm)
19.5 inches (49.5 cm)
220 pounds (100 kg) maximum
22 inches (55.9 cm)
6 inches (15.2 cm)
1 inch (2.5 cm)
none
The power line filter is located at the rear of the cabinet. The a.c. system power cord plugs into the
power line filter. The power line filter prevents electromagnetic interference (EMI), from entering
the primary power lines. Some chassis disassembly is required to replace the power line filter. The
voltage rating of the power line filter must agree with the input voltage rating of the power supply
unit (PSU).
In –48 Vdc message servers, the power cord is integral with the power line filter.
The outer metal enclosure contains three shelves, with slots for various configurations of disk drives
and system cards. Figure 2-5 through Figure 2-8 show various views and component locations for the
Octel Overture 300 message server.
Shelf A
Shelf A contains 15 card slots, with card slots A13–A15 reserved for the voice control unit (VCU) in
slot A13, the central processing unit (CPU) in slot A14, and the power supply unit (PSU) in slot A15.
The card slots in shelf A of the Octel Overture 300 cabinet could contain the following.
Slot Number(s)
Card Type/Other
A1–A11
LIC, TLC, DAC, or integration cards
A1–A12
Fax card
A10–A12
LAN card
A12
EntryWorks ACP card
VCU
A14
CPU
A15
PSU
Refer to the Configuration volume, Slots Table, for information about configuring the slots.
Shelves B and C
The slots in shelves B and C allow various configurations of Octel Overture 300 hard disk drives and
contain the message server’s load/backup device. The disk drive usage by slot number is as follows:
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Hardware
Slot Number
2-9
Type of Disk Drive Installed
Shelf B
B1
Reserved for future use
B2
Works for Serenade disk drive
B3–B4
B5
System/voice disk drives (data and voice storage)
Load/backup device
Shelf C
C1–C4
Voice disk drives (voice storage only)
The system/voice and voice disk drives are loaded into the slots in the following order: B3, B4, C1,
C2, C3, and C4. A single-drive message server has a system/voice drive installed in slot B3; a
two-drive message server has system/voice drives installed in slots B3 and B4; a three-drive message
server has system/voice drives installed in slots B3 and B4 and a voice drive installed in slot C1; and
so forth..
The Octel Overture 300 can be configured with 4-port, 8-port, or 16-port line cards, in any
combination of line cards, to a maximum of 128 ports. Refer to the General Description volume,
Product Description chapter, General Sizing Consideration and Capacity section, for additional
information.
Other Components
The washable air filter is inside the front door of the cabinet. The air intake is from the front, and air
exhaust is from the rear and top.
Octel Overture 300 Fan Tray
Four fans are located on a slide-out fan tray in the center of the cabinet, between shelves A and B.
The fan tray is a plug-in fan assembly used for system cooling. The fan assembly is accessible from
the front of the cabinet.
The four fans draw air through the front door air filter, and they exhaust from the top rear and top
sides of the cabinet. The fans use 12 volts and are powered from the +12 VM output of the PSU. The
fans are not sensitive to the input power to the cabinet.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2-10
Installation and Maintenance Volume
VCU Slot
CPU Slot
Front System
Terminal Port
Power Switch
Card Slots
A1 to A12
:
LIC, TLC, DAC,
or Integration
card
Power Supply
Unit
FAX card
Reload Button
LAN card
:
EntryWorks ACP,
System/Voice
Disk Drives
Fan Tray
Floppy Diskette
Drive
Works for
Serenade Disk
Drive
Four Voice
Disk Drives
Figure 2-5 Octel Overture 300 Cabinet Shelf Structure, From the Front
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Hardware
2-11
Front Door
VCU
(Slot A13)
System Terminal Port
(SP1 Connector)
Card Slot
Card Slot
CPU (Slot A14)
ON/OFF Switch
Power Supply Unit
Reload Button
Floppy Signal Cable
Fan Tray
Load/Backup Device
(Floppy Drive)
Hard Disk Drive
Assembly
Figure 2-6 Octel Overture 300 Cabinet, Inside Front View
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2-12
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Visual Mailbox
Connector (J6)
System Terminal Port
Rear Connection (J1)
Power
Receptacle
Alarm Port (J5)
J1
J6
P12
P11
P10 P9
P8
RSĆ232C
Connector
Port B (J2)
Reserved
RSĆ232C
Connectors
(J3 and J4)
P7
J3
P6 P5
J2
J4
P4
J5
P3
P2
P1
50Ćpin Telco
connectors
(25 pair) Amphenol
connectors
Power
Cord
Cable Tiedown
Points
Tapped Mounting
Holes for securing
Works for Serenade
Serial I/O panel and
DAC panel
Earth Ground
Connection Point
Figure 2-7 Octel Overture 300 Cabinet, Rear View
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Hardware
2-13
System Terminal
Port Cable
Main
Motherboard
(shelf A)
Main Power
Harness
Power Line
Filter
SCSI Bus
Jumper Cable
Main Disk Drive
Power Harness
Disk Drive
Motherboard
(shelf B)
Disk Drive
Motherboard
(shelf C)
Fan Tray
Power Harness
Figure 2-8 Octel Overture 300 Cabinet, Inside Rear View
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2-14
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Subsystem Configurations
The following tables list each subsystem name, abbreviation, part number, and a brief description.
Table 2-1 lists subsystems that are interchangeable between the Octel Overture 200 and the Octel
Overture 300 message server. Table 2-2 lists subsystems for the Octel Overture 200 message server
and Table 2-3 lists subsystems for the Octel Overture 300 message server. Following the last table
are more complete descriptions of the subsystems.
Table 2-1 Octel Overture 200/300 Subsystems
Subsystem Configurations
Part Number Description
STORAGE
500-MB Storage Drive
740-6632-002
Overture 200 – 37/46 hours*
Overture 300 – 31/46 hours*
1.0-GB Storage Drive
740-6631-002
Capacity on Demand (COD), 0 hour drives.
SCSI hard disk drives for storage of voice
messages, prompts, system configuration data,
and software.
Overture 200 – 87/96 hours*
Overture 300 – 81/96 hours*
2.0-GB Storage Drive
740-6633-002
Overture 200 – 176/185 hours*
Overture 300 – 170/185 hours*
* The capacity is for message server overhead
and one language (slots 1 and 2) and full
capacity (slots 3–6). Subtract 1.2 hours for each
additional language.
LINE INTERFACE CARDS (LIC)
United States, Canada,
Mexico
United Kingdom
France, Belgium
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
300-6002-001
4-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card (LIC4); 4 ports authorized.
300-6032-001
8-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card (LIC8); 8 ports authorized.
300-6054-001
16-port, loopstart telephone line interface card
(DLC16); 0 ports authorized.
300-6002-002
4-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card; 4 ports authorized.
300-6032-002
8-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card; 8 ports authorized.
300-6056-002
12-port, loopstart telephone line interface card
(ILC12); 0 ports authorized.
300-6054-002
16-port, telephone line interface card; 0 ports
authorized.
300-6044-001
4-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card; 4 ports authorized.
300-6054-017
16-port, loopstart telephone line interface card
(DLC16); 0 ports authorized.
PB60014–01
Hardware
2-15
Table 2-1 Octel Overture 200/300 Subsystems (continued)
Subsystem Configurations
Germany
300-6044-005
4-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card; 4 ports authorized.
300-6054-013
16-port, loopstart telephone line interface card
(DLC16); 0 ports authorized.
300-6002-009
4-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card; 4 ports authorized.
300-6032-009
8-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card; 8 ports authorized.
300-6054-009
16-port, loopstart telephone line interface card
(DLC16); 0 ports authorized.
300-6002-011
4-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card; 4 ports authorized.
300-6032-011
8-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card; 8 ports authorized.
300-6054-011
16-port, loopstart telephone line interface card
(DLC16); 0 ports authorized.
Direct Access Card (DAC)
300-6027-001
4-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card. This card allows direct
connection of incoming DID or outgoing PBX
trunks.
New Zealand, Australia
Direct Access Card
300-6027-011
4-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card. This card allows direct
connection of incoming DID or outgoing PBX
trunks.
Fax Application Processor
(Fax card)
300-6037-002
4-channel fax processor that supports
communication with CCITT Group 3 fax
machines and operates at transmission rates of
up to 9600 baud.
300-6037-003
8-channel fax processor that supports
communication with CCITT Group 3 fax
machines and operates at transmission rates of
up to 9600 baud.
LAN Card
300-6049-001
Used for Digital Networking, LAN Backup and
Restore, and Gateway Link. Interfaces with the
Octel Overture 200/300 by means of a 10BaseT
Ethernet interface.
Works for Serenade
ACP card
300-6019-002
Processor for Works for Serenade flow control
language. Includes host interface and ACP SCSI
disk drive control.
Netherlands
New Zealand, Australia
PB60014–01
Part Number Description
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2-16
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Table 2-1 Octel Overture 200/300 Subsystems (continued)
Subsystem Configurations
Part Number Description
Telemarketing Line Card
(TLC)
300-6032-003
8-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card. Octel Overture 200/300 allows
recording by the first port of a TLC only if the
TLC is in slot 1.
United Kingdom
Telemarketing Line Card
300-6032-004
8-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card. Octel Overture 200/300 allows
recording by the first port of a TLC only if the
TLC is in slot 1.
Netherlands Telemarketing
Line Card
300-6032-010
8-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card. Octel Overture 200/300 allows
recording by the first port of a TLC only if the
TLC is in slot 1.
New Zealand, Australia
Telemarketing Line Card
300-6032-012
8-port, two-wire, loopstart telephone line
interface card. Octel Overture 200/300 allows
recording by the first port of a TLC only if the
TLC is in slot 1.
AT&T Integration Card
(ATTIC)
300-6018-001
Digital interface card to the AT&T System 75,
System 85, and Definity PBXs. This connection
provides Adaptive Integration features.
ROLM Integration Card (RIC)
300-6025-001
Digital interface card to the ROLM 8000, 9000,
and 9751 PBXs. This connection provides
Adaptive Integration features.
Northern Telecom SL-1
Integration Card (SLIC)
300-6009-001
Digital interface card to the Northern Telecom
SL-1 and Meridian 1 PBXs. This connection
provides Adaptive Integration features.
Mitel Integration Card (MIC)
300-6020-001
Digital interface card to the Mitel SX-200
Digital, SX-100/SX-200 Analog, SX-2000, and
SG PBXs.
Serial Integration Card for the
Meridian (SIC8)
300-6040-001
Digital interface card to the Northern Telecom
Meridian 1 PBX. This connection provides
Adaptive Integration features.
APIC Integration Card for
AT&T Systems
300-6058-003
12-port interface card to the AT&T System 75,
System 85, and Definity PBX; 0 ports
authorized.
NPIC Integration Card for
Northern Telecom Systems
300-6058-004
16-port interface card to the Northern Telecom
Meridian 1 and Meridian SL-1 PBX; 0 ports
authorized.
Voice Control Unit (VCU)
300-6001-004
File system manager, SCSI bus control, and
voice bus control.
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
300-6039-003
Central control processor that runs call
processing software.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Hardware
2-17
Table 2-1 Octel Overture 200/300 Subsystems
Subsystem Configurations
Part Number Description
Works for Serenade Hard Disk
Drive
740-6248-001
SCSI hard disk drive for storage of Works for
Serenade programs and databases.
Works for Serenade Serial I/O
Cable
520-6007-001
Cable connecting the EntryWorks ACP board to
the Works for Serenade serial I/O panel.
Works for Serenade External
Modem
SA10194-03
Dedicated external modem for remote access to
the Works for Serenade subsystem.
Works for Serenade Modem
Cable
SA10187-01
Cable between the Works for Serenade modem
and the serial I/O panel.
Option Control Chip (OCC)
FK90087
Contains information about the software options
the Octel Overture 200/300 is equipped with.
Table 2-2 Octel Overture 200 Subsystems
Subsystem Configurations
Part Number Description
Motherboard (MB)
740-6503-001
Power Supply Units (PSU)
PB60014–01
90-132 VAC
740-6504-001
180-260 VAC
740-6505-001
42-60 VDC
740-6506-001
Backplane board for interconnecting system
modules and system power distribution.
Power conversion from system input power to
four regulated, d.c. voltages. The load/backup
device is part of the PSU.
Works for Serenade Serial I/O
Panel
740-6037-002
Rear-mount RS-232C connector panel.
DC Inlet Box
740-6537-002
Inlet box for d.c. powered systems.
Fan Panel Assembly
740-6502-002
System cooling fans.
Air Filter
840-6507-001
Washable air filter.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2-18
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Table 2-3 Octel Overture 300 Subsystems
Subsystem Configurations
Part Number Description
Load/Backup Device, Floppy
Disk Drive
740-6010-001
Motherboards (MB)
Shelf A
Shelf B
Shelf C
740-6003-001
300-6006-001
300-6005-001
Power Supply Unit (PSU)
90–132 Vac
740-6016-001
180–260 Vac
740-6017-001
42–60 Vdc
740-6027-001
Removable media drive for system configuration
backup, and software and prompt loading during
an upgrade.
Backplane boards for interconnecting system
modules and system power distribution.
Power conversion from system input power to
six regulated d.c. voltages.
Fan Tray Assembly
740-6002-001
System cooling fans.
Air Filter
840-6013-001
Washable air filter.
Works for Serenade Serial I/O
Panel
740-6043-002
Rear mount RS-232C connector panel.
DAC Power Supply Assembly
740-6050-001
Provides 48 Vdc to DAC I/O panel.
DAC I/O Panel
740-6051-002
Concentrates lines from up to four DAC boards
into connector.
Line Interface Cards
Line interface cards (LIC) provide a computer-controlled interface to the PBX extensions. The
different types of line cards used in the Octel Overture 200/300 configuration are as follows:
LIC4
LIC8
DLC16
ILC12
Each 4-, 8-, 12 or 16-port line card connects to PBX extensions through a 25-pair cable. The 4-port
and 8-port LICs are based on the original D.I.A.L. software technology. The DLC16 and ILC12 cards
are based on the digital signal processing (DSP) technology to interface with analog ports.
The LIC4, LIC8, and DLC16 are FCC part 68 registered. The LIC4, LIC8, DLC16, and ILC12 are
BABT-approved for use in the United Kingdom.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Hardware
2-19
Each LIC contains the necessary circuitry for ring detection, dial tone detection, and signal power
measurement, allowing automatic gain control from 0 dB to 24 dB of gain for recording messages.
The LIC contains a yellow LED for each port, which indicates port activity.
In the Octel Overture 200, line cards can occupy slots A1 through A6.
In the Octel Overture 300, line cards can occupy slots A1 through A11.
Telemarketing Line Card (TLC)
The telemarketing line card is an 8-port line card. It differs from the LIC, because only the first port
of the TLC located in slot A1 can be used for recording. The seven remaining ports of the TLC in
slot one are play-only ports. All other TLC ports in the message server are play-only ports. When
recording is attempted on other ports, the Octel Overture 200/300 prompts “Messages may not be
recorded at this time. No storage is available.”
The first TLC must be installed in slot A1. Standard line cards can be installed in slots beyond the
TLC cards. The TLC is FCC part 68 registered.
In the Octel Overture 200, the TLC can occupy slots A1 through A6.
In the Octel Overture 300, the TLC can occupy slots A1 through A11.
Direct Access Card (DAC)
The direct access card (DAC) is an optional, 4-port interface card. When used in place of the standard
LIC, the DAC allows the direct connection of incoming DID or outgoing PBX trunks. The DAC
requires an external –48-Vdc PSU and a rear-mounted DID I/O panel.
In the Octel Overture 200, the DAC can occupy slots A1 through A6.
In the Octel Overture 300, the DAC can occupy slots A1 through A11.
EntryWorks ACP Card
The EntryWorks ACP card is the application control processor for the Works for Serenade flow
control language. It includes the host interface and the ACP SCSI disk drive control.
In the Octel Overture 200, the EntryWorks ACP must occupy slot A7.
In the Octel Overture 300, the EntryWorks ACP must occupy slot A12.
EntryWorks also requires the following:
PB60014–01
EntryWorks disk drive
EntryWorks serial I/O panel and cable
EntryWorks external modem and cable
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2-20
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Fax Application Processor
The fax application processor is a fax card that transmits and receives fax messages for the Fax Mail
Plus feature. The fax processor contains one or two 4-channel fax daughter boards and supports up to
eight simultaneous fax transactions when both daughter boards are installed. It supports communication
with CCITT Group 3 fax machines. The fax channels operate at transmission rates up to 9600 baud.
In the Octel Overture 200, the fax card can occupy slots A1 through A7. The total number of fax
channels cannot exceed the number of voice ports.
In the Octel Overture 300, the fax card can occupy slots A1 through A12. The total number of fax
channels cannot exceed the number of voice ports.
LAN Card
The LAN card is required for both Remote and Domain Digital Networking, the LAN Backup and
Restore feature, and Gateway Link applications. The card interfaces with the Octel Overture 200/300
by means of a 10BaseT Ethernet interface.
In the Octel Overture 200, the LAN card can occupy slots A5 through A7.
In the Octel Overture 300, the LAN card can occupy slots A10 through A12.
Integration Cards
Integration cards are used with certain PBX integrations that utilize proprietary digital links. Four
types of integration cards are available:
AT&T (ATTIC), ROLM (RIC), Northern Telecom SL-1 (SLIC) integration card. Each
integration card is divided into two integration units; each integration unit supports two
integration links.
PIC integration cards with COD ports
MIC integration cards
SIC8 integration cards
In the Octel Overture 200, integration cards can occupy slots A1–A6.
In the Octel Overture 300, most integration cards can occupy slots A1–A11.
AT&T Integration Card (ATTIC)
The AT&T Integration Card (ATTIC) is used with AT&T System 75, System 85, and Definity
integrations. Refer to the Integration volume, AT&T System Adaptive Integration.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Hardware
2-21
ROLM Integration Card (RIC)
The ROLM Integration Card (RIC) is used with ROLM integrations. Refer to the Integration
volume, ROLM Adaptive Integration chapter.
Northern Telecom SL-1 Integration Card (SLIC)
The Northern Telecom SL-1 Integration Card (SLIC) is used with Northern Telecom SL-1 and
Meridian 1 integrations. Refer to the Integration volume, SL-1 Adaptive Integration chapter.
PIC Integration Card for AT&T (APIC)
The APIC Integration Card is used with AT&T System 75, System 85, and Definity PBX
integrations. With APIC, the integration and line card functionality are combined on each port. The
APIC card is a 12-port COD card. The ports can be purchased in increments. Refer to the Integration
volume, AT&T System Adaptive Integration With APIC chapter.
PIC Integration Card for Northern Telecom (NPIC)
The NPIC Integration Card is used with Northern Telecom Meridian 1 or Meridian SL–1 PBX
integrations. With NPIC, the integration and line card functionality are combined on each port. The
NPIC card is a 16-port COD card. The ports can be purchased in increments. Refer to the Integration
volume, Northern Telecom Adaptive Integration With NPIC chapter.
Mitel Integration Card (MIC)
The Mitel Integration Card (MIC) is used with Mitel SX-200 Digital, SX-100/SX-200 Analog and
SX-2000 S and SG integrations. Refer to the Integration volume, Mitel Adaptive Integration chapter.
Serial Integration Card for the Meridian 1 (SIC8)
The Serial Integration Card (SIC8) is used with Northern Telecom Meridian 1 PBX integrations.
Refer to the Integration volume, Meridian 1 Adaptive Integration chapter.
Voice Control Unit (VCU)
The Voice Control Unit (VCU) manages the system/voice and voice disk drives. The VCU is
responsible for manipulating and controlling all voice data files. It controls the loopstart line
interface cards and preprocesses events from the LICs before passing the events to the CPU.
On the Octel Overture 200, the VCU is located in slot A8 and manages the system/voice and voice
disk drives in slots B2, B3, and B4.
On the Octel Overture 300, the VCU is located in slot A14 and manages the system/voice and voice
disk drives in slots B3, B4, and C1–C4.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2-22
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
The central processing unit (CPU) is the master control unit for the Octel Overture 200/300. The
CPU controls the VCU and the optional integration cards. The CPU contains four serial I/O ports.
The first serial port is shared between the internal modem and the system terminal port, which is
accessed at the rear connector J1 or the front connector SP1. As a modem port, the first serial port
can be connected to any telephone port under system software control. The internal modem is a Bell
103A-compatible (300 baud)/Bell 212A and CCITT V.22-compatible (1200 baud)/CCITT V.22
bis-compatible (2400 baud) modem and RS-232C serial connection.
The second port can either communicate with the optional DID/E&M Trunk Interface via an
RS-232C cable or be used for RS-232C adaptive integration for message waiting and passing call
information from some PBXs. Refer to the Integration volume, Adaptive Integration chapter.
On the Octel Overture 200, the CPU is located in slot A9. The CPU provides relay closure contacts
for major and minor alarms on J3.
On the Octel Overture 300, the third and fourth ports, accessed through J3 and J4, are reserved for
future use. The CPU provides relay closure contacts for major and minor alarms on J5.
The CPU also contains the following:
On the Octel Overture 200, a floppy disk controller controls the floppy disk residing in the PSU.
On the Octel Overture 300, a floppy disk controller controls the floppy disk residing in slot B5.
The message-server time-of-day clock is backed up by battery. The battery can keep the clock
running for up to 1 week if the power fails.
The message-server TDM crosspoint switch controls the TDM bus.
An Analog-to-digital converter (A to D) monitors message-server voltages and temperature.
Power Supply Unit (PSU)
The power supply unit (PSU) is a plug-in unit with three nominal input voltages available for the PSU:
90–132 Vac (110 Vac nominal)
180–260 Vac (230 Vac nominal)
42–60 Vdc (–48 Vdc nominal)
A PSU with the correct input voltage must be used. Do not install or remove the PSU with the circuit
breaker in the ON position.
On the Octel Overture 200, the PSU is located in slot A10. The message server input voltage is
displayed near the power cord socket at the rear of the cabinet and on the PSU.
On the Octel Overture 300, the PSU is located in slot A15. The message server input voltage is
displayed on the power line filter at the rear of the cabinet.
For the Octel Overture 300, refer to the Installation chapter, Installation Requirements section, for
instructions to install an Octel Overture 300 powered by a –48-Vdc PSU. Refer to the Hardware
Replacement, Power Supply Unit section, in this manual for instructions about removing and
installing a PSU.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Hardware
2-23
The PSU provides regulated d.c. voltages. The voltages are shown in Table 2-4.
Table 2-4 Power Supply Unit d.c. Voltages
Name
Nominal d.c. Voltage
Function
+5 V
5 volts
Digital logic power
+5 VC
5 volts
Analog circuit power
+12 VM
12 volts
Fan and disk drive motor power
+12 VC
12 volts
Analog circuit power
ć12 VC
ć12 volts
Analog circuit power
ć5 VC
ć5 volts
Analog circuit power
The PSU provides the system power fail signal. This signal is activated if the message-server input
voltage drops out of operational range. The power fail signal interrupts the CPU as a warning of loss
of primary power, allowing controlled shutdown of the Octel Overture 200/300.
On the Octel Overture 200, the PSU provides a protective fuse for primary power production. This
fuse is opened when a primary overcurrent occurs. The PSU contains a spare fuse.
On the Octel Overture 200, the +5-volt PSU is sensed at the center of the motherboard. Each
regulated voltage of the PSU includes overvoltage and overcurrent protection. The PSU also includes
overtemperature protection.
On the Octel Overture 300, the PSU provides the message server reset signal. This signal is activated
at power up and resets all boards in the message server. The PSU provides a protective circuit breaker
for primary power. This circuit breaker also acts as the message server power switch. The circuit
breaker is tripped for primary overcurrent, power supply overtemperature, and secondary overvoltage.
On the Octel Overture 300, the +5-volt PSU is sensed at the center of the shelf A motherboard. The
+12-volt fan and drive motor power is sensed at the SCSI motherboard B and SCSI motherboard C.
Each regulated voltage of the PSU includes overvoltage and overcurrent. The PSU also includes
overtemperature protection. In the case of an overtemperature occurrence, the circuit breaker opens.
Motherboard
The Octel Overture 200 has one motherboard. The Octel Overture 300 has three motherboards, one
each for shelves A, B, and C.
Octel Overture 200/300 Motherboard
The motherboard is installed in the rear of the cabinet and distributes d.c. power to the cards, disks,
and fans.
The motherboard includes signal interconnections from slots A1 through A7 on shelf A to the rear
connectors P1 through P7, respectively. These connectors are used for external circuit connections to
cards installed in the respective slots. For example, a line card installed in slot A1 connects to
tip-and-ring circuits of a telephone network through rear connector P1.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2-24
Installation and Maintenance Volume
The motherboard includes signaling for two separate SCSI buses on shelf B: the system/voice SCSI
bus and the Works for Serenade SCSI bus. The system/voice SCSI bus interconnects slots B2 through
B4. The Works for Serenade SCSI bus connects to slot B1. The motherboard includes an ID signal
field for each slot. This ID field is used by the plug-in disk assemblies for SCSI bus ID selection.
The message server motherboard provides the reset signal. This signal is activated when the power is
turned on, which resets all boards in the message server.
Octel Overture 300 Motherboards
Shelf A Motherboard
The main motherboard is installed in shelf A and distributes d.c. power to shelf A cards.
The shelf A motherboard includes signal interconnections from slots A1 through A12 to connectors
P1 through P12, respectively. These connectors are used for external circuit connections to cards
installed in the respective slots. For example, a line card installed in slot A1 connects to tip-and-ring
circuits of a telephone network through connector P1.
Shelf B Motherboard
The shelf B motherboard includes signaling for two separate SCSI buses: the system/voice SCSI bus
and the Works for Serenade SCSI bus. The system/voice SCSI bus interconnects slots B3 through B5.
The Works for Serenade SCSI bus interconnects slots B1 and B2. This motherboard distributes
+5-volt and +12-volt power to slots B1 through B5. It includes an ID signal field for each slot. This
ID field is used by the plug-in disk assemblies for SCSI bus ID selection.
Slot B5 is used for the load/backup device and includes SCSI bus signal connections and power
connections. In the case of a floppy device installed in this slot, only power is provided from the
motherboard to the floppy device. The floppy device does not use the SCSI connection.
The shelf B motherboard provides a +12-volt power connection to the fan tray.
Shelf C Motherboard
The shelf C motherboard provides a system/voice SCSI bus connection, power distribution, and ID
signals to disk assemblies installed in slots C1 through C4.
Option Control Chip (OCC)
The Option Control Chip (OCC) is located on the motherboard, directly behind the PSU.
For the Octel Overture 300, the OCC is on the shelf A motherboard.
The OCC contains information about the message-server configuration, the number of voice and fax
mailboxes authorized, and the feature options the Octel Overture 200/300 is equipped with.
The OCC must always remain with the message server it was purchased for. If the motherboard must
be replaced, the OCC must be transferred from the old motherboard to the replacement motherboard.
Refer to the Hardware Replacement, Option Control Chip Replacement section, in this manual.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Hardware
2-25
Works for Serenade Hard Disk
The EntryWorks hard disk is a SCSI-technology hard disk. It is used to store EntryWorks programs
and databases.
In the Octel Overture 200, the EntryWorks hard disk occupies slot B1.
In the Octel Overture 300, the EntryWorks hard disk occupies slot B2.
Octel Overture 300 Load/Backup Device
The load/backup device is the floppy-disk drive, which permits online backup storage of critical
message server configuration information and software. It also offers a rapid and reliable means of
copying new software to the hard disk. The floppy-disk drive is also used to restore a message server
to normal operation when replacing the hard disk.
The floppy-disk drive is connected to the CPU by a cable to the front of the CPU.
Hard Disk Drives
Disk assemblies are plug-in, random access, read/write magnetic hard-disk assemblies, requiring no
adjustments or jumper configurations.
The Octel Overture 200/300 cabinet uses SCSI technology hard-disk drives that interface to a single
SCSI bus. This bus is controlled by the VCU. Disk drives are used for two functions:
System/Voice disks store the operating message server programs, voice prompts, configuration
information, and voice messages. A portion of a system/voice disk is reserved for system
software, configuration data, and prompts. The remainder of the drive is used for voice message
storage.
Voice storage disks store only voice messages.
Depending on capacity and redundancy requirements, each Octel Overture 200/300 contains one or
more hard-disk drives.
The Octel Overture 200 message servers can contain from one to three hard-disk drives in slots
B2, B3, and B4.
The Octel Overture 300 message servers can contain from one to six hard-disk drives in slots B3,
B4, C1, C2, C3, and C4.
The first disk drive is always a system/voice disk. If a second disk is installed, it is also a
system/voice disk. If additional disk drives are installed, they are voice disks only.
The maximum disk storage for an Octel Overture 200 message server is 540 hours of voice storage.
The maximum disk storage for an Octel Overture 300 message server is 1085 hours of voice storage.
Disk-storage space for recorded messages, names, greetings, redundancy and feature applications is
purchased in 5-hour increments. Storage hours are upgraded by Octel Customer Administration.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
2-26
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Disk Redundancy
Hot Standby redundancy of all system software, configuration data, and prompts is automatically
provided when a second system disk is installed. Hot Standby redundancy is not available when only
one system disk is installed.
Optional software enhancements offer redundancy for names, greetings, and messages for any
message server containing two or more disk drives. When Names and Greetings Redundancy and
Message Redundancy are installed, names, greetings, and messages are made redundant in the
following manner:
In message servers containing two disk drives, the redundancy is on the second drive.
In message servers containing more than two disk drives, the redundancy is on any drive, spread
out over all equipped drives.
Refer to the Feature Description volume, Hard Disk Redundancy chapter.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
3
PREPARING THE PHONE SYSTEM
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
How the Octel Overture 200/300 Works with the Phone System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Interfaced Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Integrated Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Answering Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Acting as a Message Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Using the DID/E&M Trunk Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Determining Necessary Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Changes to Central Office Trunking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Additional Trunking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Splitting Trunk Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
DID Trunks: Using the DID/E&M Trunk Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Ordering PE Trunking Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Phone System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Port Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Called Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Trunk Redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Trunk Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Ordering Phone System Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Implementing the Octel Overture 200/300 on PBXs without DIL Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Upgrade the PBX to a Feature Package Offering the DIL Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Use DID Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Place the Console in Night Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Arrange for Trunks to Call Divert to the Octel Overture 200/300 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Figures
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
Octel Overture 200/300 Connection to Phone System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
All Incoming Lines Directed to the Octel Overture 200/300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Incoming Calls Split Between Console and the Octel Overture 200/300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Sample Agency Letter for PE Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Service Provider Letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Directing Incoming Calls to the Octel Overture 200/300 When the PBX Does Not Offer a DIL Feature . . 3-12
Table
3-1
PB60014–01
PBX Features to Direct Trunks to the Octel Overture 200/300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Preparing the Phone System
3.1
3-1
HOW THE OCTEL OVERTURE 200/300 WORKS WITH THE
PHONE SYSTEM
The Octel Overture200/300 message servers work with PBXs, Centrex, most hybrids, and some key
systems. The Octel Overture 200/300 is configured with its voice ports connected to the phone system as
a series of DTMF touchtone single line analog extensions (touchtone sets). In the PBX, these extensions
are programmed to receive an incoming call, to place outgoing calls (within the PBX for message waiting
and also outside the PBX for offsite paging and alarm calls), to place calls on hold, transfer calls, and
reconnect if the called party does not answer. This configuration is referred to as “behind the switch”
because the ports are on the extension side, not the trunk side, as illustrated in Figure 3-1.
PBX
Octel
Overture
200/300
Figure 3-1 Octel Overture 200/300 Connection to Phone System
For convenience, this manual uses the terms “phone system” and “PBX” to refer to any telephone system
that works with the Octel Overture 200/300.
This chapter discusses Octel Overture 200/300 connection to the phone system, the changes required, and
how to order them. It assumes familiarity with some PBX concepts.
Changes need to be made to the phone system for Octel Overture 200/300 message servers. Some are
changes to the PBX; others are done in the Public Exchange (PE). This may require lead time. Work with
the client to determine who will make the changes and how long they will take. Prepare a schedule so
that everyone knows who is doing what and the date each item is required.
Interfaced Installations
Each Octel Overture 200/300 port is connected to a touchtone single-line, touchtone PBX extension. A
25-pair cable connects the Octel Overture 200/300 line card to the PBX extension. A PBX extension
connected to a Octel Overture 200/300 port is referred to as a port extension.
In order for the Octel Overture 200/300 to extend calls correctly, each port extension must be configured
in the PBX to receive calls, place them on hold, initiate, transfer, and reconnect calls.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
3-2
Installation and Maintenance Volume
An Octel Overture 200/300 port is in use during the entire time it takes to answer a call, dial the
extension the caller entered, and connect the caller to the requested extension. The port is then free to
handle another call. When the called extension is busy or does not answer, the Octel Overture 200/300
port remains occupied while calling another extension or taking a message. An Octel Overture 200/300
port is in use when employees are listening to or sending messages.
Port extensions answering with the same company greeting and answering mode are placed in a hunting
arrangement within the PBX. The hunt group may be circular or linear (terminal) according to the
requirements of each particular PBX. This assures that callers are answered by the first available port.
The mode (AX, CX, or MX) of the port determines how calls are answered by the Octel Overture
200/300. Refer to the Configuration volume, Slots Table chapter.
Integrated Installations
Different methods are used to integrate a telephone system with the Octel Overture 200/300. In some
cases, a combination of these methods may be used for full integration.
Integration is the ability of the telephone system to provide the Octel Overture 200/300 with information
that identifies the extension number a call was intended for and, in some cases, the extension number
from where the call originated.
In-band Integration
In-band integration is the ability of a telephone system to send DTMF tones that identify the extension
number for a forwarded call to the port extension answering the call. In-band signalling may include the
condition (busy, ring-no-answer, or direct) for the call. In certain installations, DTMF tones may be used
to turn ON or OFF message waiting indicators to indicate when a mailbox has new messages.
RS-232C Integrations
RS-232C integrations include the Bell Operating Company’s (BOC) Simplified Message Desk Interface
(SMDI) and those that are similar to it. The SMDI or RS-232C interface provides the directory number,
or PBX extension number of the called extension from which an incoming call was forwarded, to the
message desk. If the call originated in the same PE or PBX, the directory number or extension number is
sent to the message desk.
The condition or reason the call was forwarded to the message desk, as well as the port or member of the
hunt group the call is being sent to, is included in the call record. Message waiting indication may be
turned ON or OFF over RS-232C connections for most installations.
Octel Overture 200/300 Proprietary Card Integrations
Octel has developed proprietary line cards that function similarly to digital display telephones for several
different PBXs. The Octel Overture 200/300 reads the proprietary line cards to determine the extension
and the condition for the call, and then answers the call with the appropriate greeting or response.
Once the extension and condition for the forwarded call is known, an analog port answers the call and
provides all remaining messaging functions. The proprietary line cards are used to turn ON or OFF
message waiting indicators in most of the proprietary integrations.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Preparing the Phone System
3-3
Answering Incoming Calls
The Octel Overture 200/300 can answer all or a portion of a company’s incoming calls. Through the PBX
programming, trunks can be directed to the Octel Overture 200/300 hunt group instead of the operator
through a PBX feature. This feature, often called DIL (Direct In Lines), allows trunks to be directed to a
specific extension or hunt group instead of the console.
The PBX may be set up to direct all or only some incoming trunks to the Octel Overture 200/300. For
example, the main company number may be answered by the attendant, while a second trunk group, with
a different listed directory number, can be directed to the Octel Overture 200/300. Ports answering
incoming calls are configured in AX mode.
Figure 3-2 is a block diagram of the Octel Overture 200/300 connected to the phone system where all
incoming lines are directed to it. Arrows denote hunting.
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
PBX
ÎÎ
ÏÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏÏ
Octel
Overture
200/300
Figure 3-2 All Incoming Lines Directed to the Octel Overture 200/300
Figure 3-3 is a block diagram of the Octel Overture 200/300 connected to a phone system that has
incoming lines split between the console and the Octel Overture 200/300. Arrows denote hunting.
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
PBX
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Octel
Overture
200/300
Figure 3-3 Incoming Calls Split Between Console and the
Octel Overture 200/300
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
3-4
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Acting as a Message Center
The Octel Overture 200/300 can also be set up to answer forwarded calls and act as a message center. For
example, a company with a service providerCentrex service already has a means of getting calls directly
to an extension. When the extension is busy or does not answer, the extension can be forwarded to an
Octel Overture 200/300 hunt group to take a message. Ports receiving forwarded calls are configured in
CX mode. The Octel Overture 200/300 does not attempt to call the extension number entered by the
caller but immediately goes to that extension’s mailbox and offers to take a message.
The attendant may also extend callers to a port to allow them to leave a voice message. This port is
configured as MX mode. As with CX mode, it does not call the extension number entered but goes to that
extension’s mailbox and offers to take a message.
Using the DID/E&M Trunk Interface
DID and E&M trunks are wired through the DID/E&M Trunk Interface so that it can monitor the
progress of those calls. If appropriate, the interface diverts the call to the Octel Overture 200/300 for call
coverage. The DID/E&M Trunk Interface and the Octel Overture 200/300 communicate via an RS-232C
serial link. Ports receiving calls from the DID/E&M Trunk Interface can be in any mode. The Octel
Overture 200/300 handles the call based upon information sent by the DID/E&M Trunk Interface module.
Refer to the DID/E&M Trunk Interface Installation and Maintenance manual for more information about
how the DID/E&M Trunk Interface works.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Preparing the Phone System
3.2
3-5
DETERMINING NECESSARY CHANGES
Octel suggests that you perform a survey of the existing phone system during the initial phase of the
implementation process. From the descriptions of the application(s), decisions are made about how the
Octel Overture 200/300 should be used. Refer to the Product Description volume, Implementation
chapter, for a list of questions to ask during the survey.
Use the results of the survey and the type of application to determine the necessary changes. Schedule
and track these changes using the checklist found in the Installation chapter, Testing the Installation and
Telephone Changes section.
For convenience, Public Exchange (PE) trunk changes are separate from PBX changes. The following
sections discuss changes that may be required and guidelines for ordering the changes for both PE
trunking and the PBX.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
3-6
3.3
Installation and Maintenance Volume
CHANGES TO CENTRAL OFFICE TRUNKING
Public Exchange (PE) changes may be needed to
Add trunking capability.
Change the order of trunk hunting.
Create new trunk hunting groups.
Add, change, or delete 800 services.
Add, change, or delete DID or Centrex services.
Split the hunt group (directory listed number), allowing some trunks to be directed to the console and
some to Octel Overture 200/300.
Additional Trunking
The specific number of PBX lines and trunks depends on the number of ports and the desired trunking
arrangement.
Although the Octel Overture 200/300 port drops off after it transfers a call, the PE trunk is still occupied
during the entire call. When you decide how many trunks to direct to the Octel Overture 200/300,
remember each trunk is occupied from the time the call is placed until the caller hangs up. As a result,
the Octel Overture 200/300 can answer incoming calls from more trunks than it has ports.
Determine how many trunks to direct to the Octel Overture 200/300 by using PBX traffic data and the
traffic engineering tables. The tables are designed to help decide how to use the Octel Overture 200/300
most effectively for a given situation. After collecting the traffic data, it may be necessary to order
changes from the telephone company to add or alter the number of trunks.
Splitting Trunk Groups
If one two-way trunk group will be separated into two or more groups, the rotary hunting of the trunks
must be changed.
The Octel Overture 200/300 handles only incoming calls. If the trunks that the Octel Overture 200/300
answers are two-way trunks (also used for outgoing calls), make sure that sufficient trunks are available for
both incoming and outgoing calls. Additional trunks or changes to the type of trunks may be advisable. For
information on Direct Access Cards, refer to the Direct Access Card (DAC) Reference Manual.
DID Trunks: Using the DID/E&M Trunk Interface
The DID/E&M Trunk Interface monitors and intercepts DID/E&M calls. These trunks do not get
directed, via the DIL feature, to the Octel Overture 200/300 hunt group.
DID/E&M trunks using the DID/E&M Trunk Interface must be rewired to route through the DID/E&M
Trunk Interface module. Coordinate the installation with PE personnel to prevent the PE from busying out
the trunks. No changes are necessary to the DID trunk equipment or DID programming in the PBX. Refer
to the DID/E&M Trunk Interface Installation and Maintenance manual for more detailed information.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Preparing the Phone System
3-7
Ordering PE Trunking Changes
Contact the customer about making arrangements for changes in trunking. Typically, these changes
require significant lead time. The PE requires an agency letter from the customer authorizing you to act
on their behalf.
Figure 3-4 is a sample agency letter you may want to use.
DATE:
TO:
All concerned operating telephone companies and other
common carriers
ATTENTION: Supervisor
On this date we have entered into a contractual agreement with (the
Octel Overture 200/300 supplier) to be our communications
representative relating to all voice grade telecommunication needs. This
agreement is for an indefinite period.
(The Octel Overture 200/300 supplier) may order connection and
disconnection of telephone-company provided services and equipment.
We hereby acknowledge that (the Octel Overture 200/300 supplier)
may obligate us for installation and other charges that may appear on
our telephone bill.
This authorization does not preclude our ability to act on our own
behalf as necessary.
Please contact (contact name) of (the Octel Overture 200/300
supplier) at (address, phone number, and extension) if you have any
questions.
(Customer’s Name)
(TITLE)
(COMPANY)
Figure 3-4 Sample Agency Letter for PE Changes
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
3-8
3.4
Installation and Maintenance Volume
PHONE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Changes may be required to the following:
The Octel Overture 200/300 port extensions
Called extensions
Trunks
Redirection
Selection
Additional equipment may be required before these changes can be made. Most changes are to the PBX
database.
Port Extensions
Connect and configure the port extensions using the following steps:
1.
Designate one touchtone, single-line, touchtone extension for each Octel Overture 200/300 port.
Additional PBX line circuits may be required.
2.
Terminate each of these extensions to a 66M connector block, or equivalent. Clearly mark each
termination point with the extension number.
3.
Assign a PBX class of service to these extensions permitting them to
4.
Initiate calls
Receive (incoming) calls
Place calls on hold
Transfer calls
Forward calls
Remove any type of call waiting features from the Octel Overture 200/300 port extensions.
If configuring ports for outcalling to network locations for off-site message notification or for
off-site alarm calls, make sure the port extensions are not restricted from making calls to
these locations (e.g., toll restriction).
System speed dial commonly can override toll restriction. For security reasons, it may be
desirable to toll restrict the Octel Overture 200/300 ports to local calls and have the ports use
the PBX system speed dial for long distance outcalls.
5.
Set up a hunt group for each group of port extensions configured to answer in the same way
(company greeting, intercept position, mode). Where possible, make these circular hunt groups.
Octel Overture 200/300
In cases where the PBX queues calls to a busy hunt group and no overflow position can be
defined, you may want to set up a “terminal” hunt group with the attendant, if possible, or
other PBX intercept position as the last member of the hunt. When all the ports are busy, calls
hunt to this last member of the group for answer.
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Preparing the Phone System
6.
3-9
Record the pilot number for each hunt group. Depending on the PBX type, the pilot number may be
either
A phantom number with no actual extension appearance
The first extension of the hunt group
7.
Make the hunt group number easy to enter and easy to remember, since employees use this number
to access the Octel Overture 200/300. Some phone systems permit single-digit access to hunt groups.
For example, employees need only press to reach the Octel Overture 200/300.
8.
Determine how to set up a fail-safe answering position based upon features available for the PBX
type. This may be either programmed in the PBX as an overflow situation or by call forwarding the
hunt group pilot or member extensions. If none of these are permitted, refer to item 5 (above).
When the DID/E&M Trunk Interface sends calls to the Octel Overture 200/300 hunt group,
this group should not forward when busy. The DID/E&M Trunk Interface directs the calls to
the Octel Overture 200/300. If the DID/E&M Trunk Interface receives a busy signal from the
Octel Overture 200/300, it redirects the call to the extension configured as the attendant. If the
group should overflow for non-DID/E&M Trunk Interface calls, this may require two hunt
groups with the same members, one of which overflows and another that does not. (Setting up
two hunt groups with the same members is not possible on all PBXs.)
Called Extensions
Because the Octel Overture 200/300 provides call coverage for busy extensions, any type of call waiting*
feature provided by the PBX is not required. Remove this feature from the PBX configuration for
extensions called through the Octel Overture 200/300. PBX call waiting can mislead the second caller,
who hears that the extension doesn’t answer instead of hearing the true busy status.
Remove any system call forwarding for call coverage (to a message center, etc.).
Trunks
Possible changes to the PBX trunk programming include redirecting trunks to the Octel Overture 200/300
and assuring any trunking changes do not affect the selection of trunks for outgoing calls. No changes
need to be made to the DID trunking or programming in the PBX.
Trunk Redirection
Trunks are directed to the Octel Overture 200/300 via a PBX feature. Many PBX manufacturers call this
feature DIL, Direct In Lines, or DIT, Direct In Trunks. Table 3-1 lists several PBX manufacturers and the
name of that feature for their phone systems. If the phone system does not provide a DIL-type feature,
refer to the Implementing PBXs Without DIL Feature section in this chapter.
*
When a busy extension receives a second call, notification of the second call is given by a tone that indicates a call is waiting. The busy extension may
ignore the tone or place the first call on hold to answer the second. The notification tone is only heard by the called person and the caller hears ringing
instead of a busy tone.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
3-10
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Table 3-1 PBX Features to Direct Trunks to the Octel Overture 200/300
PBX Manufacturer and Model
Name of Feature
AT&T
All but Horizon and AT&T System 25
DDC (Direct Department Calling)
Horizon and AT&T System 25
DGC (Direct Group Calling)
ROLM
DEDICATED
FUJITSU/American Telecom Focus
QUASI-DID
NORTHERN TELECOM SL-1
AUTO-TERMINATE
If the phone system you are working with is not mentioned here, and you are trying to determine the
appropriate feature, first look for DIL, the most commonly used name.
If you can talk with someone familiar with the phone system, describe the feature (i.e., “ability to direct a
trunk or group of trunks to a specific extension or hunt group rather than being directed to an attendant
console for answer”). They should be able to supply the name of the feature for that phone system.
The DID/E&M Trunk Interface unit monitors and intercepts DID calls. Consequently, these trunks are
not directed by the DIL feature to the hunt group.
Trunk Selection
With some phone systems, incoming calls hunt from the beginning of a trunk group (trunk 1, trunk 2,...)
for an available trunk, while outgoing calls hunt in reverse order (trunk 10, trunk 9, ...). Others specify
the first and second preference trunk groups for both incoming and outgoing calls. If a large two way
trunk group is to be split, reexamine the PBX programming for outgoing trunk selection and determine
the trunk group to use for outgoing calls.
Ordering Phone System Changes
If your company is not the PBX provider, order changes from the PBX vendor on behalf of the customer.
Provide a Service Provider Letter (Figure 3-5) to the PBX vendor indicating the changes needed to the
PBX for the Octel Overture 200/300, and schedule the changes. If possible, try to use that PBX’s
terminology when requesting these changes. You may also want to provide them with information from
this chapter. Review the previous sections of this chapter for information to fill in the blanks. Read over
the letter and in particular, the footnotes. Depending upon the application, portions of the letter may need
to be expanded upon or deleted.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Preparing the Phone System
3-11
The vendor may require your Overture 200/300 registration
information:
FCC Registration
Ringer Equivalence
PBX Interface
Line card
The unit
UL Registration
0.7A
25-pair cable
meets FCC Part 68
meets FCC Part 15, Class A
UL1459
Dear (PBX-Vendor Name):
This letter confirms the service order and tentative installation of the Overture 200/300
for our mutual customer, (company name).
The following items are pertinent to this order:
1.
Or other location where the unit is
to be placed. Refer also to the environmental requirements in INSTALLATION, Installation Requirements
in this manual.
Extension changes. These changes need to be completed by (date). The
(manufacturere/model type switch) is to be configured as follows:
a. Terminate (number) single-line extension on (number) in the telephone
equipment room. Be sure the customer has enough spare ports on extension
card(s) to support these. Please label these jacks with the assigned
extension numbers.
b. The single-line extensions are to have the following class of service
features:
If more than one hunt group is required, specify the number of extentions for each hunt group.
For example:
hunt group #1 = 6 extensions
hunt group #2 = 2 extensions.
This information may not be available for all PBXs. If you want this
call forwarding, however, be sure to
include the number if it’s available.
Hunt group #2
Trunks:
555-3700
555-3701
555-3702
555-3703
1-800-337-1100
1-800-337-1101
Extensions must be able to initiate, receive, transfer,
and forward calls.
No call waiting feautres associated with any
extensions.
No toll restrictions on (all/specified) extensions.
c. The single-line extensions should be placed in a circular hunt group. Please
make the pilot number easy to enter and remember.
d. In the event all members of the hunt group are busy, subsequent calls
should be forwarded to (PBX console attendant/defined extension).
Define the last hunt number as an overflow extension.
1. Trunk redirection. The following (or attached) list of
trunks needs to be directed via the (name of DIL feature)
of the (manufacturer name) PBX to the hunt group pilot
number.
Where multiple trunk groups exist,
specify the trunks for each hunt
group:
For example:
Hunt group #1
Cut-over of these trunks to the Overture 200/300 is scheduled to begin (time am/pm) on
(date). Any programming of the (name of the DIL feautre) must be ready by then.
Thank you for your cooperation. If you have any questions, please feel free to call me
Tailor this section to the customer’s
at (phone number and extension).
needs. If trunk cut-over is stagSincerely,
gered, include schedule in this letter. If a PBX rtepresentative needs
to be on-site for this cut-over, arrange a mutually convenient time
with the PBX vendor.
(NAME)
(TITLE)
Figure 3-5 Service Provider Letter
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
3-12
3.5
Installation and Maintenance Volume
IMPLEMENTING THE OCTEL OVERTURE 200/300 ON PBXS
WITHOUT DIL FEATURE
You may encounter a PBX with an older feature package that does not provide the DIL feature. The
PBXs most frequently encountered without DIL are AT&T Dimension PBXs with Feature Packages (FP)
2, 3, 4, 5, and 7.
This feature on the Dimension is called DDC for Direct Department Calling. It is only available in
FP 8, 10, 12, and 15.
If the customer’s Dimension does not have FP8 or later or it is a phone system that does not have a DIL
feature, there are several alternatives for directing trunks to the Octel Overture 200/300 ports for answer:
Upgrade the PBX to a feature package offering the DIL feature
Use DID numbers
Place the console in night mode
Use call diverters to switch calls to the Octel Overture 200/300 ports
Not all these alternatives may be feasible for a given situation. The following discusses each in detail.
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÇÇÇ ÏÏ
ÇÇÇ ÏÏ
ÇÇÇ
Main #
PBX
XXXĆXXXX
DID
Trunks
Octel
Overture
200/300
ĆXXXX
PBX
Octel
Overture
200/300
DID
Alternative 1 — DID
For each incoming trunk
to be answered by the
Octel Overture 200/300.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Alternative 2 — Night Mode
Call Diverter Ċ Programmed to call
the Octel Overture 200/300 hunt group.
PBX
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Octel
Overture
200/300
Alternative 3 — Call Diverter
Figure 3-6 Directing Incoming Calls to the Octel Overture 200/300
When the PBX Does Not Offer a DIL Feature
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Preparing the Phone System
3-13
Upgrade the PBX to a Feature Package Offering the DIL Feature
Depending on the customer’s current version, this may not be economically feasible. This is the most
straightforward solution, but possibly not the most practical.
Use DID Numbers
Some customers may already have a block of DID numbers but do not wish to pay for DID numbers and
trunks for all employees. Callers may be given a number that is a DID extension answered by the Octel
Overture 200/300. This is especially suitable where a second number (not the main company number) is
to be established for company employees, friends, family, and frequent callers to call to reach extensions
or receive information. Refer to Figure 3-6.
Again, in this way the Octel Overture 200/300 can answer a DID number. However, 800 service or main
company numbers cannot be answered this way. Due to the cost of installing DID, this may only be
attractive to companies that already have DID.
Place the Console in Night Mode
If the PBX does not have the DIL feature, placing the console in night mode usually may be used to
direct all incoming trunks to a certain extension (such as the Octel Overture 200/300 hunt group). Refer
to Figure 3-6. However, once the console has been placed in night mode, it may not be used. Callers
requiring assistance (through the Octel Overture 200/300) to a multibutton key set for answering. This
solution is most practical for
Smaller companies having a single console and willing to direct all trunks to the Octel Overture
200/300.
Companies using only Octel Overture 200/300 to answer after hours and on weekends.
Since the console cannot be used, callers who are toll restricted cannot get an outside line from the
operator.
Arrange for Trunks to Call Divert to the Octel Overture 200/300 Ports
When only some trunks are to be answered by the Octel Overture 200/300 (ruling out console Night
Mode), these trunks can be removed from the PBX and terminated on call diverters that are connected to
PBX extensions. Refer to Figure 3-6. These call diverters are programmed to call the Octel Overture
200/300 hunt group. The call diverter answers the trunk and calls (through the PBX) the hunt group
number. The appropriate number of ports, as well as one additional extension per trunk to be diverted to
the Octel Overture 200/300, are required.
The call diverter that operates satisfactorily in this situation is the BUSCOM 2008-RD manufactured by
MetroTel. Because this diverter ordinarily allows remote turn-off by pressing a key, it requires a
modification.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4
INSTALLATION
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
PB60014–01
Receiving the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Inspecting for Shipping Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Unpacking the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Reshipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Moving the Equipment On-Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Site Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Isolation Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Uninterruptible Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Installing the Octel Overture 200/300 With –48-Vdc Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Cabinet Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Distributor-Supplied Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
PBX Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Terminal Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Terminal/Teleprinter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Compatible Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Cable Connections Between the RS-232C Terminal and the Octel Overture 200/300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Connections Between an External Modem and the Octel Overture 200/300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Connecting to the Internal Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Pin Assignments for Message Server Cards and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Four-Port Line-Interface Card, ROLM Integration Card, and Mitel Integration Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Eight-Port Line-Interface Card and Telemarketing Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
16-Port Line-Interface Card (DLC16) and the PBX Integration Cards for
Northern Telecom (NPIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
12-Port International Line-Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
DTIC Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Northern Telecom SL-1 Integration Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
AT&T Integration Card (ATTIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Serial Integration Card for the Meridian 1 (SIC8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
APIC Integration Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
SIC8 I/O Panel Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Direct-Access Card (DAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Direct-Access Card I/O Panel DP EXT Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Direct-Access Card I/O Panel Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
External Alarm Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Communicating with the Message server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Local Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Automatic Terminal Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4
INSTALLATION
(continued)
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
Octel Overture 200/300 Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Powering Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring d.c. Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Up the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack Mount Installation, Octel Overture 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using INSTALL — Entering the Configuration Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Phone System to the Octel Overture 200/300
..................................
Connection Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octel Overture 200/300 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing the Installation and Telephone Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-37
4-37
4-37
4-38
4-38
4-40
4-41
4-41
4-42
4-44
4-44
4-44
4-45
4-45
4-45
4-46
4-47
4-50
4-58
PB60014–01
4
INSTALLATION
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
Octel Overture 200 Floor Plan for Installation in the US, Canada and Mexico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Octel Overture 300 Floor Plan for Installation for the US, Canada, and Mexico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Octel Overture 200 Direct-Connect Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Octel Overture 300 Direct-Connect Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Diagram of the Field Wiring for –48-Vdc Powered Octel Overture 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
First and Second RS-232C Serial-Port Cable Pinouts for Connection to Terminal Equipment (DTE) . . . . 4-17
Octel Overture 200/300 to External Modem Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
50-Pin Male Telco Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Octel Overture 200/300 Cabinet Installed in 19-Inch Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Typical Octel Overture 200/300 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Connector Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Example of Server-to-Block Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
PB60014–01
Input Circuit Current at Nominal Operating Line Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Input Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Equipment Provided by Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
DCE Pinouts for Cable Connections Between the RS-232C Terminal and the Octel Overture 200/300 . 4-17
Pinouts for External Modem Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Power Supply Output Rating and Acceptable Operating Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
66M4-4W Connector Block Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Installation
4.1
4-1
RECEIVING THE EQUIPMENT
The following paragraphs provide procedures for unpacking, inspecting, inventorying, and reshipping the
Octel Overture200/300.
The server is shipped in the customer-ordered configuration. All PCAs, power supplies, and disk drives
are installed in the cabinet. Depending on the options ordered with the server (such as Works for
Serenade or DAC), some additional assembly of the server might be required. Refer to specific sections
in this chapter about any options for assembly instructions. Each server is shipped on a pallet, protected
by foam inserts, and covered by a cardboard box.
Weights at maximum configurations are as follows:
120 pounds (54 kg) for the Octel Overture 200
200 pounds (90 kg) for the Octel Overture 300
Inspecting for Shipping Damage
Before accepting delivery of an Octel Overture 200/300 from the carrier, inspect the tilt-watch indicators,
located on the left front center and the right side center of the carton. Also inspect the cardboard carton.
If the tilt-watch is tripped or the carton has external damage, notify the carrier immediately, and submit a
damage report to the carrier and to Octel Communications. In the event of equipment damage, negotiate
claims directly with the carrier.
Unpacking the Cabinet
Do not take the server off the shipping pallet unless the unpacking is being done at the installation site.
Caution!
PB60014–01
Make sure that you have at least two people to
remove the server from the pallet. Because of the
weight of the server, it could be damaged or a person
could be injured.
1.
Remove the plastic clips securing the cardboard carton to the shipping pallet. Squeeze the center of
the clip, lift it, and pull it away from the carton.
2.
Remove the cardboard carton by lifting it straight up.
3.
Remove the foam insert from the top of the server.
4.
Remove the bag from the top of the server. The bag contains the front-door key, power cord, and
message-server documents.
5.
Inspect the server visually for physical damage.
6.
Use a 7/16 inch wrench to remove the four brackets that secure the server to the pallet. The brackets
are located at the base of the server.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-2
Installation and Maintenance Volume
7.
Unlock and open the front door. It is recommended that the front door be removed before moving the
cabinet from the pallet.
8.
Lift the cabinet straight up, until the stabilizer legs have cleared the server. Lift the server off the
pallet toward the pallet opening at the front of the server.
9.
Place the server in its permanent location.
10. Replace the front door.
11. When the Octel Overture 200/300 is installed, adjust the levelers until the top of the server is level and
does not wobble. No special tools are required to adjust the leveling, although a bubble level is
recommended for this purpose.
12. Collect and save all packing material, cartons, foam inserts, shipping pallet, etc., as they can be reused
to ship the server back to Octel if any shipping damage was incurred.
Reshipping
If the Octel Overture 200/300 is to be reshipped from your location, use the original shipping carton, and
perform the following:
1.
Verify that all server assemblies are secure.
a.
All boards must be seated and secured with locking ejectors.
b.
All captive fasteners on the disk drive, power supply, and fan assemblies must be secured to the
cabinet with a flat-blade screwdriver.
2.
Remove cabinet front door by opening the door and pulling it straight up, until it is free of the two
hinges.
3.
Remove the front pallet section and place the server on the shipping pallet. This must be performed
by two people.
4.
Replace and lock the front door.
5.
Resecure the front pallet section against the front door, using two pallet bolts.
6.
Replace the plastic bag over the cabinet.
7.
Secure the cabinet to the pallet using new tie straps.
8.
Replace the door key and power supply cord in the documentation bag and tape the bag to the top of
the cabinet.
9.
Replace the foam insert, then the cardboard container.
10. Tape the top of the cardboard carton closed and secure it to the pallet with new strapping material.
Do not transport the Octel Overture 200/300 message
server unless it is secured on the shipping pallet in
the vertical, upright position.
Caution!
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4-3
Moving the Equipment On-Site
Before moving the server, verify the status of the new site:
Is the input power ready?
Is it the same as the input power required for the Octel Overture 200/300?
Is the installation location ready?
Are the telephone extensions ready to be hooked up?
Move the Octel Overture 200/300 server in the vertical, upright position on the shipping pallet. Be
careful and always remember that the Octel Overture 200/300 is delicate electronic equipment.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-4
4.2
Installation and Maintenance Volume
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Installing the Octel Overture 200/300 involves the following:
Connecting PBX extensions to Octel Overture 200/300 ports
Connecting power to the cabinet
Installing the configuration database
Updating the database for both the Octel Overture 200/300 and the PBX
Dedicating trunks in the PBX to the Octel Overture 200/300 hunt or distribution group
Testing
Installation personnel should be familiar with the data format and change procedures of the PBX. For
further explanation, refer to the Preparing the Phone System chapter in this volume.
Site Requirements
Install the Octel Overture 200/300 in a dust-free location. Keep the Octel Overture 200/300 separate from
other equipment that might produce heat, generate strong magnetic fields, or produce vibration.
If space and environment permit, install the Octel Overture 200/300 in the telephone equipment room.
Place the cabinet to permit front access and ventilation on all sides. The air filter cleaning and
replacement schedule depends on the local environment.
Figure 4-1 is a floor plan for installing the Octel Overture 200 in the United States, Canada, and Mexico.
Figure 4-2 is a floor plan for installing the Octel Overture 300 in the United States, Canada, and Mexico.
Power Requirements
The Octel Overture 200/300 should receive power from a dedicated, separate circuit. If this is not
possible, make sure that the circuit is free of large motorized equipment, such as copy machines.
The power circuit must be compatible with the input voltage and frequency rating of the Octel Overture
200/300. The power circuit must have adequate current rating and be protected by a circuit breaker.
Check the voltage rating marked on the power-line filter where the power cord connects to the Octel
Overture 200/300. The voltage rating indicates the input current rating for the Octel Overture 200/300.
Table 4-1 indicates the input circuit current that is to be supplied by a dedicated branch circuit.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4-5
Table 4-1 Input Circuit Current at Nominal Operating Line Voltage
Rated Input Current
Octel Overture
Octel Overture
200
300
p Voltage
g
Input
R
Range
Frequency
q
y
R
Range
120 Vac
50–60 Hz
6A
10 A
240 Vac
50–60 Hz
3A
6A
–48 Vdc
dc
10 A
15 A
In the United States, the 120-Vac wall sockets are rated at 10 amperes and use a NEMA 5–15P plug rated
for 15 amperes. Octel recommends the use of a standard a.c. branch circuit rated at 15 amperes to comply
with the normal United States wiring practices.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-6
- Equipment room
- Office environment
- 1706 BTU/hr
" "
# " %
# " %!
"%$
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Figure 4-1 Octel Overture 200 Floor Plan for Installation in the US, Canada and Mexico
Octel Overture 200/300
- Rear access for system cabling
- Front access for service of field
- Side access not required
Octel Overture 200/300
- Equipment room
- Office environment
- 3412 BTU/hr
#( &#( $#!
$)#(&+%
$)#(&+'%
&"# #(!+* &
Installation
4-7
Serenade 3.0
Figure 4-2 Octel Overture 300 Floor Plan for Installation for the US, Canada, and Mexico
PB60014–01
- Rear access for system cabling
- Front access for service of field
- Side access not required
4-8
Installation and Maintenance Volume
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR A.C. POWERED SYSTEMS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
To conform to the safety agency grounding requirements, use the power cord provided. This
power cord complies with the following UL requirement:
“An equipment grounding conductor that is not smaller in size than the ungrounded
branch-circuit supply conductors, is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product
or system. Bare, covered or insulated grounding conductors are acceptable. Individually covered
or insulated equipment grounding conductors shall have a continuous outer finish that is either
green, or green with one or more yellow stripes. The equipment grounding conductor is to be
connected to ground at the service equipment.”
Verify that the wall power outlet conforms to the following UL requirement:
“The attachment-plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system are all to be of a
grounding type, and the equipment grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be
connected to earth ground at the service equipment.”
Refer to Table 4-1 for the input-circuit current capacity that is to be supplied for a dedicated circuit.
Use the following guidelines for calculating the input power requirements of an Octel Overture 200/300.
If the Octel Overture 200/300 is powered by an a.c. uninterruptible power supply (UPS) or a –48 Vdc
source, the input power requirement should be calculated to ensure that the correct-capacity power source
is chosen. The power requirements depend on the message server’s configuration, because a fully
populated cabinet requires more power than a minimally configured cabinet. The size of the a.c. UPS or
d.c. source must be chosen to match the maximum size configuration expected for each installation.
1.
Calculate the exact message-server configuration, including all known growth plans.
2.
Determine the total power consumption (in watts) of the configuration, using the values in Table 4-2.
3.
If the message server is to be powered by an a.c. UPS, multiply the total power consumption figure
by 1.5 to determine its volt-ampere requirements.
4.
The total power consumption and volt-ampere requirements should be rounded up to the next
multiple of 50, before being used to choose an a.c. UPS or –48 Vdc source.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4-9
Table 4-2 Input Power Requirements
Component
Power Consumption (watts)
Octel Overture 200
Octel Overture 300
Base cabinet
125
150
4-port line card
10
10
8-port line card
15
15
16-port line card
15
15
Fax Application Processor
30
30
LAN card
20
20
Voice/system disk drive
25
25
Works for Serenadet disk
20
20
EntryWorks ACP card
20
20
.
The base cabinet includes VCU, CPU, floppy-disk drive, fans, and PSU. All voice/system disk
drives require the same amount of power, regardless of their storage capacity.
The following example for an Octel Overture 300 message server shows the calculation of the input
power requirements for an 8-port message server, equipped with two 4-port line cards, one integration
card, and two voice/system disk drives:
Base cabinet
Two 4-port line cards
One integration card
Two voice/system disk drives
Total input power
Total volt-ampere rating (1.5 x 230)
150
20
10
50
W
W
W
W
230 W
345 VA
Round the total-input power value and the total volt-ampere rating up to the next multiple of 50,
producing the values to be used to select a suitable power source:
Total continuous input power requirement is 250 watts and 350 VA
Isolation Transformer
For installation sites that could experience power-line transients from lightning or power switching, the
use of an isolation transformer is recommended. A dedicated isolation transformer must be rated at the
following:
-
750 VA or greater is required for the Octel Overture 200.
-
1 kVA or greater is required for the Octel Overture 300.
Contact Octel for isolation transformers that have been tested and qualified for use with Octel Overture
200/300.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-10
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Uninterruptible Power Supply
If an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is used, depending on the configuration of the Octel Overture
200/300, a UPS must be rated up to the following:
750 VA is required for the Octel Overture 200.
1 kW (1400 VA) is required for the Octel Overture 300.
Contact Octel for a UPS that has been tested and qualified for use with the Octel Overture 200/300.
Installing the Octel Overture 200/300 With –48-Vdc Power Supply
Unit
The –48-Vdc powered server does not include a power cord. A terminal block is provided on the back of
the cabinet for field wiring to the d.c. power source. The installation must be performed as described
below, to comply with National Electrical Code (NEC) and UL regulations. In addition, use only those
materials mentioned, because they must also be controlled. Field-wiring material is not included with the
server, but it can be obtained from a local hardware store or qualified electrician.
List of Materials
The following materials are required for the installation:
1/2-inch diameter conduit.
UL-approved, insulated, stranded wire to run through the conduit. Three separate wires must be
connected; therefore, use three different wire colors. The grounding conductor insulation should be
green and yellow.
The wire size for the Octel Overture 200 must be 12-gauge (3 mm2).
The wire size for the Octel Overture 300 must be 10-gauge (5 mm2).
The d.c. version of the Octel Overture 200/300 must be field-wired and connected to
a branch circuit equipped with a branch-circuit overcurrent-protection device, set at
the following:
20 A maximum, 60 Vdc for the Octel Overture 200.
25 A maximum, 60 Vdc for the Octel Overture 300.
The conduit and the UL-approved, insulated stranded wire can be obtained preassembled.
Six forked, crimp-on terminals with upturned ends for the wire size and a #10 screw.
Conduit strain relief to fit a 1.10-inch-diameter hole in the sheet metal.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4-11
Installation Procedure
Perform the following steps to install the message server with a –48-Vdc power supply:
PB60014–01
1.
Place the Octel Overture 200/300 near the –48-Vdc power source.
2.
Turn OFF the power to the d.c. power-source outlet to which the Octel Overture 200/300 will be
connected.
3.
Open the front door of the cabinet and verify that the power switch on the Power Supply Unit is in
the OFF position.
4.
Remove the two screws attaching the cover to the d.c. filter assembly, as shown in Figure 4-3 (Octel
Overture 200) or Figure 4-4 (Octel Overture 300) and remove the cover.
5.
Connect the Octel Overture 200/300 to the power source as shown in Figure 4-3 or Figure 4-4 and
Figure 4-5. Connect the positive pole of the power source to the terminal-block position marked “+”
and the negative pole to the position marked “–”.
6.
Connect the earth-ground conductor from a suitable building ground to the ground stud next to the
terminal block on the cabinet (refer to Figure 4-3 or Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5).
7.
Secure the cover to the d.c. filter assembly with the two screws removed in step 4.
8.
Turn ON the power to the d.c. power-source outlet where the Octel Overture 200/300 has been
connected.
9.
Turn ON the power switch located on the power supply unit in the Octel Overture 200/300 cabinet, and
verify proper operation, as discussed in the Octel Overture 200/300 Testing section in this chapter.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-12
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Terminal Block
Negative Lead
Positive Lead
Cover Plate
Conduit Strain
Relief
12Ćinch Diameter
Conduit
Ground
Lead
DC Inlet Box
Figure 4-3 Octel Overture 200 Direct-Connect Installation
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
DC Filter Assembly
4-13
Terminal Block
Positive Lead
Negative Lead
Cover
Ground Lead
Conduit Strain Relief
1/2Ćinch Diameter Conduit
Figure 4-4 Octel Overture 300 Direct-Connect Installation
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-14
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Conduit With Three Wires
Terminal Block
+
DC
Power
Source –
–
+
Rear Panel
Earth Ground
Ground Stud
Figure 4-5 Diagram of the Field Wiring for –48-Vdc Powered
Octel Overture 200
Cabinet Requirements
When you install the Octel Overture 200/300, adjust the levelers until the top of the cabinet is level, and
the cabinet does not rock. A bubble level is recommended for this purpose. No special tools are required
to adjust the leveling feet.
Distributor-Supplied Equipment
Each Octel Overture 200/300 line card is connected to the PBX with a 25-pair cable. Supply one cable
for each line card. Make sure that the male/female connectors are long enough to reach between the Octel
Overture 200/300 and the PBX extension jack, without undue stretching or tension.
The Octel Overture 200/300 can be connected to punchdown blocks with a 25-pair cable and then be
jumpered to the PBX or Central Office lines. The Octel Overture 200/300 can also use 25-pair cable to
connect to a breakout adapter that provides standard modular connectors.
A terminal, used for software installation and update, must be available at the customer site. During
installation, use an RS-232C cable to connect the terminal to the Octel Overture 200/300. This terminal
can be connected to the SP1 connector located in the front of the cabinet or at J1 in the rear of the
cabinet. If the terminal is to be permanently installed with the message server, connect it to J1. If the
terminal is only used temporarily during installation and maintenance, connect it to SP1. A printer is
useful for making a hard copy of the software configuration.
Table 4-3 lists the equipment provided by the distributor. Refer to the Octel Overture 200/300 Testing
section in this chapter for additional equipment needed for testing.
Table 4-3 Equipment Provided by Distributor
Item
Quantity
ASCII terminal (CRT or printer)
1
RS-232C cable for terminal or printer
1
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4.3
4-15
PBX PREPARATION
Before continuing with the installation, ensure that the appropriate PBX changes have been made and
tested. Instructions for preparing the PBX for the installation of the Octel Overture 200/300 are provided
in the Preparing the Phone System chapter of this manual. Refer to that chapter for the following:
PB60014–01
Changing the PBX database
Setting up hunt groups
Directing trunks to the Octel Overture 200/300
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-16
4.4
Installation and Maintenance Volume
TERMINAL COMMUNICATIONS
The Octel Overture 200/300 is designed to work with any ASCII send/receive serial terminal/teleprinter
that meets RS-232C specifications.
Terminal/Teleprinter Installation
Octel recommends that the maximum distance between the terminal and the Octel Overture 200/300 is no
more than 50 feet, which is the length of a standard RS-232C cable.
The Octel Overture 200/300 uses even parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit, and XON/XOFF protocol.
Compatible Terminals
The following terminals can be connected to the Octel Overture 200/300:
TI Silent 700 or 703
Hazeltine Model 1410
Hewlett-Packard Models 2621A/P, 2631A
Lear Siegler Model ADM-3A
Wyse Model WY-50
TeleVideo Terminal Model 950
Panasonic KXD-11
Falco 5500e, 500e
Configuration Applications Terminal (CAT) (no procedures provided)
Connect the terminal/teleprinter to the system-terminal port. Two connections to the system-terminal port
allow for convenient access: the front connection (SP1) for temporary access and the rear connection (J1)
for permanent access. Octel recommends that the terminal/teleprinter have the capability to make a
hard-copy printout.
Cable Connections Between the RS-232C Terminal and the Octel
Overture 200/300
The system-terminal port (SP1 or J1) and Port B (J2) use standard 25-pin (DB25) RS-232C connectors
(female), with the DCE pinouts listed in Table 4-4. Figure 4-6 is a diagram of these pinouts. On the Octel
Overture 300, ports C and D (J3 and J4) are reserved for future use. They use the same pinouts as listed in
Table 4-4 and shown in Figure 4-6.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4-17
Table 4-4 DCE Pinouts for Cable Connections Between the RS-232C
Terminal and the Octel Overture 200/300
Pin
EIA/CKT
Signal Function
1
AA
Protective ground
2
BA
Transmit data (TX)
3
BB
Receive data (RX)
4
CA
Request to send (RTS)
5
CB
Clear to send (CTS)
7
AB
Signal ground
8
CF
Receive-line signal detector (DCD)
20
CD
Data terminal ready (DTR)
To Terminal (DTE)
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
Octel Overture
200/300 (DCE)
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
20
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
1 Protection Ground
2 TX
3 RX
4 RTS
5 CTS
7 Signal Ground
8 DCD
20 DTR
Figure 4-6 First and Second RS-232C Serial-Port Cable Pinouts
for Connection to Terminal Equipment (DTE)
For correct operation, DTR (pin 20) must be asserted TRUE by the terminal. RTS (pin 4) must be exerted
TRUE by the terminal when the terminal is able to accept data, or pin 4 must be left open.
If the terminal/teleprinter equipment has pins 1 and 7 connected together, intermittent problems with
the Octel Overture 200/300 might occur. Terminal/teleprinters requiring Data Set Ready (DSR) could
require that pins 6 and 8 be connected together, or pins 8 and 20 connected together at the terminal end of
the RS-232C cable. If you have a problem with or question about your terminal/teleprinter, call Octel
technical support.
Connections Between an External Modem and the Octel Overture
200/300
You can use an external modem if a dedicated modem connection is required or if a modem with a baud
rate different from the Octel Overture 200/300 internal modem is required. You can use a modem that
supports standard baud rates (300 to 9600 baud) connected to the system-terminal port. Table 4-5 lists the
pinouts for an external modem connection. Figure 4-7 is a diagram of external modem pinouts.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-18
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Table 4-5 Pinouts for External Modem Connections
Modem
Pin
Number
Octel Overture
200/300
Pin Number
2
3
Transmit data
Receive data
3
2
Receive data
Transmit data
5
4
CTS
RTS
4
5
RTS
CTS
7
7
Signal ground
Signal ground
8
20
DCD
DTR
20
8
DTR
DCD
Modem Signal
Name/Function
Octel Overture 200/300
Name/Function
RS-232C Male Connectors
To modem
(DCE)
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
To Octel Overture 200/300
(DCE)
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
Figure 4-7 Octel Overture 200/300 to External Modem Pinouts
The Octel Overture 200/300 requires pin 4 (RTS) to be TRUE or left open and pin 20, Data Terminal
Ready (DTR), to be TRUE. The modem must provide DCD (pin 8) and CTS (pin 5) at the modem
connector; that is, DTR (pin 20) and RTS (pin 4) at the Octel Overture 200/300 connector.
Other considerations are as follows:
The modem must drop DCD with the loss of carrier. If service is interrupted and the modem does not
drop DCD, subsequent callers can reestablish the connection without requiring a security code.
Auto-answer must be enabled to allow technical support personnel to connect to the modem without
on-site intervention.
Octel recommends forcing DTR high. This is required to maintain the connection with the message
server, if a restart or reload is required. If DTR is not forced high, the connection is lost when the
message server is restarted.
Cable the modem to either the front or rear system-terminal port. Test that the modem is correctly
configured. If you have a problem or question connecting your modem, call Octel technical support.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
Caution!
4-19
Incorrect connection of the external modem can
result in unauthorized access. Verify that the cabling
and modem are installed correctly, and that the
modem setup is tested. Refer to the Octel Overture
200/300 Support Note FI80048-01 for additional
information.
Once the modem connection is established, press until the password prompt appears, and follow
the procedures in the Communicating with the Message Server section of this chapter.
Connecting to the Internal Modem
The Octel Overture 200/300 has an internal 300/1200/2400-baud modem. The internal modem can be
connected either by entering when the Octel Overture 200/300 answers or through a
modem-access mailbox.
Connecting to the Internal Modem Using
Connect the message server to the internal modem, as follows:
1.
Call the Octel Overture 200/300.
2.
When the Octel Overture 200/300 answers, enter
3.
After you hear the high-pitched tone, enter the code to connect to the modem (ATD). The code can
vary, depending on the interface and modem manufacturer. If you do not hear a high-pitched tone,
repeat steps 1 and 2.
4.
Hang up the receiver if step 3 was successful.
.
The Octel Overture 200/300 automatically adjusts to the modem’s baud rate, which must be 300, 1200, or
2400 baud.
Modem-Access Mailboxes
To provide additional system security, access to the internal modem can be restricted to specific
modem-access mailboxes.
To create a modem-access mailbox, assign COS Attribute 118 — PROVIDE MODEM TONE WHEN
MAILBOX IS CALLED, and Attribute 3 — ASK FOR SECURITY CODE BEFORE CALLING
EXTENSION, to the mailbox COS. The mailbox should have a security code assigned before attribute 3
is added.
To use to block access to a modem, set System Parameter 223 — DISABLE ###5 ACCESS
TO THE MODEM, to YES.
After the modem-access mailbox is created, perform the following steps to connect to the internal modem
through the modem-access mailbox:
PB60014–01
1.
Call the Octel Overture 200/300.
2.
When the company greeting plays, enter the mailbox number of the modem-access mailbox.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-20
Installation and Maintenance Volume
3.
If attribute 3 is assigned to the mailbox COS, enter the security code.
4.
After the high-pitched tone, enter the code to connect to the modem (ATD). The code can vary,
depending on the interface and modem manufacturer. If you do not hear a high-pitched tone, repeat
steps 1 through 3.
5.
Hang up the receiver if step 4 was successful.
The Octel Overture 200/300 automatically adjusts to the modem’s baud rate, which must be 300, 1200, or
2400 baud.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4.5
4-21
PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR MESSAGE SERVER CARDS AND
PORTS
Connectors P1 through P12 use a 50-pin male telco connector with the pin arrangement shown in
Figure 4-8.
Figure 4-8 50-Pin Male Telco Connector Pinouts
The following sections contain tables showing the pin assignments for the following:
PB60014–01
Line-interface card (LIC4, LIC8, DLC16, and ILC12)
Digital trunk interface card (DTIC)
Telemarketing line card (TLC)
ROLM integration card (RIC)
Northern Telecom SL-1 integration card (SLIC)
AT&T integration card (ATTIC)
Mitel integration card (MIC)
Serial integration card for the Meridian 1 (SIC8)
AT&T PBX integration card (APIC)
Northern Telecom PBX integration card (NPIC)
Direct-access card (DAC)
Direct-access card I/O panel J5 connector
Direct-access card I/O panel power connector (P8)
External-alarm port (J3 for Octel Overture 200 and J5 for Octel Overture 300)
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-22
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Four-Port Line-Interface Card, ROLM Integration Card, and
Mitel Integration Card
The following pin assignments are for the four-port line-interface card (LIC4), the ROLM integration
card (RIC), and the Mitel integration card (MIC), as they appear on the rear 50-pin telco connector. If an
LIC is installed in slot A1, it uses 50-pin telco connector P1; if it is installed in slot A2, it uses connector
P2, etc.
50-Pin Number
1
RING1
50-Pin Number
26
2
27
3
28
4
RING2
29
5
30
6
31
7
RING3
32
8
33
9
34
10
Octel Overture 200/300
Signal Function
RING4
35
11
36
12
37
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25
50
Serenade 3.0
Signal Function
TIP1
TIP2
TIP3
TIP4
PB60014–01
Installation
4-23
Eight-Port Line-Interface Card and Telemarketing Line Card
The following pin assignments are for the eight-port line-interface card (LIC8) and the Telemarketing
Line Card (TLC), as they appear on the rear 50-pin telco connector. If an LIC or TLC is installed in slot
A1, it uses 50-pin telco connector P1; if it is installed in slot A2, it uses connector P2, etc.
50-Pin Number
1
RING1
50-Pin Number
26
2
27
3
28
4
RING2
29
5
30
6
31
7
RING3
32
8
33
9
34
10
RING4
35
11
36
12
37
13
RING5
38
14
39
15
40
16
RING6
41
17
42
18
43
19
RING7
44
20
45
21
46
22
PB60014–01
Signal Function
RING8
47
23
48
24
49
25
50
Signal Function
TIP1
TIP2
TIP3
TIP4
TIP5
TIP6
TIP7
TIP8
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-24
Installation and Maintenance Volume
16-Port Line-Interface Card (DLC16) and the PBX Integration Cards
for Northern Telecom (NPIC)
The following pin assignments are for the 16-port line-interface card (DLC16) and the Northern Telecom
PBX integration card (NPIC) as they appear on the rear 50-pin telco connector.
50-Pin Number
Octel Overture 200/300
Signal Function
50-Pin Number
Signal Function
1
RING1
26
TIP1
2
RING2
27
TIP2
3
RING3
28
TIP3
4
RING4
29
TIP4
5
RING5
30
TIP5
6
RING6
31
TIP6
7
RING7
32
TIP7
8
RING8
33
TIP8
9
RING9
34
TIP9
10
RING10
35
TIP10
11
RING11
36
TIP11
12
RING12
37
TIP12
13
RING13
38
TIP13
14
RING14
39
TIP14
15
RING15
40
TIP15
16
RING16
41
TIP16
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25
50
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4-25
12-Port International Line-Interface Card
The following pin assignments are for the 12-port international line-interface card (ILC12) as they appear
on the rear 50-pin telco connector.
50-Pin Number
PB60014–01
Signal Function
50-Pin Number
Signal Function
1
RING1
26
TIP1
2
RING2
27
TIP2
3
RING3
28
TIP3
4
RING4
29
TIP4
5
RING5
30
TIP5
6
RING6
31
TIP6
7
RING7
32
TIP7
8
RING8
33
TIP8
9
RING9
34
TIP9
10
RING10
35
TIP10
11
RING11
36
TIP11
12
RING12
37
TIP12
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25
50
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-26
Installation and Maintenance Volume
DTIC Pin Assignment
The following pin assignments are for the Digital Trunk Interface Card (DTIC) as they appear on the rear
50-pin telco connector.
50-Pin Number
1
TXRING
50-Pin Number
26
2
27
3
28
4
TXRING
29
5
30
6
31
7
RXRING
32
8
33
9
34
10
Octel Overture 200/300
Signal Function
RXRING
35
11
36
12
37
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25
50
Serenade 3.0
Signal Function
TXTIP
TXRING
RXTIP
RXRING
PB60014–01
Installation
4-27
Northern Telecom SL-1 Integration Card
The following pin assignments are for the Northern Telecom SL-1 integration card (SLIC) as they appear
on the rear 50-pin telco connector. If a SLIC card is installed in slot A9, it uses 50-pin telco connector P9;
if it is installed in slot A10, it uses connector P10, etc.
50-Pin Number
Signal Function
Signal Function
1
AVDR1
26
AVDT1
2
SIGR1
27
SIGT1
3
28
4
AVDR2
29
AVDT2
5
SIGR2
30
SIGT2
6
31
7
AVDR3
32
AVDT3
8
SIGR3
33
SIGT3
9
PB60014–01
50-Pin Number
34
10
AVDR4
35
AVDT4
11
SIGR4
36
SIGT4
12
37
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25
50
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-28
Installation and Maintenance Volume
AT&T Integration Card (ATTIC)
The following pin assignments are for the AT&T integration card (ATTIC) as they appear on the rear
50-pin telco connector. If an ATTIC card is installed in slot A9, it uses 50-pin telco connector P9; if it is
installed in slot A10, it uses connector P10, etc.
50-Pin Number
Signal Function
1
Signal Function
26
2
TXR1
27
TXT1
3
PXR1
28
PXT1
4
29
5
TXR2
30
TXT2
6
PXR2
31
PXT2
7
32
8
TXR3
33
TXT3
9
PXR3
34
PXT3
10
Octel Overture 200/300
50-Pin Number
35
11
TXR4
36
TXT4
12
PXR4
37
PXT4
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25
50
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4-29
Serial Integration Card for the Meridian 1 (SIC8)
The following pin assignments are for the serial integration card (SIC8) for the Meridian 1 as they appear
on the rear 50-pin telco connector. If an SIC8 card is installed in slot A9, it uses 50-pin telco connector
P9; if it is installed in slot A10, it uses connector P10, etc.
50-Pin
Number
PB60014–01
Signal
Function
Signal
Name
50-Pin
Number
Signal
Function
Signal
Name
1
GND
I/O (35)
26
TXD3
I/O (36)
2
TXD1
I/O (18)
27
RXD3
I/O (19)
3
RXD1
I/O (1)
28
RTS3
I/O (2)
4
RTS1
I/O (37)
29
CTS3
I/O (38)
5
CTS1
I/O (20)
30
DSR3
I/O (21)
6
DSR1
I/O (3)
31
DCD3
I/O (4)
7
DCD1
I/O (39)
32
DTR3
I/O (40)
8
DTR1
I/O (22)
33
GND
I/O (23)
9
GND
I/O (5)
34
TXD4
I/O (6)
10
TXD2
I/O (41)
35
RXD4
I/O (42)
11
RXD2
I/O (24)
36
RTS4
I/O (25)
12
RTS2
I/O (7)
37
CTS4
I/O (8)
13
CTS2
I/O (43)
38
DSR4
I/O (44)
14
DSR2
I/O (26)
39
DCD4
I/O (27)
15
DCD2
I/O (9)
40
DTR4
I/O (10)
16
DTR2
I/O (35)
41
GND
I/O (46)
17
GND
I/O (28)
42
TXD7
I/O (29)
18
TXD5
I/O (11)
43
RXD7
I/O (12)
19
RXD5
I/O (47)
44
DSR7
I/O (48)
20
DSR5
I/O (30)
45
DTR7
I/O (31)
21
DTR5
I/O (13)
46
TXD8
I/O (14)
22
TXD6
I/O (49)
47
RXD8
I/O (50)
23
RXD6
I/O (32)
48
DSR8
I/O (33)
24
DSR6
I/O (15)
49
DTR8
I/O (16)
25
DTR6
I/O (34)
50
GND
I/O (51)
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-30
Installation and Maintenance Volume
APIC Integration Card
The following pin assignments are for the AT&T APIC card as they appear on the rear 50-pin telco
connector. If an APIC card is installed in slot A9, it uses 50-pin telco connector P9; if it is installed in slot
A10, it uses connector P10, etc.
“TX” signals are from the APIC to the PBX. “PX” signals are from the PBX to the APIC.
50-Pin Number
Octel Overture 200/300
Signal Function
50-Pin Number
Signal Function
1
TX RING 1
26
TX TIP 1
2
PX RING 1
27
PX TIP 1
3
TX RING 2
28
TX TIP 2
4
PX RING 2
29
PX TIP 2
5
TX RING 3
30
TX TIP 3
6
PX RING 3
31
PX TIP 3
7
TX RING 4
32
TX TIP 4
8
PX RING 4
33
PX TIP 4
9
TX RING 5
34
TX TIP 5
10
PX RING 5
35
PX TIP 5
11
TX RING 6
36
TX TIP 6
12
PX RING 6
37
PX TIP 6
13
TX RING 7
38
TX TIP 7
14
PX RING 7
39
PX TIP 7
15
TX RING 8
40
TX TIP 8
16
PX RING 8
41
PX TIP 8
17
TX RING 9
42
TX TIP 9
18
PX RING 9
43
PX TIP 9
19
TX RING 10
44
TX TIP 10
20
PX RING 10
45
PX TIP 10
21
TX RING 11
46
TX TIP 11
22
PX RING 11
47
PX TIP 11
23
TX RING 12
48
TX TIP 12
24
PX RING 12
49
PX TIP 12
25
(no connection)
50
(no connection)
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4-31
SIC8 I/O Panel Pinouts
The following pin assignments are on the SIC8 I/O panel for port 1 (DB 26 connector).
50-Pin
Number
PB60014–01
Signal
Function
I/O Line
1
GND
2
TXD1
LI/O (18)
3
RXD1
LI/O (1)
4
RTS1
LI/O (37)
5
CTS1
LI/O (20)
6
DSR1
LI/O (3)
7
GND
8
DCD1
9
GND
10
N/C
11
N/C
12
N/C
13
N/C
14
N/C
15
N/C
16
N/C
17
N/C
18
N/C
19
N/C
20
DTR1
21
N/C
22
N/C
23
N/C
24
N/C
25
N/C
LI/O (39)
LI/O (22)
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-32
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Direct-Access Card (DAC)
The following pin assignments are for the direct-access Card (DAC) as they appear on the rear 50-pin
telco connector. If a DAC is installed in slot A1, it uses 50-pin telco connector P1; if it is installed in slot
A2, it uses connector P2, etc.
50-Pin Number
1
Signal Function
RING1
26
2
27
3
28
4
RING2
5
29
Signal Function
TIP1
TIP2
30
6
–48V1
31
GND1
7
RING3
32
TIP3
8
33
9
34
10
RING4
11
12
35
–48V2
37
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
17
42
–48V3
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
25
Serenade 3.0
TIP4
36
13
18
Octel Overture 200/300
50-Pin Number
–48V4
49
GND2
GND3
GND4
50
PB60014–01
Installation
4-33
Direct-Access Card I/O Panel DP EXT Connector
The following pin assignments are on the DP EXT connector for the DAC I/O panel. DP EXT is a 50-pin
telco connector.
50-Pin Number
Signal Function
50-Pin Number
Signal Function
1
1RING1
26
1TIP1
2
1RING2
27
1TIP2
3
1RING3
28
1TIP3
4
1RING4
29
1TIP4
5
2RING1
30
2TIP1
6
2RING2
31
2TIP2
7
2RING3
32
2TIP3
8
2RING4
33
2TIP4
9
3RING1
34
3TIP1
10
3RING2
35
3TIP2
11
3RING3
36
3TIP3
12
3RING4
37
3TIP4
13
4RING1
38
4TIP1
14
4RING2
39
4TIP2
15
4RING3
40
4TIP3
16
4RING4
41
4TIP4
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25
50
Direct-Access Card I/O Panel Power Connector
The following pin assignments are for the DAC I/O panel power connector:
Pin
PB60014–01
Function
1
GND
2
–48 Vdc
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-34
Installation and Maintenance Volume
External Alarm Port
The external alarm port uses a 9-pin DB9 female connector with the following pin arrangement:
Use connector J3 for the Octel Overture 200.
Use connector J5 for the Octel Overture 300.
The external-alarm connector pin assignments are as follows:
AJ1 and AJ2 Connector Pin Assignments
Pin Number
Signal Function
1
Relay A, Pin 1
2
Relay B, Pin 1
3
LINK
4
GND
5
GND
6
Relay A, Pin 2
7
Relay B, Pin 2
8
LINK
9
GND
Relay A is the major alarm relay. Relay B is the minor alarm relay. A relay is open when there is no
alarm. When a relay is closed, it indicates an alarm condition.
With power removed from the cabinet, both Relay A and Relay B are in the closed position (normally
closed), indicating an alarm condition.
Pins 3 and 8 are linked together to provide a loop. You can use this as a confirmation that an alarm cable
is installed. Pins 4, 5, and 9 are connected to cabinet ground. These pins can be jumpered to a relay
contact, if closure to ground is required.
Both Relay A and Relay B are rated at
48 Vdc maximum
0.5 A maximum
The link loop is rated at
12 Vdc maximum
200 mA maximum
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4.6
4-35
COMMUNICATING WITH THE MESSAGE SERVER
The Octel Overture 200/300 indicates it is ready to receive commands or other input by displaying a
prompt character. The actual prompt character displayed indicates whether you are at the operating
system level or within the INSTALL or UPDATE programs. The prompt characters are as follows:
Prompt
System Level
Action
@
Operating system
Ready to accept commands
:
INSTALL program
Waiting for input
.
UPDATE program
Waiting for input
To enter an Octel Overture 200/300 command, type the command at the prompt, and press
key is labeled on some terminals.
. This
Examples of the commands are provided in the Configuration volume, and in this volume in the
Maintenance Commands chapter.
Remote access is not available until after the database has been installed. The terminal can only be
connected directly to the Octel Overture 200/300 via RS-232C cable.
Local Access
When locally connected, proceed as follows:
1.
Connect the terminal to either the front or rear connector of the system-terminal port.
2.
Turn the terminal ON. Set the baud rate by pressing
3.
When the password prompt is displayed, enter the password, and press
4.
PB60014–01
until the password prompt appears.
.
Default passwords for new servers are created by the manufacturer. For the report,
administrative, and maintenance levels, the default passwords are REPORT, ADMIN, and
MAINT, respectively. For security, create new server passwords as soon as possible. Refer to
the Maintenance chapter, Miscellaneous Commands section, for information about setting
passwords.
The operating system @ prompt appears.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-36
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Remote Access
After the database has been installed, the Octel Overture 200/300 can be remotely accessed. Call the
Octel Overture 200/300 from a Bell 103A/212A/CCITT V.22/CCITT V.22 bis compatible
modem-equipped terminal. When you hear the company greeting, access the modem by entering
, or access the modem through a modem-access mailbox, if it is used. The message server
responds with a high-pitched tone. Connect your modem. The Octel Overture 200/300 header should
appear shortly. Proceed as if directly connected.
Automatic Terminal Logout
The message server is automatically logged off if there is no activity within the time specified in System
Parameter 286 — TERMINAL INACTIVITY LOGOUT TIMER (MINUTES). The default is 3 minutes,
but the inactivity length can be configured for up to 15 minutes. Refer to the Configuration volume,
SYSTEM PARAMETER Table chapter.
Inactivity logout does not occur when the system administrator is in the midst of a noninteractive
command, for example running a List Trace. This could take several minutes to complete.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4.7
4-37
OCTEL OVERTURE 200/300 HARDWARE INSTALLATION
The physical installation of the message server begins by connecting the printer to the Octel Overture
200/300, applying power, and observing the Octel Overture 200/300 self-test.
Powering Up
Connect the Octel Overture 200/300 power cord to the dedicated power circuit and turn the cabinet power
switch to ON.
The LEDs on each circuit board are ON or OFF according to the following sequence after power up or
reset:
1.
Diagnostic Phase (red LED ON, green LED OFF)
After power up or reset, each circuit board executes its diagnostic self-test. While the self-test is
being performed, the red LED is ON and the green LED is OFF. A diagnostic self-test can take up to
five minutes.
2.
Software Download Phase (red LED ON, green LED ON)
If a circuit board’s diagnostic self-test is successful, the green LED is turned ON. If the green LED
does not come on within five minutes after power up or reset, replace the circuit board.
3.
Operational Phase (red LED OFF, green LED ON)
The downloaded operational software turns OFF the red LED, indicating that the circuit board is
operational.
4.
Activity LED (yellow LED ON or OFF)
The yellow LED indicates activity. The meaning of the yellow LED is circuit board dependent.
Measuring d.c. Voltages
The a.c. and d.c. wiring is prewired to connectors that are automatically engaged when the power supply
is installed. There are no power-supply adjustments. Use a digital voltmeter to measure the system d.c.
voltages at the voltage test points on the front edge of the CPU board. Measure between Test Point 1,
ground (use a common probe lead), and other test points to determine whether the voltages are in range.
Refer to Table 4-6; if any voltage is out of range, replace the power supply.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-38
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Table 4-6 Power Supply Output Rating and Acceptable Operating Ranges
Test Point
Nominal Voltage
Acceptable Operating Range (Vdc)
8
Ground
...
7
–5 VC
–4.50 to –5.50
6
+5 VC
4.50 to 5.50
5
+12 VM
11.40 to 12.60
4
–12 V
–10.80 to –13.20
3
+12 V
10.80 to 13.20
2
+5 V
4.75 to 5.25
1
Ground
...
Connecting the Terminal
Connect the terminal to the RS-232C connector marked J1 in the rear of the cabinet or to SP1.
When the Octel Overture 200/300 is initially powered up or restarted, you must establish the system baud
rate to print diagnostic messages. Refer to the following section.
If the system baud rate has already been established, the system header displays. Otherwise, press
repeatedly (until the password prompt appears) to establish the baud rate.
Starting Up the System
When the Octel Overture 200/300 is loaded or reloaded, the CPU and VCU execute a Boot ROM
diagnostic. This section describes the results of this diagnostic.
Turn ON your terminal and set the baud rate to any of the valid rates (300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
or 19200). At any of these baud rates, the Octel Overture 200/300 will print or display the diagnostic
status. Turn ON the power to the server.
Immediately following power up, press repeatedly to establish the baud rate. If the baud rate is
not established at this time, the system header and diagnostic messages will not print.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4-39
The terminal displays:
CPU
486
Model 300–6004–001
Rev XX
12MB
Testing Processor...PASSED
Testing System Voltage/Temp...PASSED
Testing ROM Checksum...PASSED
.
.
.
Testing COMPLETED
Booting from SCSI file XBOOT.IM
Image loaded
Loading Image from Hard Disk
.
.
Image loaded
––––––––––––– SYSTEM SOFTWARE
RELEASE S.X.X.X–2 (MM/DD/YY) ––––––––––––
Copyright (c) 199x Octel Communications Corp. All Rights Reserved.
DAY MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS YYYY (SYSTEM NAME) ID:000 S/N:000000 PBX:00
(MODEM ENABLED) LAST LOGIN: 00/00 00:00
@WAITING FOR VCU READY
LOADING VCU WITH FILE H:VCU
VCU STARTED
RUNNING DISK REBUILD...REBUILD DONE
INITIALIZING PORTS...PORT INITIALIZATION DONE
When the message server is reset using either the Power Up procedure or CPU reset switch, the LEDs on
the PCAs should respond as described in the Powering Up section. If the diagnostics are not successful,
the Octel Overture 200/300 restarts the test routine. If a problem is found, the terminal displays a specific
error type. Refer to the System Errors and Traffic Pegs chapter, Hardware Errors section, to interpret the
error code and select the maintenance action required.
Wait for the operating system to load and the diagnostic self-testing to finish. If the tests were completed
successfully, the Octel Overture 200/300 displays INITIALIZING PORTS...PORT
INITIALIZATION DONE. Proceed to the software installation.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-40
4.8
Installation and Maintenance Volume
RACK MOUNT INSTALLATION, OCTEL OVERTURE 300
The Octel Overture 300 can be installed in a 19-inch rack. Figure 4-9 illustrates a rack-mount installation.
10 mounting screws
(supplied in Overture
Rack Mount Kit)
2 rackĆmounting brackets,
one each side (supplied in
Overture Rack Mount Kit)
8 mounting screws
(supplied by rack manufacturer)
2 support rails
(supplied by rack manufacturer)
Figure 4-9 Octel Overture 200/300 Cabinet Installed in 19-Inch Rack
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4-41
Preinstallation
Determine whether the rack to be used is of a suitable size and strength to hold the Octel Overture 300.
At maximum configuration, the server can weigh as much as 220 pounds and might be too heavy for
some racks. Make sure that the rack is structurally sound before and after the server is installed. Remove
any rack casters, as they make the rack less stable. To increase stability further, you might need to bolt
the rack to the floor or provide some other means of support.
Obtain support rails from the rack manufacturer. Install the rails in the rack to support the weight of the
server. Unless the rack has threaded holes in vertical mounting rails, the rack manufacturer must also
provide speed nuts and rack-mounting screws for securing the front of the server to the rack.
If the Octel Overture 300 is currently in service, make sure that all cables connected to the back of the
server are long enough to reach the server when it is mounted in the rack.
The front and back of the rack must remain open to ensure proper air flow through the server. Mount the
server low enough in the rack so that any service person can easily service the server while standing on
the floor.
The following equipment and tools are required:
Quantity
Description
1
Octel Overture 300 message server
1
Rack mount kit, Part No. 740-6036-001, which
includes two mounting brackets and 10 mounting
screws
1
19-inch rack
2
Support rails, rated for at least 220 pounds
8
Rack-mounting screws
8
Speed nuts, if required
1
Phillips screwdriver
Installation
Use the following steps to install the Octel Overture 300 in a rack:
PB60014–01
1.
Open and remove the front door of the server.
2.
Put on an antistatic wrist strap. Connect it to an unpainted portion of the cabinet.
3.
Make sure that the power to the Octel Overture 300 is turned OFF.
4.
Remove the power-supply unit, fan tray, and all disk drives to reduce the weight of the cabinet and to
protect the disk drives from damage. Refer to the Hardware Replacement chapter, Hardware
Removal section, for instructions about removing assemblies. Make sure to note the slot position of
all disk drives, because they must be replaced in the same slots. You do not need to remove PCAs in
slots A1 through A14.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-42
Installation and Maintenance Volume
5.
If the message server has been in service, disconnect all cables from the rear of the cabinet. Make
sure to note the cable positions, because they must be reconnected exactly as they were.
6.
Install the rack-mounting brackets to the front vertical flanges of the Octel Overture 300 cabinet with
the screws provided, using a Phillips screwdriver. Refer to Figure 4-9.
7.
Determine the location of the Octel Overture 300 in the rack, and install the support rails from the
rack manufacturer appropriately.
8.
Using a tape measure, determine where the speed nuts provided by the manufacturer should clip on
the rack vertical rails to line up with the holes in the Octel Overture 300 rack-mounting brackets.
9.
The preceding step is not necessary if the rack has threaded holes in the vertical mounting
rails.
Two people are needed to insert the cabinet into the rack. Lift the partially empty cabinet onto the
support rails in the rack. You might need to remove the leveling feet on the bottom of the cabinet, so
that the cabinet can sit correctly on the support rails.
10. Secure the cabinet to the rack using the mounting screws provided by the rack manufacturer.
11. Install all assemblies removed in step 4, and secure them to the cabinet. Refer to the Hardware
Replacement chapter for instructions about installing assemblies.
12. If the message server has been in service, install all cables in the back of the cabinet as they were
before beginning this procedure. If not, follow the additional installation procedures in the
Connecting the Phone System to the Octel Overture 300 section of this chapter.
13. Turn on the power to the message server, and test its operation. Refer to the Octel Overture 300
Testing section in this chapter.
14. Replace and lock the front door of the cabinet.
Removal
To remove the Octel Overture 300 from a vertical rack, perform the following steps:
1.
Open and remove the front door of the cabinet.
2.
Put on an antistatic wrist strap. Connect it to an unpainted portion of the cabinet.
3.
Make sure that the Octel Overture 300 is turned OFF.
4.
Remove the power-supply unit, fan tray, and all disk drives to reduce the weight of the cabinet and to
protect the disk drives from damage. Refer to the Hardware Replacement chapter for instructions
about removing assemblies. Make sure to note the slot position of all disk drives, because they must
be replaced in the same slots. You do not need to remove PCAs in slots A1 through A14.
5.
If the message server has been in service, disconnect all cables from the rear of the cabinet. Make
sure to note the cable positions, because they might need to be reconnected exactly as they were.
6.
Two people are needed to remove the cabinet from the rack. Lift the partially empty cabinet out of
the rack, and place it on the floor.
7.
Install all assemblies removed in step 4, and secure them to the cabinet. Refer to the Hardware
Replacement chapter for instructions about installing assemblies.
8.
Remove the rack-mount hardware.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
9.
4-43
If the Octel Overture 300 is to be shipped, refer to the Receiving the Equipment, Reshipping section,
in this chapter.
10. If the Octel Overture 300 is to be returned to service, install all cables at the back of the cabinet as
they were before beginning this procedure.
11. Turn ON the power to the server and test the message server’s operation. Refer to the Octel Overture
300 Testing section in this chapter.
12. Replace and lock the front door to the cabinet.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-44
4.9
Installation and Maintenance Volume
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
System parameters and customer-provided information are entered in the message-server memory
through a terminal and a two-part configuration program. Use the INSTALL program to enter
information for new installations; use the UPDATE program for verification and to change the
configuration database. This section is an overview of the software installation. Detailed directions for all
steps are found in the Configuration volume.
Using INSTALL — Entering the Configuration Database
After the operating system has been loaded and the self-test completed, the Octel Overture 200/300 is
ready for you to enter the password. After a valid password is entered, begin the INSTALL program. At
the @ prompt, type
INSTA
When prompted, enter data as described in the Configuration volume to define the database.
Answer Y when the Octel Overture 200/300 asks whether you want to save the configuration to diskette.
Follow the Octel Overture 200/300 directions to insert the configuration diskette in the floppy-disk drive.
Using UPDATE
Use the UPDATE program for verifying and modifying the configuration database, as described in the
following two sections.
Verifying the Configuration Database
After you finish the message server configuration, the terminal again displays the @ prompt. To get a
printout of the database, enter the UPDATE program. At the @ prompt, type
UP
The terminal displays the dot (.) prompt. At the dot, type
L ALL
Check the printout with the configuration forms and verify that the data is correct. If correct, exit from
the program by typing
E
If any of the data is incorrect, follow the instructions in the Configuration volume when changing the
database. When any changes are made in the configuration database, always save the information on a
diskette when exiting the UPDATE program. Answer Y when the Octel Overture 200/300 asks whether
you want to save the configuration to diskette.
Modifying the Configuration Database
You can modify, add, or delete message-server configuration data. When the terminal or teleprinter
displays the @ prompt, type UP and press to access the UPDATE program. At the dot (.) prompt,
you can enter an UPDATE command. Refer to the Configuration volume, UPDATE Table chapter,
Understanding Update section.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4-45
4.10 CONNECTING THE PHONE SYSTEM TO THE OCTEL
OVERTURE 200/300
After you have verified that both the message server and the PBX are configured correctly, you must
connect the Octel Overture 200/300 to the PBX.
Connection Overview
The Octel Overture 200/300 installation involves connecting 25-pair cables from the rear of the Octel
Overture 200/300 to a 66M4-4W connector block, which is mounted on a backboard. Each 25-pair cable
supports one slot on the Octel Overture 200/300. The Octel Overture 200/300 is then connected with
jumper wire to the PBX.
It is recommended that the PBX extensions to be associated with the Octel Overture 200/300 be
terminated on a 66M connector block, or equivalent, for ease of installation and fault isolation, as shown
in Figure 4-10.
Cross-connect wire
66M4-4W
––––––
––––––
––––––
––––––
––––––
66M
PBX extensions
terminate here
––––
––––
––––
––––
––––
25-pair cable
Octel Overture 200/300
Bridge clips
Figure 4-10 Typical Octel Overture 200/300 Connections
Verifying the Equipment
The following equipment is required for installation of the Octel Overture 200/300:
PBX extensions associated with the Octel Overture 200/300, to be terminated on a 66M connector
block, or equivalent
Octel Overture 200/300 installation kit
DAC installation kit, Part No. 740-6045-001, if installing DAC
Each kit installs four DAC slots. To determine the number of DAC installation kits to order, divide
the total number of DAC slots by four. The kit contains the following:
PB60014–01
One DAC I/O Panel Assembly, Part No. 740-6051-001
One d.c. Power Supply Assembly, Part No. 740-6050-001
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-46
Installation and Maintenance Volume
The short 50-pin cable is not included in the installation kit. Order the cable separately, one cable
for each slot.
Each line card installation kit, Part No. 740-6034-001, installs four line-card slots. To determine the
number of line-card installation kits to order, divide the total number of line-card slots by four. The kit
contains the following:
One 66M4-4W connector block, Part No. PJ86001-01
Four 10-foot cables with male-to-female 25-pair connectors, Part No. SA10079-02
Two self-tap 10 x 5/8 PH sheet-metal screws, Part No. HH53024-01
A line-card installation kit is required if you are installing an integration card for the Octel Overture
200/300.
For more information about the installation of an integration card, refer to the appropriate chapter
in the Integration volume. For information about installing the EntryWorks ACP card, refer to the
Works for Serenade documentation.
Connector Blocks
Figure 4-11 shows the connector block that is to be used to add wiring for the Octel Overture 200/300.
The block is supplied in the installation kit. The connector block has 50 separate punchdown contacts in
each column, with each column wired to an amphenol connector at the side of the block. Column A is
wired to jack 1, column B to jack 2, etc.
Mount the block to the backboard in the location that you have specified. Mounting screws are provided
when the block is ordered. Mount the block with the word “TOP” (embossed in the plastic, located at the
upper left side of the block) facing up (refer to Figure 4-11).
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
Column =
Top
A
B
C
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Jack 1 (A)
to slot 1
Jack 2 (B)
to slot 2
4-47
Pair
Number
Jack 3 (C)
to slot 3
Jack 4 (D)
to slot 4
Figure 4-11 Connector Block
Wiring
In most cases, the existing wiring is not consistent in its placement of the connections. To isolate faults
quickly, it is recommended that the slots be connected in numerical order, allowing for known or
anticipated expansion. At least, make sure that the slot and port numbers can be translated to extension
numbers that are meaningful to the servicing technician.
Figure 4-12 is an example of a 16-port message server that requires one connector block and four 25-pair
cables. From the rear of the cabinet, connect the first 25-pair cable from P1 to jack position 1 of the
66M4-4W connector block, or column A; connect the second 25-pair cable from P2 to jack position 2, or
column B; etc.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-48
Installation and Maintenance Volume
66M4-4W
P6
66M4-4W
P1
Octel Overture
200/300
Figure 4-12 Example of Server-to-Block Connections
For maximum configuration, three connector blocks and twelve 25-pair cables are required.
The actual wiring (cross-connections from the 66M4-4W connector block to the 66M block, or
equivalent), can be made in any manner consistent with good telephony practices. Follow these two
guidelines when punching down wires to ensure correct installation:
Do not touch the pins on the connector block with your fingers or with dirty tools. The pins could
oxidize and open after a few months.
Tip is always above ring on the block when a pair is punched down. Refer Table 4-7, M4-4W
Connector-Block Designators.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4-49
Table 4-7 66M4-4W Connector Block Designators
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
PR
Cable
Wire#
Color
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
PB60014–01
WHT-BLU
BLU-WHT
WHT-ORG
ORG-WHT
WHT-GRN
GRN-WHT
WHT-BRN
BRN-WHT
WHT-SLT
SLT-WHT
RED-BLU
BLU-RED
RED-ORG
ORG-RED
RED-GRN
GRN-RED
RED-BRN
BRN-RED
RED-SLT
SLT-RED
BLK-BLU
BLU-BLK
BLK-ORG
ORG-BLK
BLK-GRN
GRN-BLK
BLK-BRN
BRN-BLK
BLK-SLT
SLT-BLK
YEL-BLU
BLU-YEL
YEL-ORG
ORG-YEL
YEL-GRN
GRN-YEL
YEL-BRN
BRN-YEL
YEL-SLT
SLT-YEL
VIO-BLU
BLU-VIO
VIO-ORG
ORG-VIO
VIO-GRN
GRN-VIO
VIO-BRN
BRN-VIO
VIO-SLT
SLT-VIO
Column
A
TA1
RA1
TA2
RA2
TA3
RA3
TA4
RA4
TA5
RA5
TA6
RA6
TA7
RA7
TA8
RA8
TA9
RA9
TA10
RA10
TA11
RA11
TA12
RA12
TA13
RA13
TA14
RA14
TA15
RA15
TA16
RA16
TA17
RA17
TA18
RA18
TA19
RA19
TA20
RA20
TA21
RA21
TA22
RA22
TA23
RA23
TA24
RA24
NOT
USED
Slot Port
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
3
3
1
1
4
4
1
1
5
5
1
1
6
6
1
1
7
7
1
1
8
8
B
TB1
RB1
TB2
RB2
TB3
RB3
TB4
RB4
TB5
RB5
TB6
RB6
TB7
RB7
TB8
RB8
TB9
RB9
TB10
RB10
TB11
RB11
TB12
RB12
TB13
RB13
TB14
RB14
TB15
RB15
TB16
RB16
TB17
RB17
TB18
RB18
TB19
RB19
TB20
RB20
TB21
RB21
TB22
RB22
TB23
RB23
TB24
RB24
Slot Port
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
4
4
2
2
5
5
2
2
6
6
2
2
7
7
2
2
8
8
C
TC1
RC1
TC2
RC2
TC3
RC3
TC4
RC4
TC5
RC5
TC6
RC6
TC7
RC7
TC8
RC8
TC9
RC9
TC10
RC10
TC11
RC11
TC12
RC12
TC13
RC13
TC14
RC14
TC15
RC15
TC16
RC16
TC17
RC17
TC18
RC18
TC19
RC19
TC20
RC20
TC21
RC21
TC22
RC22
TC23
RC23
TC24
RC24
Slot Port
3
3
1
1
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
3
3
5
5
3
3
6
6
3
3
7
7
3
3
8
8
D
TD1
RD1
TD2
RD2
TD3
RD3
TD4
RD4
TD5
RD5
TD6
RD6
TD7
RD7
TD8
RD8
TD9
RD9
TD10
RD10
TD11
RD11
TD12
RD12
TD13
RD13
TD14
RD14
TD15
RD15
TD16
RD16
TD17
RD17
TD18
RD18
TD19
RD19
TD20
RD20
TD21
RD21
TD22
RD22
TD23
RD23
TD24
RD24
Octel Overture 200/300
Slot Port
4
4
1
1
4
4
2
2
4
4
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
4
4
6
6
4
4
7
7
4
4
8
8
Serenade 3.0
4-50
Installation and Maintenance Volume
4.11 OCTEL OVERTURE 200/300 TESTING
The Octel Overture 200/300 should always be checked for proper operation after the configuration
database is installed or changes are made. In addition to the message-server test, other tests should be
made before the Octel Overture 200/300 is connected. These tests are described in this section. The tests
require the following equipment:
-
Three touchtone telephones; label the telephones as telephone A, telephone B, and telephone C
-
One terminal, directly connected to the Octel Overture 200/300, SP1 or J1, with an RS-232C cable
-
One hard copy of the configuration database
-
Two extensions for testing, connected to RJ11 jacks (in addition to the extension associated with the
Octel Overture 200/300
-
One modular adapter, Arminger 8-position modular adapter, Part No. AA-2560A, or equivalent, is
recommended
.
These tests assume that no other calls are being made to the Octel Overture 200/300. If calls are
received, the port status could become confusing and might affect the test results.
Operational Test To Verify Dial Tone on PBX Extensions
Verify that dial tone is present on each PBX extension associated with the Octel Overture 200/300, as
follows:
1.
Disconnect the 25-pair cables from the back of the Octel Overture 200/300.
2.
Connect the modular adapter to the 25-pair cable associated with slot one.
3.
Connect a touch-tone single-line telephone to the first jack position of the adapter.
.
4.
Only the first four jack positions of the modular adapter are used for each cable.
Go off-hook. Is dial tone present?
YES
' Continue for all extensions and cables, for each slot configured in the message
server. Proceed to the test in the next section.
NO
' Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
Extension Number Check
Verify that the PBXextension numbers match the Octel Overture 200/300 SLOTS Table, as follows:
1.
Refer to the configuration database listing, specifically to the SLOTS Table.
2.
Connect the telephone labeled B to the modular-adapter position associated with port 1.
3.
Connect the telephones labeled A and C to the two test telephone RJ11 jacks.
4.
From telephone A, enter the extension number associated with telephone B.
5.
Does telephone B ring?
YES
' Answer the call, verify the circuit quality, and move telephone B to the next Octel
Overture 200/300 RJ11. Continue the procedure until all extensions are tested, then
proceed to the test in the next section.
NO
Octel Overture 200/300
' Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4-51
PBX Functional Test
Verify that each Octel Overture 200/300 port extension can initiate a transfer by doing a hookswitch flash
and a transfer code or just a hookswitch flash, before entering an extension number. Also, verify that you
can reconnect to the caller when the extension called is not answered or busy. Perform the following steps:
1.
Connect telephone B to the modular-adapter position associated with port 1 of the Octel Overture
200/300.
2.
From telephone A, call the extension number associated with telephone B.
3.
Answer telephone B, and perform a hookswitch flash.
4.
Does the PBX provide a stutter or solid dial tone after the hookswitch flash?
YES
If either tone is present, continue to step 5
NO
Stop and correct the problem before continuing.
5.
Enter the transfer initiate code, if any, then enter the extension number associated with telephone C.
6.
After several ringbacks, perform a hookswitch flash and reconnect code, if required, to reconnect to
telephone A.
7.
Did telephone C stop ringing? Were you get reconnected to telephone A, which was on hold?
YES
Connect telephone B to the next Octel Overture 200/300 port extension and
continue until the extensions for each port are tested.
NO
8.
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
Make telephone C busy by taking it off-hook. Then repeat the test, starting with step 1 and calling a
busy extension instead of the ring-no-answer extension.
The extension number connected to telephone C should start with the same first digit as those
configured in the USER Table.
Test for Calls to the Intercept Extension (Attendant)
Verify that each extension can transfer a call to the intercept extension (attendant), as follows:
1.
Connect telephone B to the modular-adapter position associated with port 1 of the Octel Overture
200/300.
2.
From telephone A, call the extension number associated with telephone B.
3.
Answer telephone B, and perform a hookswitch flash and enter the transfer code, if required. Press
(or the attendant’s extension number), then hang up telephone B.
4.
Did telephone A connect with the operator?
YES
Continue test for all extensions, then proceed to the test in the next section.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
PB60014–01
Some PBXs do not allow a blind (unscreened) transfer to an attendant. If this is the case, do
not assign Attribute 15 — TRANSFER TO A RINGING EXTENSION, to the COS for this
mailbox.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-52
Installation and Maintenance Volume
When all Octel Overture 200/300 port extensions pass these tests, proceed by connecting the 25-pair
cables to the Octel Overture 200/300 and test the message server for standard operation. The Octel
Overture 200/300 must initialize each of the PBX ports. To verify that all the ports are
initialized, at the @ prompt, type PS.
All ports should return IDL.
Test for Call to a Ring-No-Answer Extension
The extension to be called must have a valid first digit (a mailbox with this first digit must already
exist in the USER Table) or be entered in the USER Table as a mailbox (mailbox number same as
the extension number and a COS).
Verify that the Octel Overture 200/300 correctly handles a ring-no-answer (RNA) call.
1.
From telephone A, call the extension associated with port 1.
2.
Did the Octel Overture 200/300 answer with the correct company greeting (a custom greeting or the
generic greeting)?
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
3.
Enter the extension number for telephone C.
4.
Did the Octel Overture 200/300 respond with the prompt: “Thank you, just a moment . . .” (Primary
Answer Mode example)?
5.
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
After a predetermined interval (defined by the entry in the INFORMATION Table for ringbacks
before no answer), does the message server reconnect and speak the prompt “Extension XXX doesn’t
answer. Please leave a message at the tone, or enter another extension number, or press zero for
assistance”?
6.
If the mailbox has not been entered in the USER Table, the Octel Overture 200/300 does not
offer to take a message.
YES
Press
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
, then hang up.
Repeat the test for each Octel Overture 200/300 port.
Test for Calls to a Busy Extension
Verify that the Octel Overture 200/300 properly handles a call directed to a busy extension.
1.
From telephone A, call the extension associated with port 1.
2.
Did the Octel Overture 200/300 answer with the correct company greeting?
Octel Overture 200/300
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4-53
3.
Make sure that telephone C is busy by taking it off-hook. Enter the extension number for telephone C.
4.
Did the Octel Overture 200/300 respond with the prompt “Thank you, just a moment . . .” (primary
answer mode example)?
YES
NO
5.
After a short interval, does the message server reconnect and speak the prompt “Extension XXX is
busy. Please leave a message at the tone, or enter another extension number, or press zero for
assistance”?
YES
NO
6.
Continue.
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
Press , then hang up.
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
Repeat the test for each Octel Overture 200/300 port.
Hunt Group Operation Test
Verify the hunting sequence, as follows:
The terminal command PS displays the current status of each Octel Overture 200/300 port. A
three-character abbreviation denotes the state of each port. Refer to the Maintenance Commands
chapter for more information about using the PS command and the meaning of the states.
1.
From the system level @ prompt, enter PS.
2.
Does the port status show the IDL state for all positions? If not, determine the cause and correct the
problem before continuing.
a.
Some ports may be in the TST (test) state momentarily, because of online diagnostics. If a port
is in the TST state, enter PS several times, before deciding whether the port is in trouble or
self-test is running. Self-test runs every 5 minutes; if a problem is encountered, it is entered in
the Hardware Error Table.
b.
If other calls are being made into the Octel Overture 200/300, all ports might not be idle. If they
are not all idle, check to see whether anyone else is calling.
If the terminal is connected remotely, one of the ports shows the modem as MOD.
3.
From telephone A, enter the extension number or access code associated with the Octel Overture
200/300 hunt group.
4.
Does the Octel Overture 200/300 answer correctly? If not, determine the cause and correct the
problem before continuing.
5.
From the terminal, enter PS.
6.
Did the correct port answer, based upon how the PBX is programmed for hunting groups?
YES
NO
7.
PB60014–01
The port status should show the port in WFD (wait for digits) state when an incoming call is
answered.
Continue.
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
From telephone A, press
and hang up after the message server says “good-bye.”
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-54
Installation and Maintenance Volume
8.
Busy out the PBX extension identified in step 6 above.
9.
Continue the process from step 3 until all ports have been busied out.
Testing Fail-Safe Operation
The fail-safe port operation test comprises the all-ports-busy condition and the ring-no-answer condition.
All Ports Busy
Perform the following steps for the all-ports-busy test:
1.
While all ports are busied out, use telephone A to enter the extension number or access code of the
hunt group.
2.
Does the call overflow to the correct answering extension as determined for fail-safe operation?
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
3.
Some PBXs might not support hunt-group overflow; in which case, the caller could
experience a ring no-answer condition until a port is available to accept the call.
Remove the busy condition from all Octel Overture 200/300 port PBX extensions.
Port Ring-No-Answer
Perform the following steps for the port ring-no-answer test:
1.
Disconnect the 25-pair cables associated with the Octel Overture 200/300.
2.
From telephone A, enter the hunt-group extension number or access code associated with the
extensions connected to the Octel Overture 200/300.
3.
Is the call diverted to the correct alternate answer point when the Octel Overture 200/300 does not
answer?
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
4.
Reconnect the modular line cords.
5.
From the terminal, enter TE C 1. The Octel Overture 200/300 should respond, showing that each
port is forwarded until all ports have been forwarded.
6.
Enter PS to verify that all ports are in the FWD (forwarded) state.
7.
From telephone A, enter the hunt-group extension number or access code.
8.
Is the call forwarded to the correct position as specified in the call forwarding string (System
Parameter 45 — SYSTEM RELOAD FORWARD STRING)?
9.
Octel Overture 200/300
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct before continuing.
From the terminal, enter TE C 2 to cancel call forwarding. The Octel Overture 200/300 should
respond with ALL PORTS INITIALIZED.
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
4-55
10. From telephone A, enter the hunt-group extension number or access code.
11. Does the Octel Overture 200/300 answer correctly?
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct before continuing.
12. Enter PS at the terminal.
13. Verify that all ports are in the IDL state and that the cancel forwarding string (System Parameter 46
— SYSTEM RELOAD CANCEL FORWARD STRING) is correct. If any ports still show FWD, use
TE C 2 x, where x is the port number, to cancel forwarding. If cancel forwarding does not work,
determine the cause and correct it before continuing.
Test to Verify Trunk To Octel Overture 200/300 Operation
1.
From the terminal, enter the PS command.
2.
Does the port status show all ports in the IDL state?
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
3.
From telephone A, call outside the PBX and back in on trunks dedicated to the hunt group.
4.
Does the Octel Overture 200/300 answer correctly?
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
5.
From the terminal, enter the PS command.
6.
Does the port that answered show WFD state?
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
7.
From telephone A, enter the extension number associated with telephone C. The Octel Overture
200/300 responds with “Thank you, just a moment.”
8.
Does telephone C ring?
9.
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
Enter the PS command. Port status should show port 1 in the AIC (assisted incoming call/automated
attendant) state.
10. Answer telephone C. Does the Octel Overture 200/300 say “Beep, beep, beep....Connecting” and
transfer the incoming trunk to telephone C?
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
11. From the terminal, enter the PS command, and verify that the port state is IDL.
12. Busy-out the port that answered.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-56
Installation and Maintenance Volume
13. Repeat the procedure from step 3 for all ports, until all ports are busied out. Verify that calls can be
placed through the Octel Overture 200/300 from each port.
14. From telephone A, call out and back in on a trunk dedicated to the hunt group.
15. Does the call overflow to the correct destination?
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
Some PBXs might not support overflow, in which case a ring-no-answer condition could be
encountered.
16. Remove the busy condition from all Octel Overture 200/300 port extensions.
17. Repeat steps 3 through 13 except call an extension that does not answer, and then repeat it by calling
a busy extension.
Test to Verify Trunks
1.
From telephone A, call outside the PBX and back in on the first trunk dedicated to the Octel
Overture 200/300.
2.
Does the Octel Overture 200/300 answer correctly?
3.
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
Repeat the procedure from step 1 for each trunk, until all hunts have been tested. Verify that each
trunk is answered by the Octel Overture 200/300 with the correct greeting.
Toll-free service lines can be tested individually, even if they are bands from other areas, by
using the “plant test” number. Get these from the PE (Public Exchange) if you do not know
them.
Test for Calls to the Intercept Extension
Verify that the Octel Overture 200/300 can transfer a call to the intercept position (attendant) when the
caller does nothing or presses , as follows:
1.
From telephone A, call the extension associated with port 1.
2.
Does the Octel Overture 200/300 answer correctly?
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
3.
Listen to the complete company greeting. Do nothing, let the Octel Overture 200/300 time out, and
transfer the call to the attendant (do not enter any digits).
4.
Did you reach the attendant?
5.
Octel Overture 200/300
YES
Continue for all ports.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
Repeat the procedure except press
Serenade 3.0
instead of waiting for a timeout.
PB60014–01
Installation
4-57
6.
From telephone A, call out and back in on a trunk dedicated to the hunt group. When the Octel
Overture 200/300 answers, let the message server time out.
7.
Does the Octel Overture 200/300 transfer the call to the intercept position?
YES
Continue.
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
Message Waiting Test
1.
From telephone A, call out and back in on a trunk dedicated to a Octel Overture 200/300 port.
2.
Does the Octel Overture 200/300 answer correctly?
YES
NO
Continue.
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
3.
Make sure that telephone C is busy, by taking it off-hook. Enter the extension number associated
with telephone C.
4.
After a predetermined interval, the Octel Overture 200/300 should reconnect, and at telephone A you
should hear, “Extension XXX is busy. Please leave a message at the tone, or enter another extension
number, or press zero for assistance.”
5.
Leave a test message for telephone C.
6.
The Octel Overture 200/300 should now initiate a message-waiting-notification call (ASAP message
waiting) to the extension associated with telephone C.
7.
A message is not delivered to a mailbox unless it is at least 4.5 seconds long. The mailbox
must be entered in the USER Table for the Octel Overture 200/300 to offer to take a message.
If all ports are allowed to make outcalls, the call is not attempted when three-fourths or more
of the ports are being used. Also, for message waiting, INFORMATION Table Index 12 —
MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION, must be set to Y.
Does the Octel Overture 200/300 call the extension associated with telephone C?
YES
NO
Continue.
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
8.
Answer telephone C. The Octel Overture 200/300 should respond with “Extension XXX has X
messages. Ready,” or “Extension XXX has X messages. Please enter your security code.”
9.
Enter the security code, if asked, and press
to Listen to the test message.
10. Does the message sound clear?
YES
NO
Continue.
Determine the cause and correct the problem before continuing.
11. Press to Erase the message, then press to exit the mailbox. Does the Octel Overture 200/300
respond with “X messages will be erased” ?
PB60014–01
YES
Press
NO
Determine the cause and correct the problem.
to exit the message server. The Octel Overture 200/300 should respond with
“good-bye.”
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-58
Installation and Maintenance Volume
4.12 TESTING THE INSTALLATION AND TELEPHONE CHANGES
Use the following checklist to help track any installation and telephone changes, as follows:
Use the “See Chapter” column for reference to the appropriate chapter in the Installation and
Maintenance volume for further information.
Enter the name of the person who is responsible for tracking an installation task in the “Person
Responsible” column.
Enter the date the installation task is to be completed in the “Scheduled” column.
Enter the final completion date in the “Completed” column.
Installation Task
See
Chapter
Receiving the Equipment
Person
Responsible
Scheduled
Completed
Installation
Inspect for damage
Carton
Server
ac/dc cables secure
Printed circuit cards
Reshipping procedures
Preinstallation
Installation
Environment
Dust free (Y/N)
Away from large motors (Y/N)
Server accessible (Y/N)
Power
Dedicated fuse or breaker
Dedicated 115-Vac 60-Hz
receptacle
Other required equipment available
Modular line cord
RJ11 jacks or equivalent
CAT or other ASCII terminal
Phillips screwdriver
RS-232C interface cable
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Installation
Installation Task
PBX Preparation
See
Chapter
Person
Responsible
Scheduled
4-59
Completed
Preparing the
Phone System
Survey telephone system (Y/N)
Additional touch-tone extensions (as
required)
Install and label the Octel Overture
200/300 ports
PBX COS changes for the
Octel Overture 200/300 port extensions
Forwarding
Off-site calls, no call restriction
Remove call waiting features
Permitted to transfer, hold,
reconnect
Overflow for RNA/busy
Hunt Group 1
Hunt Group 2
Hunt Group 3
Hardware Installation
Installation
Communicating with the message server
Octel Overture 200/300 installation
Configuration installation
Connecting the PBX to the
Octel Overture 200/300
Testing
Installation
Tools and equipment
Three touch-tone single line
telephones
CAT or other ASCII terminal and
teleprinter
Database hardcopy
Two test extensions
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
4-60
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Installation Task
Pass/Fail Tests
Step
See
Chapter
Person
Responsible
Scheduled
Completed
Installation
Description
1.
Pre-operation test of message
server
2.
Extension number check
3.
PBX function
4.
Call to intercept/attendant PBX
5.
Ring-no-answer extension
6.
Busy extension
7.
Hunt Group operation
8.
Fail-safe operation
9.
Trunk to the Octel Overture
200/300 operation
10.
Verifying trunks
11.
Intercept extension
(the Octel Overture 200/300)
12.
Message waiting
Trunks
Preparing The
Phone System
Quantity to the Octel Overture 200/300
Dedicate to hunt group(s)
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
No extension restriction, if applicable
Trunk-to-trunk capability (Y/N)
Trunk queuing (Y/N)
incoming only
two-way
Central Office changes
Hunt Group
contains the Octel Overture
200/300 extension
circular hunting
overflow (Y/N)
trunks dedicated (circle one)
DDC, UCD, DIL, Dedicated
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
5
REPORTS
Chapter Contents
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
PB60014–01
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Listing and Clearing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Listing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Listing User Statistics (Selections 3 or 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Clearing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
System Performance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Call Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Message Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Digital Network Performance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Network Traffic Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
To Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Message Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Names Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Network Access Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Feature Use Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Digital Network Traffic Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
User Message Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Messaging Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
User Calling Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Call Processing Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Disk Usage Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Total System Message Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Total of Minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Storage Capacity Based on Message Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Individual Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Port Group Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
All Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Mailbox Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
User Status Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Integration Calling Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
System Performance by COS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Caller’s Initial Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Subsequent Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Reports
Command
Additional Information
List Report
@L R
Shows reports that can be listed. Individual reports are shown
below. System Parameter 72 determines maximum lines per page
for reports.
Clear Report
@C R
Produces a listing of reports that can be cleared. Options are:
1=System Performance and Port Statistic
2=Network Traffic
3=User Call and Message Statistics.
The following reports are cleared:
User Message, User Calling and Mailbox Usage, User Status
Detail, and Integration Calling Statistics
INDIVIDUAL REPORTS
System Performance
1
When clearing this report, the Traffic Peg Count Table is set to
zero. The Port Statistics are cleared as well. Information pertains
to incoming calls, subsequent actions, progress of calls, and
mailbox information.
1 D
Lists the Digital Network Performance Report.
2
For collocated and networked message servers. Information
pertains to route statistics, message delivery, network access
totals, and feature use.
2 D
Lists the Network Traffic Report for digital information only.
User Message Statistics
3
Includes current messages, messages left after various conditions,
logon, and date cleared.
User Calling Statistics
4
Includes incoming calls, subsequent calls, calls abandoned, and
date cleared.
Disk Usage
5
Provides statistics about the amount of voice and fax message
storage currently used on the message server.
Port Statistics
6
Information pertains to individual, group, fax channel information,
and all port statistics. This report is cleared when the System
Performance report is cleared.
Network Traffic
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Reports
Command
Additional Information
Mailbox Usage
7
Shows mailbox usage time. Usage includes logon time and access
time.
User Status Detail
8
Shows status information on mailbox access and time durations
associated with individual mailbox usage.
Integration Calling
Statistics
9
Shows information about the type of non-integrated or integrated
calls a mailbox receives.
System Performance by
COS
10
Provides call and message statistics for ports/trunks by COS.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Reports
5.1
5-1
OVERVIEW
Reports provide statistics on the operation and usage of the Octel Overture200/300 message server and
give owners the ability to monitor various operational aspects of the Octel Overture 200/300. Reports
may be accessed at any time through the system’s administration terminal.
The Octel Overture 200/300 offers reports that provide both system-wide and mailbox statistics.
Information is collected and stored for ten reports.
1.
System Performance
2.
Network Traffic
3.
User Message Statistics
4.
User Calling Statistics
5.
Disk Usage
6.
Port Statistics
7.
Mailbox Usage
8.
User Status Detail
9.
Integration Calling Statistics
10. System Performance by COS
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-2
5.2
Installation and Maintenance Volume
LISTING AND CLEARING REPORTS
Information is collected and stored in various internal tables. The information accumulates until the
report is cleared. Reports can be listed without affecting the accumulated data. Once the command to
clear a report is entered, the values are reset to zero and resume accumulating.
Most reports show only the date they are run. At the top of reports 1, 2, 6 and 10 are two dates. The
“from” date and time indicate when the table was last cleared. The “to” date and time indicate when the
report was last printed. It is recommended that reports be listed and cleared on a regular basis. The
reports can display individual values up to 65535.
Beginning with Serenade Release 3.0, the following reports can display individual values up to
999,999.
System Performance
Digital Network Performance
Network Traffic
Digital Network Activity
Disk Usage
Port Statistics
Integration Calling Statistics
System Performance by COS
For a report showing the attributes associated with the COS Table, SCHEDULE Table, and all
INFORMATION Tables defined in the SCHEDULE Table, refer to the Configuration volume, COS
chapter, Using UPDATE chapter, for the LIST PROFILE command.
This chapter describes all reports except the DID/E&M Trunk Interface report, which is detailed in
DID/E&M Trunk Interface Installation and Maintenance Manual. For information about Direct
Access Cards, refer to the Direct Access Card (DAC) Installation and Maintenance Manual.
Listing a Report
Reports are printed by selecting from the LIST REPORT menu. At the prompt @ enter
LIST REPORT, or L R
@
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE.
NETWORK TRAFFIC.
USER MESSAGE STATISTICS.
USER CALLING STATISTICS.
DISK USAGE.
PORT STATISTICS.
MAILBOX USAGE.
USER STATUS DETAIL.
INTEGRATION CALLING STATISTICS.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE BY COS.
SELECT REPORT TO BE LISTED. (1 – 10, EMPTY LINE = EXIT)
:
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Reports
5-3
Select the number of the report you wish to list.
Enter L R # (report number), to designate a specific report before the menu is displayed.
The prompts displayed after selecting a specific report (i.e., 1–0) vary slightly as shown in the following
sections. These reports can be printed. Before each reported is displayed, the message server prompts
“READY PRINTER, THEN PRESS RETURN.”
Digital Network Reports
The System Performance report, 1, and the Network Traffic report, 2, also print information about digital
networking. To print digital information for either report, after entering the report number, enter D. For
example, to list digital network information for the System Performance report, at the : prompt, enter
:1 D
If only 1 is entered for the System Performance report, the report does not include any digital networking
information. The digital networking System Performance report is printed only when 1 D is entered. If
only 2 is entered for the Network Traffic report, the report includes all networking information. Enter 2
D to get information only about digital networking.
Listing User Statistics (Selections 3 or 4)
Once a User Statistics, Mailbox Usage, or User Status Detail report has been selected, the following
prompt displays:
ENTER DIGIT PATTERN (”?” FOR HELP):
CHECKING USER MAILBOXES...DONE.
READY PRINTER, THEN PRESS RETURN...
If ? is entered for help, the following prompt displays:
Enter one of the following to select one or more mailboxes:
”ALL”
1–8 DIGITS
EMPTY LINE
–
–
–
ALL MAILBOXES.
ONLY MAILBOXES BEGINNING WITH THIS DIGIT PATTERN.
ABORT WITHOUT ACTION.
If 1–8 digits are entered, the list displays the mailboxes beginning with the digit(s) entered. In this
example the first digit is 5 and mailboxes are three digits long:
PB60014–01
Entered Digits
Mailboxes Displayed
5
All mailboxes beginning with 5
56
All mailboxes beginning with 56
567
Only mailbox 567
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-4
Installation and Maintenance Volume
User Statistics, Mailbox Usage, and User Status Detail reports are sorted by first digit. For example, if
mailboxes in the 2000 and 300 series are used, 2000 lists first.
If an invalid number is entered, the program displays the prompt:
“NO MATCH ON DIGIT PATTERN.”
Clearing a Report
To clear reports, at the @ prompt type
CLEAR REPORT, or C R
@C R
After this command is entered, following prompt displays:
1.
2.
3.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (IN TRAFFIC PEGS) AND PORT STATISTICS.
NETWORK TRAFFIC.
USER MESSAGE, USER CALLING AND MAILBOX USAGE.
SELECT REPORT TO BE CLEARED.(1 – 3, EMPTY LINE = EXIT)
:
Select the number of the report type you wish to clear. The prompts displayed after selecting a report type
are specific to that report type.
When option 1 — System Performance and Port Statistics, is chosen, the following reports are cleared:
System Performance
System Performance by COS report
Digital Network Performance Report
Port Statistics
When option 3 — User Call and Message Statistics, is chosen, the following reports are cleared:
User Message Statistics
User Calling Statistics
Mailbox Usage
User Status Detail
Integration Calling Statistics
The Disk Usage report cannot be cleared. It always reflects current information.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Reports
5.3
5-5
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE.
NETWORK TRAFFIC.
USER MESSAGE STATISTICS.
USER CALLING STATISTICS.
DISK USAGE.
PORT STATISTICS.
MAILBOX USAGE.
USER STATUS DETAIL.
INTEGRATION CALLING STATISTICS.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE BY COS.
The System Performance report provides system-wide call and message statistics. It details the number of
calls to busy and not answered extensions, calls to attendant/intercept positions, and messages left under
various conditions.
Individual call and message statistics are displayed in the User reports.
The System Performance report is based upon the Traffic Peg Count Table. Refer to the System
Errors and Traffic Peg chapter for traffic peg details.
Clearing the System Performance report clears the traffic peg counts and vice versa. If you want
both the System Performance report and the traffic pegs, list both before clearing.
An example of a System Performance report is shown on the next page.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-6
Installation and Maintenance Volume
–––– SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REPORT FOR (SYSTEM NAME) –––
FROM: MM/DD HH:MM A.M.
YYYY
TO: MM/DD HH:MM P.M.
YYYY
PAGE 1 OF 1
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
*
INCOMING CALL SUMMARY
*
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
CALLER’S INITIAL ACTION:
DIALED EXTENSION OR DIGITS
764
DEFAULTED TO ASSISTANCE
136
DIALED ”0” FOR ASSISTANCE
59
LEFT A MESSAGE AT THE TONE
0
PRESSED ”#” TO LOG–ON
955
”*” TO MAKE A QUICK MESSAGE
12
CALLER WAS A NETWORK UNIT
1099
CALLER WAS A DID/E&M UNIT
0
OTHER
7
TOTAL CALLS INTO SYSTEM
3032
SUBSEQUENT ACTIONS:
DIALED EXTENSION OR DIGITS
445
SENT TO ASSISTANCE
3
DIALED ”0” FOR ASSISTANCE
117
LEFT A MESSAGE AT THE TONE
370
PRESSED ”#” TO LOG–ON
243
”*” TO MAKE A QUICK MESSAGE
4
TRANSFERRED CALL TO NETWORK
111
PROGRESS OF CALLS TO EXTENSIONS:
ANSWERED
459
RING–NO–ANSWER
104
BUSY
153
GREETING PLAYED (NO CALL)
784
VACANT NUMBER
24
–––––––
TOTAL TO EXTENSIONS
1524
NUMBER OF TIMES USERS LOGGED–ON:
1249
NUMBER OF USER MAILBOXES:
30
NUMBER OF NON-VOICE MAILBOXES:
10
NUMBER OF PORTS CONFIGURED:
4
ALL PORTS BUSY (SECONDS):
0
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
*
MESSAGE SUMMARY
*
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MESSAGES CREATED:
AFTER BUSY OR NO–ANSWER
83
AFTER GREETING PLAYED
287
RECEIVED FROM NETWORK
976
BY QUICK–MESSAGE
14
BY LOGGED–ON USERS
632
––––––––
TOTAL MESSAGES CREATED
1992
MESSAGES CURRENTLY STORED:
GREETING MESSAGES
NAME MESSAGES
USER MESSAGES
14
8
68
––––––––
90
TOTAL MESSAGES STORED
DISK USAGE:
AVG. USER MESSAGE LENGTH (MINUTES)
STORAGE CURRENTLY USED
APPROXIMATE MINUTES OF AUTHORIZED STORAGE
APPROXIMATE MINUTES OF EQUIPPED STORAGE
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
0.7
37%
250
150
PB60014–01
Reports
5-7
Call Summary
The Call Summary portion of the System Performance report shows the stages of calls and actions of
callers into the Octel Overture 200/300. The calls include the following:
Callers attempting to reach extensions.
People calling into mailboxes.
Other calls answered (such as calls from other network locations and calls from the DID Interface).
Information is reported in three stages:
Caller’s initial action.
Caller’s subsequent actions.
Progress of calls to extensions.
The following sections describe the activities reported within each of the three stages. Also included are
the traffic peg(s) used as the source for each field.
Caller’s Initial Action
This section displays callers’ initial action upon reaching the Octel Overture 200/300. If a category
relates to a traffic peg, the peg is indicated in parentheses.
An integrated call that has generated a call record, pegs under Caller’s Initial Action, Dialed Extension or
Digits. The call record is considered the initial action taken.
DIALED EXTENSION OR
DIGITS (Peg 129)
DEFAULTED TO
ASSISTANCE (Peg 138)
This category can include
Number of times callers dialed a defined first digit from 1–8.
Number of times callers were sent directly to Next Mailbox without
dialing.
Number of times callers dialed an account code.
Number of times callers dialed extensions or digits to call out on the
network.
With Integration
Call forwarded calls with call record
Direct internal call to the Octel Overture 200/300 with call record
Forwarded call to the Octel Overture 200/300 with call record
Direct external call to the Octel Overture 200/300 with call record
Number of times callers did nothing (e.g., rotary dial) and were transferred
to attendant or intercept position.
PB60014–01
If the call is integrated with a call record, default to assistance is
pegged under Subsequent Actions.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-8
Installation and Maintenance Volume
DIALED FOR
ASSISTANCE
(Peg 128)
Number of times callers pressed
intercept position.
and were transferred to attendant or
If the call is integrated with a call record, pressing
is pegged under Subsequent Actions.
for assistance
LEFT A MESSAGE
AT THE TONE
(Peg 140)
Number of times callers left a message as an initial action. This also
includes instances where Next Mailbox gives the caller a greeting and takes
a message without the caller entering any digits.
PRESSED
TO LOG ON
(Peg 131)
Number of times callers pressed
and unsuccessful logons).
TO MAKE A
QUICK MESSAGE
(Peg 133)
to enter a mailbox (includes successful
If the call is integrated with a call record, logon is pegged under
Subsequent Actions.
Number of times callers pressed to make a Quick Message.
CALLER WAS A NETWORK Number of times caller identified itself as a Network system. That is, the
UNIT
call was from another network location.
(Peg 135)
CALLER WAS A DID/E&M
UNIT
(PEG 136)
Number of times caller identified itself as a DID/E&M system. That is, the
call was intercepted by the Octel Overture 200/300 DID/E&M Interface.
OTHER
Miscellaneous category including
Serenade 3.0
Caller dialed
A Octel Overture 200/300 port called a CX port (extension forwarded
to the Octel Overture 200/300).
Caller dialed invalid first digit (e.g.,
Caller disconnected (detected hang-up events or from DID Interface).
Caller has not taken initial action.
With Adaptive Integration
Octel Overture 200/300
.
).
Direct call into the Octel Overture 200/300 where caller hung up
or pressed .
Direct internal call into the Octel Overture 200/300 where caller
accessed Quick Greeting Activation.
Numbers within the Other category may fluctuate as new calls come
in and as current callers make an initial action. If Total Calls into the
message server reaches the maximum value (65,535), this field
contains ***. The Other category is calculated by subtracting all
Initial Calls from Total Calls into System. If the subtraction results
in a negative number, Other is ***.
PB60014–01
Reports
TOTAL CALLS
INTO SYSTEM
(Peg 1)
5-9
Total calls answered by the Octel Overture 200/300.
If the System Performance report or traffic pegs were last cleared
while calls were in progress, this value may be larger than peg 1.
However, the value printed in the System Performance report always
reflects the correct value.
Subsequent Actions
After completing the initial action, (i.e., caller left a message at the tone), another action is taken.
Subsequent actions are described below.
DIALED EXTENSION OR
DIGITS
(Peg 130)
SENT TO
ASSISTANCE
(Peg 139)
This category can include
Number of times callers dialed a defined first digit from 1 to 8.
Number of times callers went to Next Mailbox.
Number of times callers dialed an extension or digit to stay in queue.
Number of times a direct internal caller dialed an extension or digit.
This category can include
Number of times callers were transferred to attendant or intercept
position after dialing too many invalid extensions.
Number of callers that remain on the line for assistance, whether or
not a message was left when System Parameter 77 — PBX
PROVIDES MOMENTARY DISCONNECT, is set to YES. (Adaptive
Integration)
Calls intercepted by DID or E&M Interface Modules that defaulted to
assistance, whether or not a message was left.
Number of network calls sent to assistance.
Autotransfer to assistance (includes Personal Assistant).
DIALED FOR
ASSISTANCE
(Peg 128)
Number of times callers pressed and were transferred to
attendant/intercept position or Personal Assistant.
LEFT A MESSAGE
AT THE TONE
(Peg 141)
Number of times callers left message after busy/no answer/greeting.
PRESSED
TO LOG ON
(Peg 132)
Number of times callers pressed
and unsuccessful logons).
to enter a mailbox (includes successful
With Adaptive Integration, the number of times a direct internal caller
pressed to logon.
PRESSED TO MAKE A
QUICK MESSAGE
(Peg 134)
PB60014–01
Number of times callers pressed to make a Quick Message.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-10
Installation and Maintenance Volume
TRANSFERRED CALL TO
NETWORK
(Peg 137)
Number of times callers transferred out onto the network.
Progress of Calls to Extensions
If the initial or subsequent action taken by the caller requires the Octel Overture 200/300 to place a call,
responses to that call are detailed below. Also included is the number of logon requests that were
successfully completed.
ANSWERED
(Peg 46)
RING-NO-ANSWER
(Peg 35)
BUSY
(Peg134)
GREETING PLAYED
(NO CALL)
(Pegs 144, 39, 98, and 162)
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
This category can include
Number of answered calls.
With Adaptive Integration, COS Attribute 15 — TRANSFER TO A
RINGING EXTENSION, pegs as ANSWERED when the call is
transferred.
Number of calls placed that were not answered, including:
Number of normal calls to an extension resulting in ring-no-answer,
including first caller to a FIFO queue extension.
Number of DID calls that intercepted on ring-no-answer.
Number of PBX integration calls that forwarded on ring-no-answer.
(This applies to PBXs that provide information on why the call
forwarded. Northern Telecom SL-1 and ROLM switches do not
provide this information.)
Number of times the Octel Overture 200/300 attempted to place a call
but did not get dial tone at the port.
Number of calls placed to busy extensions, including
Number of normal calls to a busy extension, including first caller to a
FIFO queue extension.
Number of DID calls that intercepted on busy.
Number of PBX integration calls that forwarded on busy. (This applies
to PBXs that provide information on why the call forwarded. Northern
Telecom SL-1 switches do not provide this information.)
Number of times a personal mailbox greeting was played and no call
was placed (normal greeting operation). Also included in this category
are calls to unavailable extensions, and calls to extensions that forward
back to a Secondary Answering mode port and integration calls where
a call record indicates an “all forward” condition.
Number of times an Extended Absence Greeting is played to an
external caller.
Number of times OctelForms scripted prompt greeting mailbox was
called (without COS Attribute 6 — CALL FIRST BEFORE PLAYING
GREETING).
Number of times a valid account code was entered.
PB60014–01
Reports
5-11
Number of times callers with FIFO queue position of two or greater
dialed digits to enter or stay in queue, or when maximum queuing limit
was reached, before going to Next Mailbox.
Number of times error greeting (Custom Prompt) played.
Number of times DID calls were intercepted immediately.
Number of PBX integration calls that forwarded on the All Forward
condition, or from PBXs which do not provide information on why the
call forwarded.
VACANT NUMBER
(Peg 38)
Number of calls placed by the Octel Overture 200/300 to vacant number
(fast busy).
TOTAL TO EXTENSIONS
(Peg 46, 34, 35, 38, 39, 98,
144, and 162)
Total calls placed to extensions by the Octel Overture 200/300.
NUMBER OF TIMES USERS Number of times a mailbox was successfully logged onto.
LOGGED ON
(Peg 9)
NUMBER OF USER
MAILBOXES
Number of mailboxes in the USER Table.
NUMBER OF PORTS
CONFIGURED
Number of ports configured.
ALL PORTS BUSY
(SECONDS) (Peg 24)
Number of seconds during which all the ports were busy and therefore
unavailable.
Message Summary
The Message Summary section details the number of messages created and on what conditions, number
of messages currently stored, and disk usage.
Totals for stored messages include disk space used for storing a forwarded message and all comments
attached to it.
Messages are only stored once and addressed to mailboxes as required. Therefore, User Statistics
for messages do not equal total storage used or remaining for system statistics. Personal greetings
and names are not included for individual mailboxes in the User Messaging report; they are
included in the System Summary report.
A description of the Message Summary fields follows.
Messages Created
Messages may be created by callers responding to prompts or by mailbox owners using messaging
features. The following summarizes both types.
AFTER BUSY OR
NO-ANSWER
(Peg 14)
PB60014–01
Number of messages left after call to an extension received busy or no
answer.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-12
Installation and Maintenance Volume
AFTER GREETING PLAYED Number of messages left after greeting played.
(Peg 142)
RECEIVED FROM
NETWORK (Peg 143)
Number of valid messages received from network.
BY QUICK MESSAGE
(Peg 2)
Number of times a Quick Message was left.
BY LOGGED-ON USERS
Number of messages sent from mailboxes.
TOTAL MESSAGES
CREATED
Number of valid voice messages created.
Messages Currently Stored
Messages are generally created by callers or by mailbox owners. Recorded names and greetings created
using the Insert/Swap feature are also considered to be messages. System totals for each of these
categories are reflected below.
GREETING MESSAGES
Number of greeting messages currently stored in mailboxes.
NAME MESSAGES
Number of name messages currently stored in mailboxes.
USER MESSAGES
Number of messages currently stored. All messages in mailboxes are
counted, except multiple copies. When a message is delivered to several
mailboxes, it is counted only once.
TOTAL MESSAGES
STORED
Sum of greeting, name, and user messages.
Disk Usage
The following provides information about the total disk storage and the percentage of that storage
currently utilized.
AVG. USER MESSAGE
LENGTH
Average length in minutes of the messages currently stored. (Minutes
divided by number of messages.)
STORAGE
CURRENTLY USED
Percentage of total storage currently used.
APPROXIMATE MINUTES
OF AUTHORIZED
STORAGE
Maximum minutes of message storage that is authorized. This number is
derived from the total of all voice hours on non-COD drives and authorized
hours on COD drives.
APPROXIMATE MINUTES
OF EQUIPPED STORAGE
Maximum minutes of message storage that would be available if no voice
messages (names, greetings, or messages are stored. This number is derived
from the total of all voice hours on non-COD drives and equipped hours on
the COD drives.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
The approximate minutes equipped may not match the approximate
minutes authorized if the message server has not been restarted
since additional COD hours were purchased.
PB60014–01
Reports
5-13
The exact minutes of storage may vary due to factors including
The disk itself.
Manufacturer of the disk.
Accumulated bad sectors on the disk.
Single or dual-drive system. For message servers with more than two
drives of different sizes, Hot Standby may consume additional space
on the smaller of two drives, resulting in a loss of capacity for the rated
hours of storage. Refer to the Feature Description volume, Hard Disk
Redundancy chapter, for information about Hot Standby.
Digital Network Performance Report
The Digital Network Performance Report tracks the performance of the LAN card on a message server. It
provides a measure of the messaging traffic across the digital network and the allocation of the LAN
channel resources for the messaging traffic across the digital network. It is accessed as an extension of
the System Performance Report.
To access the Digital Network Performance Report, at the @ prompt, enter
L R
The LIST REPORT menu appears. At the bottom of the menu, enter 1 D, as in the following.
SELECT REPORT TO BE LISTED. (1 – 10, EMPTY LINE = EXIT)
:1 D
The Digital Network Performance Report can also be accessed by using the command L R 1 D.
If only 1 is entered for the System Performance report, the report does not include any digital
networking information. The digital networking System Performance report is printed only when 1
D is entered.
All information shown on this report is computed from values pegged in the Traffic Peg Count Table. All
peg table values max out at 65535. When a field has reached its maximum, the entry is displayed as ***,
with a note at the end of the report:
NOTE: *** = Arithmetic Overflow
If fields are overflowing, it is an indication that the report should be listed and cleared at more frequent
intervals, based on the traffic on the digital network.
An example of a Digital Network Performance Report is shown below.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-14
Installation and Maintenance Volume
–– DIGITAL NETWORK PERFORMANCE REPORT FOR XXXXX ––
FROM:02/07 11:45 A.M. 1997
TO:02/08 10:44 A.M. 1997
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MESSAGE STATISTICS:
VOICE MESSAGES SENT
14071
VOICE MESSAGES RECEIVED
13997
FAX MESSAGES SENT
2409
FAX MESSAGES RECEIVED
2556
NAMES SENT
3852
NAMES RECEIVED
3871
REAL TIME NAMES PLAYED
0
MESSAGE SEND (hh:mm:ss)
00:00:00
MESSAGE RECEIVE (hh:mm:ss)
00:00:00
DIGITAL NETWORKING CHANNEL USAGE:
NUMBER OF CHANNELS
1/2 OR MORE BUSY (hh:mm:ss)
3/4 OR MORE BUSY (hh:mm:ss)
ALL BUSY (hh:mm:ss)
IN USE SENDING MESSAGES (hh:mm:ss)
IN USE RECEIVING MESSAGE (hh:mm:ss)
16
03:57:40
03:33:42
00:58:10
***
***
LAN CONNECTIONS:
OUTGOING ATTEMPTED
OUTGOING REJECTED
OUTGOING GOT ALL BUSY
INCOMING ATTEMPTED
INCOMING REJECTED
INCOMING GOT ALL BUSY
LAN AVAILABILITY:
LAN CARD UP
CARD COURTESY DOWN
6039
191
191
5656
126
124
99.98%
3
NOTE: *** = Arithmetic Overflow
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Following are descriptions of the fields in the report. The information in each field is for the period of the
report for one particular location
Message Statistics
MESSAGES SENT
Number of messages sent.
MESSAGES RECEIVED
Number of messages received.
NAMES RECEIVED
Number of network names received from the digital network.
REAL TIME NAMES
PLAYED
MESSAGE SEND
Number of realtime name plays requested.
MESSAGE RECEIVE
Time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) of the actual lengths of the messages
received.
Time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) of the actual lengths of the messages
sent.
Those totals are not the same as the amount of time used for sending or receiving messages. The reason
they are not the same is that with digital networking, the time to send, for example, a 4-minute message
may be less than 4 minutes.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Reports
5-15
Digital Networking Channel Usage
NUMBER OF CHANNELS
Total number of digital networking channels available on the message server.
1/2 OR MORE BUSY
Time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) that one-half or more of the digital
networking channels were busy.
3/4 OR MORE BUSY
Time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) that three-quarters or more of the
digital networking channels were busy.
ALL BUSY
Time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) that all digital networking channels
were busy.
IN USE MESSAGE SEND
Time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) that a LAN card was occupied
sending messages. This time would normally be less than the times in the
MESSAGE SEND field.
IN USE MESSAGE
RECEIVED
Time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) that a LAN card was occupied
receiving messages. This time would normally be less than the times in the
MESSAGE RECEIVE field.
LAN Connections
OUTGOING
Attempted
Number of attempts to make a connection to another location.
Rejected
Number of times an attempt to connect to another location was rejected.
Got Busy
Number of times an attempt to connect to another location was rejected
because all LAN channels were busy at the other location.
INCOMING
Attempted
Number of attempts by another location to connect to this location.
Rejected
Number of times that attempts by another location to connect to this
location were rejected.
Got Busy
Number of times that attempts by another location to connect to this
location were rejected because all LAN channels were busy at this location.
LAN Availability
PB60014–01
LAN CARD UP
The percentage of time that the LAN card was up and running to the
message server up time. This field overflows if the peg for the message
server up time reaches its maximum of 65535 minutes, which is 45 days.
Therefore, the System Performance Report of the Traffic Peg Table must be
cleared at least every 45 days for this information to be useful.
CARD COURTESY DOWN
The number of times that the CD x command to remove a LAN card from
service was executed successfully. This field corresponds to Traffic Peg 150.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-16
5.4
Installation and Maintenance Volume
NETWORK TRAFFIC REPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE.
NETWORK TRAFFIC.
USER MESSAGE STATISTICS.
USER CALLING STATISTICS.
DISK USAGE.
PORT STATISTICS.
MAILBOX USAGE.
USER STATUS DETAIL.
INTEGRATION CALLING STATISTICS.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE BY COS.
The Network Traffic report provides traffic information for each location (multicabinet and remote)
configured in the network. All configured locations are listed in the report. Traffic information
accumulates until the report is cleared. For each location, the report lists
Route Choices
Feature Use Totals
Message Delivery
Network Access Totals
Example of a Network Traffic report:
–––––––––– NETWORK TRAFFIC REPORT FOR XXXXX ––––––––––
FROM: MM/DD HH:SS A.M.
YYYY
TO: MM/DD HH:MM P.M.
YYYY
************************************************************
TO LOCATION << NAME >>
ROUTE CHOICE–> 1. TODL02
–––––––––––––– –––––––––
CALLS TRIED :
213
ROUTE BUSY
:
0
ROUTE FAIL
:
0
LINEQUAL FAIL:
0
DATA SUCCESS%:
100
MSG–MIN DAY :
105
MSG–MIN NIGHT:
15
–––––––––
–––––––––
––––––––– MESSAGE DELIVERY ––––––––––––––
CALLS CALLS
MSGS
SENT
SENT
DISK ALLMSG
TRIED FAILED RETRY NIGHT
DAY
FULL RET’D
–––––– –––––– –––––– –––––– –––––– –––––– ––––––
95
0
0
11
101
0
1
–––NETWORK ACCESS TOTALS–––
CALLS CALLS ALLPRT ALLRTE
TRIED FAILED BSY/NA FAILED
–––––– –––––– –––––– ––––––
213
1
1
0
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
––––FEATURE USE TOTALS–––––
AUTO
QUICK
USER IMMED.
ATTEN.
MSG LOGON
CALL
–––––– –––––– –––––– ––––––
62
6
50
0
PB60014–01
Reports
5-17
To Location
For each location name, information is reported for a maximum of three possible route choices. For each
route choice, the following accumulates:
CALLS TRIED
Number of calls attempted to this location by this route.
ROUTE BUSY
Encountered busy trying to reach this location.
ROUTE FAIL
Failed to access this location. Could be due to no route dial tone.
LINEQUAL FAIL
Line test failed. Could be due to low signal or high noise level.
DATA SUCCESS %
The percentage of data commands successfully sent. This value is an
indicator of potential data failures that may result in messages returned to
sender or uncompleted calls.
MSG-MIN DAY
Minutes of messages sent during the day.
MSG-MIN NIGHT
Minutes of messages sent during the night.
Message Delivery
Information for each location includes
PB60014–01
CALLS TRIED
Message delivery calls attempted.
CALLS FAILED
Message delivery calls that failed to transfer at least one message. May be
due to no answer, more than 3/4 of the ports busy, or line quality problems.
A second attempt is made at a later time.
MSGS RETRY
Messages that failed in the process of being sent. May be due to the line
being dropped. The Octel Overture 200/300 automatically retries at a later
time. This is an indication of potential line problems.
SENT NIGHT
Messages sent during the night. The night hours are defined by System
Parameter 62 — NET: NIGHT DELIVERY START TIME and System
Parameter 63 — NET: NIGHT DELIVERY END TIME.
SENT DAY
Messages sent during all hours not defined by System Parameters 62 and
63.
DISK FULL
The disk at this location was full and the message was not delivered. These
messages are sent back to the sender’s mailbox.
ALLMSG RET’D
This column indicates the number of times all messages were returned for a
particular locaiton. The number is specific to each particular location,
whether primary or secondary, i.e., if messages in the message queue for
the primary location were successfully delivered, but the messages in the
message queue for the secondary location were returned, only the
secondary location indicates that the message was returned.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-18
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Names Directory
The Names Directory applies only to OctelNet:
ASCII RCV FAIL
Number of times delivery of the ASCII name from the remote node failed.
ASCI RCV NIGHT
Number of times ASCII name was received from the remote node during
the period defined as night.
ASCII RCV DAY
Number of times ASCII name was received from the remote node during
the period defined as day.
SPOKEN RCV FAIL
Number of times delivery of the spoken name from the remote node failed.
SPOKEN RCV NIGHT
Number of times spoken name was received from the remote node during
the period defined as night.
SPOKEN RCV DAY
Number of times spoken name was received from the remote node during
the period defined as day.
ASCLL NAMVRCY FAIL
Number of times message was refused because the ASCII name on the
receiving system did not match the ASCII name on the sending system.
System Parameter 251 – must be set to YES.
Network Access Totals
Summary of network access for each location:
CALLS TRIED
Number of calls attempted to this location.
CALLS FAILED
Calls tried that were not successful. Could be due to all ports busy, route
busy, route failure, or line quality problems.
ALLPRT BSY/NA
Calls tried but not answered by the Octel Overture 200/300 at this location
due to all ports busy or the message server being unavailable.
ALLRTE FAILED
Calls failed due to route busy, failure, or line quality, with no routes to
advance to.
Feature Use Totals
Caller feature usage for each location:
AUTO ATTEN
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Calls transferred through the network to an extension at this location using
the automated attendant.
PB60014–01
Reports
5-19
QUICK MSG
Quick Messages left at this location through the network.
USER LOGON
Mailbox logged onto at this location through the network.
IMMED CALL
Immediate call feature used to call an extension at this location through the
network.
Digital Network Traffic Report
To display the report for digital information only, when selecting the report number, enter 2 DIGITAL
or 2 D.
If only 2 is entered for the Network Traffic report, the report includes all networking information.
Enter 2 D to get information only about digital networking.
–––––––––––– NETWORK TRAFFIC REPORT FOR
XXXXXX ––––––––––
FROM : 00/00 00:00 A.M. 1997
TO : 07/03 08:30 A.M. 1997
************************************************************
TO LOCATION << CHGO1
>>
* * * DIGITAL NETWORK ACTIVITY * * *
–––––––––––––––––– CONNECTIONS –––––––––––––––––
DAY
NIGHT
TRIED FAILED
DRP ALL–BSY MINUTES MINUTES
0
0
0
0
0
0
–––––––––––––––– MESSAGE DELIVERY ––––––––––––––
VOICE VOICE
VOICE
DISK
ALLMSG
TRIED FAILED
RETRY
FULL MINUTES
RET’D
0
0
0
0
0
0
FAX
TRIED
0
FAX
FAILED
0
FAX
RETRY
0
–––––––––––– OTHER –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
NAMES HI_SPD ANALOG
NAMES NAMESND NAMESND
PLAYED LNK DRP STANDBY MISMTCH
SENT
FAILED
0
0
0
0
0
0
************************************************************
NOTE: Information showing success/failure status of analog
standby deliveries is available in the L R 2 report
Connections
Digital network connections for each location:
PB60014–01
TRIED
Number of times that a request for an open connection was made to the
remote system.
FAILED
Number of times that the open connection request did not result in a
connection grant.
DRP
Number of times that the connection was dropped after it had been
established. A connection is considered dropped if the originating end lost
the connection, without having done an explicit close connection.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-20
Installation and Maintenance Volume
ALL-BSY
Number of times that the reason for a connection reject was that all LAN
channels on the destination were busy.
DAY MINUTES
Number of minutes that connections were established and maintained
during the day.
NIGHT MINUTES
Number of minutes that connections were established and maintained
during the night.
Message Delivery
Information for each location includes
TRIED
Message send attempts over the LAN.
FAILED
Number of send attempts that failed to deliver messages.
RETRY
Number of times the message server tried to send a message to this location
that had already been tried earlier
DISK FULL
Number of times a message transfer was not completed because of a
destination disk being full.
ALL MSG RET’D
Number of instances when a location fails.
MINUTES
Number of minutes of messages sent to this location.
Other Digital Network Information
Two other kinds of digital network information are provided:
NAMES PLAYED
Number of times that this message server requested this location to play a
name in real time. Applicable only to locations in a domain.
HI-SPD LNK DRP
Number of times the permanent TCP/IP connection to this location was
lost. Applicable only to high-speed links.
ANALOG STANDBY
Number of times Analog Standby
NAMES MISMTCH
Number of times a message is not delivered over the digital network
because the of names between sending and receiving message servers do
not match.
NAMESND SENT
Number of times a Namesend name was successfully sent.
NAMESND FAILED
Number of times a Namesend names failed.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Reports
5.5
5-21
USER MESSAGE STATISTICS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE.
NETWORK TRAFFIC.
USER MESSAGE STATISTICS.
USER CALLING STATISTICS.
DISK USAGE.
PORT STATISTICS.
MAILBOX USAGE.
USER STATUS DETAIL.
INTEGRATION CALLING STATISTICS.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE BY COS.
The User Message Statistics report provides a detailed list of call and messaging activity for individual
mailboxes. Each line within the report displays data for a single mailbox. The report contains the number
of current messages, total messages, logon dates and when the statistics were last cleared for each mailbox.
Additional user statistics are provided in the User Calling Statistics report.
The User Message Statistics report uses the same tables as the User Calling Statistics and User
Status Detail reports. When one of these reports is cleared, the tables are cleared for all three
reports.
Example of a User Messaging report:
* MESSAGING STATISTICS *
MM/DD HH:MM P.M.
MAILBOX
300
301
304
305
306
307
310
311
YYYY
PAGE
<–––CURRENT MESSAGES––>
TOTAL AVGSC TOTSC OLDST
2
6
3
0
0
0
1
0
19
71
60
0
0
0
16
0
39
430
180
0
0
0
16
0
9/03
9/17
8/31
–––
–––
–––
9/23
–––
<–MESSAGES LEFT AFTER–>
BUSY NOANS GREET OTHER
0
12
95
34
28
0
18
2
3
29
64
119
57
0
68
80
64
3
128
5
0
0
16
0
4
85
336
119
43
0
118
62
<––LOGON––>
TOTAL LAST
60
183
582
230
339
2
304
133
9/21
9/17
9/23
9/23
9/23
9/23
9/22
9/23
1
DATE
CLEAR
7/27
7/27
7/27
7/27
7/27
1/01
7/27
7/27
Messaging Statistics
Provides statistics about messages currently stored in each mailbox. Also shows the date that data for
each mailbox was last cleared (from a terminal) by using the command CLEAR REPORTS and choosing
option 3.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-22
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Current Messages
Numbers are given for
TOTAL
Total number of messages currently stored.
AVGSC
Average seconds per message, based on the total seconds and total number.
TOTSC
Total seconds of current messages stored.
OLDST
Date of the oldest message stored.
Messages Left After
Total number of messages left after the caller encountered any of these conditions:
BUSY
Extension called was busy.
NO ANSWER
Extension called did not answer.
This includes all forwarded calls.
GREETING
Personal greeting was turned ON and played.
OTHER
Messages left by: New Message, Quick Message, Forward, Reply, Return
Receipt, Broadcast, Distribution List.
Logon
Mailbox was entered by dialing and mailbox number (and security code) or for quick logon by dialing
(and security code). This field provides
TOTAL
Number of times mailbox was entered.
LAST
Date when mailbox was last entered.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Reports
5.6
5-23
USER CALLING STATISTICS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE.
NETWORK TRAFFIC.
USER MESSAGE STATISTICS.
USER CALLING STATISTICS.
DISK USAGE.
PORT STATISTICS.
MAILBOX USAGE.
USER STATUS DETAIL.
INTEGRATION CALLING STATISTICS.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE BY COS.
The User Calling Statistics report provides a detailed list of call and messaging activity for individual
mailboxes. Each line within the report displays data for a single mailbox. The report contains the number
of incoming calls, subsequent calls, abandoned calls, and date statistics were last cleared for each mailbox.
Additional user statistics are provided in the User Message Statistics report.
The User Calling Statistics report uses the same tables as the User Message Statistics and User
Status Detail reports. When one of these reports is cleared, the tables are cleared for all three reports.
Example of a User Calling Statistics report:
* CALL PROCESSING STATISTICS *
MM/DD HH:MM P.M.
MAILBOX
YYYY
PAGE
<––––––INCOMING CALLS–––––––>
TOTAL ANSWD NOANS BUSY GREET
301
303
304
305
307
308
309
310
27
36
7
38
1
2
1
6
1
20
3
14
0
0
0
1
6
16
0
19
0
2
1
4
7
0
0
5
1
0
0
0
13
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
<–SUBSEQ. CALLS–>
TOTAL ATTEN EXTNS
15
7
2
5
0
1
0
0
2
2
0
5
0
1
0
0
13
5
2
0
0
0
0
0
1
CALLS
ABAND
DATE
CLEAR
11
4
2
5
1
1
1
5
9/01
9/01
9/01
9/01
9/01
9/01
9/01
9/01
Call Processing Statistics
Provides statistics about calls to each mailbox. Also shows the date that data for each mailbox was last
cleared (from a terminal) by using the command CLEAR REPORTS and choosing option 3.
Incoming Calls
Provides the following information for calls directed to the mailbox/extension.
PB60014–01
TOTAL
Total number of calls placed by the Octel Overture 200/300.
Both integrated and non-integrated calls are included in this total.
ANSWD
Number of calls answered This number includes non-integrated calls only.
Calls that are released and forwarded back are not pegged.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-24
Installation and Maintenance Volume
NO ANSWD
Number of calls not answered. Only non-integrated calls are included.
BUSY
Number of calls placed to a busy extension. Only non-integrated calls are
included.
GREET
Number of calls placed to mailbox when
Greeting is ON
Extended absence greeting is ON
No extension is associated with the mailbox
Extension is unavailable or vacant
DID calls which were intercepted immediately
Calls to Personal Assistance resulting in RNA or busy
Only non–integrated calls are included.
For calls that forward back in an integrated message server, refer to the
Integration Calling Statistics Report section for the call count status.
Subsequent Calls
Provides information about what a caller did after their initial call to a mailbox or extension that was not
answered.
TOTAL
Total number of subsequent calls.
ATTEN
Number of times the caller entered
mailbox.
EXTNS
Number of times caller entered another mailbox or extension.
CALLS ABAND
Number of calls disconnected after reaching an unavailable extension
without leaving a message, calling another extension or the operator.
Included are calls to scripted prompt mailboxes during which the caller
hangs up before completing responses (in situations where COS Attribute
33 — WILL SEND SCRIPTED MESSAGES WITHOUT
CONFIRMATION, is not assigned to the scripted prompt COS).
after entering an extension or
A forwarded call where a call record is generated is considered an initial
action. Therefore, if a caller is forwarded, enters a mailbox number and
then hangs up after hearing a greeting or system prompt, the mailbox entry
pegs under Subsequent Calls and the abandon call column are not pegged.
Calls forwarded to the Octel Overture 200/300 are considered an initial
action, and Calls Aband is pegged if the caller hangs up without leaving a
message or dialing another extension.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Reports
5.7
5-25
DISK USAGE REPORT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE.
NETWORK TRAFFIC.
USER MESSAGE STATISTICS.
USER CALLING STATISTICS.
DISK USAGE.
PORT STATISTICS.
MAILBOX USAGE.
USER STATUS DETAIL.
INTEGRATION CALLING STATISTICS.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE BY COS.
The Disk Usage report provides statistics about the amount of voice message storage currently used on
the message server.
* DISK USAGE REPORT FOR ABC Name *
12/20
06:01 P.M.
1997
––––TOTAL SYSTEM MESSAGE STORAGE––––––
PHYSICAL TOTAL
STORAGE
%
CAPACITY USED
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
1
2
3
4
5
6
TOTAL
1985
1985
2777
0
0
0
6747
NAMES
NON
REDN REDN
GREETINGS
NON
REDN
REDN
USER MSGS
NON
REDN
REDN
NET NAMES
NON
REDN REDN
32.7%
32.3%
48.2%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
1.0%
0.9%
1.4%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
1.3%
1.6%
2.1%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
1.7%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
30.0%
29.4%
42.5%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.3%
0.2%
0.4%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
39.0%
0.0% 1.1%
0.0%
1.7%
0.7%
35.0%
0.0%
0.3%
TOTAL EQUIPPED MINUTES
TOTAL PURCHASED MINUTES: 3600
73.1% USED
STORAGE CAPACITY BASED ON MESSAGE TYPE:
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
TOTAL
1
2
3
4
5
6
VOICE MSGS
NON
REDN
REDN
–––––––––––
0.0%
24.1%
0.0%
24.3%
1.0%
34.6%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
FAX MSGS
NON
REDN
–––––––––––
0.0%
0.0%
0.7%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
5.9%
5.0%
7.8%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.4%
0.2%
6.4%
28.5%
REDN
Total System Message Storage
The Disk Usage report displays, the storage capacity, total percentage of storage used, and percentages of
storage for names, greetings, and user messages for the disk.
PB60014–01
STORAGE CAPACITY
Number of minutes of storage.
TOTAL % USED
Total percentage of the disk storage capacity used.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-26
Installation and Maintenance Volume
NAMES
Non-redundant and
Redundant
Percentage of the storage capacity used for non-redundant and redundant
names storage.
GREETINGS
Non-redundant and
Redundant
Percentage of the storage capacity used for non-redundant and redundant
greetings storage.
USER MESSAGES
Non-redundant and
Redundant
Percentage of the storage capacity used for non-redundant and redundant
user messages storage.
NET NAMES
Non-redundant and
Redundant
Percentage of the storage capacity used for non-redundant and redundant
network names storage.
The last row in the Total System Message Storage section lists the total for
each of the columns.
Total of Minutes
TOTAL EQUIPPED
MINUTES
Maximum minutes of message storage that would be available if no voice
messages (names, greetings, or messages) are stored. This number is
derived from the total of all voice hours on non-COD drives and equipped
hours on the COD drives.
TOTAL PURCHASED
MINUTES
The number of minutes purchased. This number may not be the same as the
total equipped minutes if the message server has not been restarted since
new COD hours were purchased.
Storage Capacity Based on Message Type
The Disk Usage report displays the storage capacity based on message type for voice messages and fax
messages for every disk.
VOICE MESSAGES
Non-redundant and
Redundant
Percentage of the storage capacity used for non-redundant and redundant
storage of voice messages.
FAX MESSAGES
Non-redundant and
Redundant
Percentage of the storage capacity used for non-redundant and redundant
storage of fax messages.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Reports
5.8
5-27
PORT STATISTICS
'
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE.
NETWORK TRAFFIC.
USER MESSAGE STATISTICS.
USER CALLING STATISTICS.
DISK USAGE.
PORT STATISTICS.
MAILBOX USAGE.
USER STATUS DETAIL.
INTEGRATION CALLING STATISTICS.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE BY COS.
This report contains information for each port configured in the SLOTS Table. There are three sections of
this report:
-
Individual Port Statistics
-
Port Group Statistics
-
All Port Statistics
.
Port statistics are included for fax calls.
An example of a Port Statistics report follows. The report refers to the fax channels as FAX ports.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-28
Installation and Maintenance Volume
* PORT USAGE REPORT FOR (SYSTEM NAME) *
FROM:
MM/DD
HH:MM A.M. YYYY
TO:
MM/DD
HH:MM P.M. YYYY
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
*
INDIVIDUAL PORT STATISTICS
*
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
PORT
PORT
INCOMING
OUTGOING
SECONDS
NUMBER TYPE
COS
CALLS/FAX CALLS/FAX
BUSY
–––––– ––––
––––
––––––––
––––––––
–––––––
1
VOC
254
468
0
1242
2
VOC
254
1082
0
2571
.
16
VOC
254
1473
129
3972
17
FAX
150
0
0
0
SELFTEST
FAILED
––––––––
0
0
0
0
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
*
PORT GROUP STATISTICS
*
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
COS: 254
VOICE PORTS:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FAX PORTS:
NUMBER OF INCOMING CALLS:
NUMBER OF OUTGOING CALLS:
0
NUMBER OF INCOMING FAXES:
0
NUMBER OF OUTGOING FAXES:
0
NUMBER OF PORTS SIMULTANEOUSLY BUSY:
1 PORT FOR
10 SECONDS
COS: 150
VOICE PORTS:
FAX PORTS
16 17 18 19
NUMBER OF INCOMING CALLS:
NUMBER OF OUTGOING CALLS:
NUMBER OF INCOMING FAXES:
NUMBER OF OUTGOING FAXES:
0
0
0
0
NUMBER OF PORTS SIMULTANEOUSLY BUSY:
1 PORT FOR
0 SECONDS
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
*
ALL PORT STATISTICS
*
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TOTAL NUMBER OF INCOMING CALLS:
0
TOTAL NUMBER OF OUTGOING CALLS:
0
TOTAL NUMBER OF INCOMING FAXES:
0
TOTAL NUMBER OF OUTGOING FAXES:
0
SECONDS TOO MANY PORTS BUSY TO MAKE OUTCALLS:
SECONDS TOO MANY PORTS BUSY TO MAKE FAX DELIVERY:
3
0
NUMBER OF VOICE PORTS SIMULTANEOUSLY BUSY:
1 PORT FOR
23221 SECONDS
2 PORTS FOR
12823 SECONDS
NUMBER OF FAX PORTS SIMULTANEOUSLY BUSY:
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Reports
5-29
Individual Port Statistics
Information in this section includes the number of incoming and outgoing calls for each voice port and
fax channel, the number of seconds each port was busy, and the number of seconds each port was busy
because it failed selftest.
PORT NUMBER
The number associated with each port in the SLOTS Table.
PORT TYPE
Identifies whether the port is a voice port (VOC) or a fax channel (FAX).
COS
The Class of Service assigned to each port.
INCOMING CALLS/ FAXES
The number of incoming calls to each port for the period of time shown in
the header of the report. The number of incoming calls on a VOC port
includes both voice and fax calls received.
The number of incoming calls on a FAX port is the number of fax messages
received on that fax channel.
OUTGOING CALLS/ FAXES The number of outgoing calls made on each port. Includes on-site and
off-site message waiting, network messages sent, alarm calls, test network
and fax delivery calls.
The number of outgoing calls on a FAX port is the number of faxes
successfully printed on that fax channel.
NUMBER OF SECONDS
BUSY
Number of seconds the VOC port was not idle. The number of seconds fax
channel corresponding to the FAX port was allocated.
SELFTEST FAILED
The number of seconds the VOC port was out of service because selftest
failed. Selftest fails when an error occurs during diagnostics causing the
port to be taken out of service.
Port Group Statistics
Information in this section is grouped by COS. For each COS used in the SLOTS Table, there is a listing
of each port, by number, included in that COS, as well as a total of the number of incoming and outgoing
calls. Below that, there is an indication of how many ports are simultaneously busy for the listed number
of seconds.
PB60014–01
COS
The Class of Service of the port group.
VOICE PORTS
FAX PORTS
The number associated with each port extension having this COS in the
SLOTS Table.
NUMBER OF INCOMING
CALLS
The total number of calls to all VOC ports using this COS. Includes both
voice and fax calls received.
NUMBER OF OUTGOING
CALLS
The total number of calls from all VOC ports using this COS. Includes
on-site and off-site message waiting, network messages sent, alarm calls,
test network calls, and fax delivery calls.
NUMBER OF INCOMING
FAXES
The total number of fax messages received to all FAX ports using this COS.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-30
Installation and Maintenance Volume
NUMBER OF OUTGOING
FAXES
The total number of faxes successfully printed from all FAX ports using
this COS. Includes fax delivery for fax messages and fax-on-demand
requests.
NUMBER OF PORTS
SIMULTANEOUSLY BUSY
The number of ports using this COS that are busy at the same time and the
total number of seconds during the reporting period for which that number
of ports were busy.
All Port Statistics
Information in this section includes the total number of incoming and outgoing calls for the message
server, the number of seconds “n” ports were busy, the number of seconds message waiting could not call
because too many ports were busy, and the number of seconds a fax call could not be made because too
many fax channels were busy.
TOTAL NUMBER OF
INCOMING CALLS
The total number of all incoming calls to the message server for the period
of time shown in the header of the report.
TOTAL NUMBER OF
OUTGOING CALLS
The total number of all outgoing calls from the message server for the
period of time shown in the header of the report. This includes on-site and
off-site message waiting, network messages sent, alarm calls, test network
calls, and fax delivery calls.
TOTAL NUMBER OF
INCOMING FAXES
The total number of all faxes received for the period of time shown in the
header of the report.
TOTAL NUMBER OF
OUTGOING FAXES
The total number of all faxes printed for fax mail, fax overflow delivery
and fax-on-demand for the period of time shown in the header of the report.
SECONDS TOO MANY
PORTS BUSY TO MAKE
OUTCALLS
If all ports make outcalls — the total number of seconds 3/4 or more of the
ports were busy. If any ports do not allow outcall — the total seconds all
ports that do allow outcall were busy.
SECONDS TOO MANY
PORTS BUSY TO MAKE
FAX DELIVERY
Total number of seconds a FAX port was not available for fax delivery
outcall.
NUMBER OF VOICE PORTS The number of VOC ports that are busy at the same time and the total
SIMULTANEOUSLY BUSY
number of seconds during the reporting period for which that number of
VOC ports were busy.
NUMBER OF FAX PORTS
SIMULTANEOUSLY BUSY
The number of FAX ports that are busy at the same time and the total
number of seconds during the reporting period for which that number of
FAX ports were busy.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
To retain accuracy of the Port Statistics report, it is recommended
the report be listed and cleared before changing a port’s COS in the
UPDATE program, or changing the number of ports in System
Parameter 4 — PORTS USED. The System Performance and Port
Statistics reports are listed together in the CLEAR REPORT
command. Therefore, also list and clear the System Performance
report when listing and clearing the Port Statistics report.
PB60014–01
Reports
5.9
5-31
MAILBOX USAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE.
NETWORK TRAFFIC.
USER MESSAGE STATISTICS.
USER CALLING STATISTICS.
DISK USAGE.
PORT STATISTICS.
MAILBOX USAGE.
USER STATUS DETAIL.
INTEGRATION CALLING STATISTICS.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE BY COS.
The Mailbox Usage report contains information detailing individual mailbox usage. The report shows the
amount of time a port was used for each mailbox in the USER Table. The extension associated with each
mailbox is also listed. The usage time for each mailbox is measured in two ways: Logon Time and
Access Time.
Logon Time. Logon time is the amount of time a person is logged onto their mailbox. The
accumulated time is added to that mailbox’s logon time when the person exits their mailbox (by
entering or hanging up).
Access Time. Access time is the amount of time a caller listens to a greeting and/or leaves a
message. The accumulated time is added to that mailbox’s access time after the greeting plays or a
message is left.
This is an example of a Mailbox Usage report:
* MAILBOX USAGE SUMMARY *
MM/DD
HH:MM P.M.
YYYY
MAILBOX
EXTENSION
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
468
469
470
471
472
474
475
Page 1
LOGON
TIME (MIN)
ACCESS
TIME (MIN)
22
24
4
14
11
0
10
6
2
6
0
12
9
0
2
3
In some applications, it may be necessary to only collect timing information for certain ports. For
example — the amount of time a person is logged onto a mailbox over a WATS line should be charged
for, but the time logged on locally should not.
To provide this capability, COS Attribute 55 — DO NOT COLLECT MAILBOX TIMING
INFORMATION FOR THIS PORT, can be assigned to specific ports. Timing information is not collected
for calls made to ports with this attribute in their COS. (Attribute 55 has no effect if assigned to a mailbox.)
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-32
Installation and Maintenance Volume
5.10 USER STATUS DETAIL
'
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE.
NETWORK TRAFFIC.
USER MESSAGE STATISTICS.
USER CALLING STATISTICS.
DISK USAGE.
PORT STATISTICS.
MAILBOX USAGE.
USER STATUS DETAIL.
INTEGRATION CALLING STATISTICS.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE BY COS.
This report provides current status information on mailbox access and the time durations associated with
individual mailbox usage.
The following information is provided for each mailbox.
-
Mailbox Number
-
Name Recorded (Y/N)
-
Greeting ON (Y/N or EA for extended absence greeting ON)
-
Greeting Length (mmm:ss)
-
Last Logon (mm/dd/yy)
-
Oldest Message (mm/dd hh:mm)
-
Newest Message (mm/dd hh:mm)
-
Total Current Messages (up to 60)
-
Total Message Duration (mmm:ss)
An example of the User Status Detail report follows.
*USER STATUS DETAIL REPORT*
MM/DD
.
Octel Overture 200/300
HH:MM P.M.
YYYY
Page 1
NAME
MAILBOX REC? ON? LENGTH
LAST
LOG–ON
549
550
551
552
599
6/26
6/03
6/16
6/12
6/06
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
EA
Y
Y
0:07
1:02
0:33
0:18
0:13
10:03
13:11
19:19
10:59
9:03
<–––––––––––MESSAGES––––––––––>
OLDEST
NEWEST
TOTAL
DUR.
6/04 11:18
5/26 13:56
6/09 16:39
6/12 9:19
–––
6/26 10:03
6/13 12:08
6/16 16:39
6/18 10:49
–––
8
3
4
3
0
1:23
3:05
2:46
5:23
0:00
The User Status Detail report uses the same tables as the User Message Statistics and User Calling
Statistics reports. When one of these reports is cleared, the tables are cleared for all three reports.
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Reports
5-33
5.11 INTEGRATION CALLING STATISTICS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE.
NETWORK TRAFFIC.
USER MESSAGE STATISTICS.
USER CALLING STATISTICS.
DISK USAGE.
PORT STATISTICS.
MAILBOX USAGE.
USER STATUS DETAIL.
INTEGRATION CALLING STATISTICS.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE BY COS.
The Integration Calling Statistics Report lists information about the type of non-integrated or integrated
calls a mailbox received, as well as the number of calls to the mailbox that are abandoned.
* INTEGRATION CALLING STATISTICS *
MM/DD
MAILBOX
HH:MM P.M.
YYYY
Page 1
<––––––––––––––––––––––––INCOMING CALLS––––––––––––––––––––––––>
<––NON-INTEGRATED––>
<–––INTEGRATED–––> CALLS DATE
TOTAL
ANSWD
NOANS
BUSY
GREET
NOANS
BUSY ALL
ABAND CLEAR
The Integration Calling Statistics report provides the following information for calls directed to the listed
mailbox.
TOTAL
Total number of calls placed by the Octel Overture 200/300 to the mailbox.
ANSWD
Number of calls answered or transferred to ringing.
Non-Integrated Information
PB60014–01
NO ANSWD
Number of calls not answered.
BUSY
Number of calls placed to a busy extension.
GREET
Number of calls placed to the mailbox when
Greeting is ON.
Extension is unavailable or vacant.
Call is placed to an extension which forwards back to a CX/MX mode
port.
DID calls which were intercepted immediately.
Calls to Personal Assistance resulting in RNA or busy.
PBX integration calls which forward on the “all forward” condition.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-34
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Integrated Information
NO ANSWD
Number of calls not answered. Includes PBX integration calls that forward
on the ring-no-answer condition.
BUSY
Number of calls placed to a busy extension. Includes PBX integration calls
that forward on the busy condition.
ALL (FORWARD)
Number of integrated calls forwarded on the All Forward condition. This
also includes forwarded calls with no forward condition.
Calls Aband
Number of calls disconnected after reaching an unavailable extension
without leaving a message, calling another extension or calling the
operator.
Date Cleared
The date the statistics were last cleared.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Reports
5-35
5.12 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE BY COS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE.
NETWORK TRAFFIC.
USER MESSAGE STATISTICS.
USER CALLING STATISTICS.
DISK USAGE.
PORT STATISTICS.
MAILBOX USAGE.
USER STATUS DETAIL.
INTEGRATION CALLING STATISTICS.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE BY COS.
System Performance by COS report provides call and message statistics for ports/trunks by COS.
Example of a System Performance by COS report:
* SYSTEM PERFORMANCE BY COS FOR XXXXX
*
FROM: MM/DD HH:MM A.M.
YYYY
TO: MM/DD HH:MM P.M.
YYYY
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
PORT/TRUNK COS: XXX
CALLER’S INITIAL ACTION
DIALED EXTENSION OR DIGITS
6
INTEGRATION:
RNA FORWARD;
0
BUSY FORWARD;
0
ALL FORWARD:
0
DEFAULTED TO ASSISTANCE:
0
DIALED ”0” FOR ASSISTANCE:
0
PRESSED ”#” TO LOG–ON:
44
”*” TO MAKE A QUICK MESSAGE:
0
CALLER WAS A NETWORK UNIT:
0
CALLER WAS A DID/E&M UNIT:
0
OTHER:
0
TOTAL CALLS INTO SYSTEM:
52
CALLERS SUBSEQUENT ACTIONS
DIALED EXTENSION OR DIGITS:
10
DEFAULTED TO ASSISTANCE:
0
DIALED ”0” FOR ASSISTANCE:
1
LEFT A MESSAGE AT THE TONE:
0
PRESSED ”#” TO LOG–ON:
10
”*” TO MAKE A QUICK MESSAGE:
0
Caller’s Initial Action
This section displays callers’ initial actions upon reaching the port/trunk COS specified.
DIALED EXTENSION OR
DIGITS
PB60014–01
This can include
Number of times callers dialed a defined first digit from 1–8.
Number of times callers were sent directly to Next Mailbox without
dialing.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
5-36
Installation and Maintenance Volume
INTEGRATION
With Adaptive Integration, every time a call is forwarded to the Octel
Overture 200/300.
Number of times callers dialed an account code.
Number of times callers dialed extensions or digits to call out on the
network.
Number of integrated calls that forwarded in.
RNA FORWARD
Number of calls placed that were not answered.
BUSY FORWARD
Number of calls placed to a busy extension.
ALL FORWARD
Number of calls placed to an All Forwarded condition.
DEFAULTED TO
ASSISTANCE
Number of times callers did nothing (e.g., rotary dial) and were transferred
to attendant or intercept position.
DIALED FOR
ASSISTANCE
Number of times callers pressed
intercept position.
LEFT A MESSAGE
AT THE TONE
Number of times callers left a message as an initial action. This also
includes instances where Next Mailbox gives the caller a greeting and takes
a message without the caller entering any digits.
PRESSED
TO LOG ON
Number of times callers pressed
and unsuccessful logons).
TO MAKE A
QUICK MESSAGE
Number of times callers pressed to make a Quick Message.
CALLER WAS A
NETWORK UNIT
Number of times caller identified itself as a Network system. That is, the
call was from another network location.
CALLER WAS A
DID/E&M UNIT
Number of times caller identified itself as a DID/E&M system. That is, the
call was intercepted by the Octel Overture 200/300DID/E&M Interface.
OTHER
Miscellaneous category including
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
and were transferred to attendant or
to enter a mailbox (includes successful
Caller dialed
.
Port called a CX port (extension forwarded to the Octel Overture
200/300).
Caller dialed invalid first digit (e.g.,
Caller disconnected (detected hang-up events or from DID Interface).
Caller has not taken initial action.
).
PB60014–01
Reports
TOTAL CALLS
INTO SYSTEM
5-37
With Adaptive Integration
Direct call into the Octel Overture 200/300 where caller hangs up
or dials .
Direct internal call into the Octel Overture 200/300 where caller
accesses Quick Greeting Activation.
Numbers within the Other category may fluctuate as new calls
come in and as current callers make an initial action.
Total calls answered by the Octel Overture 200/300.
If the System Performance report or traffic pegs were last cleared
while calls were in progress, this value may be larger than peg 1.
However, the value printed in the System Performance report always
reflects the correct value.
Subsequent Actions
After completing their initial action (i.e., the caller left a message at the tone), another action is taken.
Subsequent actions are described below.
DIALED EXTENSION OR
DIGITS
SENT TO
ASSISTANCE
PB60014–01
This can include
Number of times callers dialed a defined first digit from 1–8.
Number of times callers went to Next Mailbox.
Number of times callers dialed an extension or digit to stay in queue.
This can include
Number of times callers were transferred to attendant or intercept
position after dialing too many invalid extensions.
Number of callers that remain on the line for assistance, whether or not
a message was left, with Adaptive Integration, when System Parameter
77 — PBX PROVIDES MOMENTARY DISCONNECT, is set to YES.
Calls intercepted by DID or E&M Interface Modules which defaulted
to assistance, whether or not a message was left.
Number of network calls sent to assistance.
Autotransfer to assistance (includes Personal Assistant).
DIALED FOR
ASSISTANCE
Number of times callers pressed and were transferred to the
attendant/intercept position or Personal Assistant.
LEFT A MESSAGE
AT THE TONE
Number of times callers left a message after busy/no answer/greeting.
PRESSED
TO LOG ON
Number of times callers pressed
and unsuccessful logons).
PRESSED TO MAKE A
QUICK MESSAGE
Number of times callers pressed to make a Quick Message.
to enter a mailbox (includes successful
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
PB60014–01
Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
System Service Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Miscellaneous Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Mailbox Configuration Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Message Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Network Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Port Configuration Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Port Mapping Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Floppy-Disk-Drive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Hard-Disk-Drive Diagnostics (DEX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Disk Information Status (L DMAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Line-Interface-Card Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Update Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Port Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Alarm Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
System Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
List Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Application Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
How Tones Are Recognized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
How To Modify Application Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Modifiable Application-Delay Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Using UPDATE to Modify Application Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Message Block and Message Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Marking a Message Unplayable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
MPURGE Command Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS
Figures
6-1
6-2
6-3
Alarm Test Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Sequence Used by the Octel Overture 200/300 To Screen Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Ring/No Answer Tone-Timing Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Tables
6-1
6-2
6-3
FINDMBOX Messages and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Abbreviations for Channel/Port State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Application Delays for Cadence Recognition, for Determining Tone On/Tone Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Section
Subject
Command
Call
Processing
Trace
List Trace
L T
Trace for specific activity, selecting from the menu
shown.
Diagnostics
Reports
C R
Gives a menu for the type of report to clear.
Hard Disk Drive
DEX x y
Reads all disk sectors.
x = disk number;
y = region number.
Disk Drive
DSKMAP
Displays the last known status of all drives as
recorded by the VCU. DSKMAP can be run from
the hard disk or from the software diskette.
Disk Drive
DSKTST
Tests the drive slot specified, updates the last
known status record of the VCU, and displays the
status.
Mailbox Location
FINDMBOX
Searches for a mailbox in the local USER Table,
local Network Name Table, and in the Uniform
numbering Plan Domain. The command then prints
a status message of the results of each search.
LAN Status
LANSTAT
For Digital Networking, gives basic information
about the current status of the LAN, including
whether the LAN is UP or DOWN and the state of
the high-speed links.
CMD x PING y
For Digital Networking, performs the lowest-level
“echo” test from the LAN card at the local end to
the destination cabinet.
x = slot number in which the LAN card is installed
y = IP address of device to which text Ethernet
packet is sent
LAN Channel Status
PB60014–01
LCSTAT
For Digital Networking, displays the status of LAN
channels. The status of all LAN channels, a
specific LAN channel, or a range can be specified.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Section
Subject
Command
Diagnostics
(continued)
List Features
L F
Lists the features, the number of ports, mailboxes,
and storage hours the system is equipped with.
Message Status
L HE x
Lists the status of a message.
x = message number.
Mailbox
Configuration
L M x
Lists the current configuration for a mailbox.
x = mailbox number.
Mailbox
Configuration
L M x M
Lists information about messages for a specific
mailbox. x = mailbox number; M is a required
extension (the letter M, not an argument) of the
command.
Network Mailbox
Status
L NET x
Displays message information for a network
location.
x = network location code.
Messages Pending
for Domain
Locations
L NET D [x]
Lists messages pending transfer to the domain in
general or specific domain locations. Messages that
are pending response to LAN queries are also
listed.
x = is the domain location (optional)
Personal Distribution
List
L PDL
Lists the number of personal distribution list (PDL)
sectors currently used.
Port Configuration
L PO x
Displays information about a port.
x = port number.
Reports
L R
Gives a menu for the type of report to list.
Integrations
APIC or NPIC
All other integrations
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
SDBUG xx 1 FF
yy
SDBG xx yy zz
Integration trace information is logged to the
message server’s call-processing trace log file.
where xx is the slot number and yy is either 7F to
turn on debug or 00 to turn off.
where xx is the slot number, yy is the unit number
and zz is either 7F to turn on debug or 00 to turn
off.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Section
Diagnostics
(continued)
Subject
Command
Port Mapping Status
PRTMAP
Displays information about the allocation of system
port numbers to ports configured in each slot.
Tone and DTMF
PRT x
Monitors and prints the tone and DTMF events
received for the port specified. To exit the monitor
mode, press .
x = port number.
Port Status
PS x
Displays current state of the ports.
x = non-zero for continuous (optional)
LAN Status
T DNET
For Digital Networking, to get a quick indication of
the general “health” of the configuration and
hardware at the local and remote cabinets.
SNMP Manager
System
T SNMP
Tests the mechanism for an Octel Overture 200/300
to communicate to an SNMP manager system.
Alarm Test
TE A
Attempts to call number defined for alarm call.
System Forwarding
CD x y z
Forwards all ports specified. Uses string from
System Parameter 45 — SYSTEM RELOAD
FORWARD STRING.
x = slot number
y = port number or first port in a range of ports
z = port number of the last port in a range of ports
TE C 1 y z
Floppy Disk Drive
TE F 1
Isolates faults to the diskette, disk drive, or disk
controller.
System Initialization
CU x y z
Initializes and cancels forwarding for all ports
specified. Sends initialization string from System
Parameter 33 — PBX INITIALIZE CODE, then
cancels forward string from System Parameter 46
— SYSTEM RELOAD CANCEL-FORWARD STRING.
x = slot number
y = port number or first port in a range of ports
z = port number of the last port in a range of ports
or
TE C 2 y z
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Section
Subject
Command
Integration Card
TE INT x y
Tells the integration card to run its link selftest.
Used only for systems with integration cards.
x = slot number
y = unit number.
LIC
TE L 1
Checks tone generation and detection circuitry.
TE L 2
Ring-through test. Use only when no traffic on
system.
TE L 4 x
Test to see whether loop current is present on a
specific port.
x = port number.
TE L 5 x
Tone reflection test on one port.
x = port number.
Network Routes
TE NET x y
Tests network routes to a network location.
x = network location code (optional);
y = non-zero show digits entered.
System Status
TE S
Checks voltages and temperatures.
Fax Application
Processor
TE X x y z
Fax loopback test. Verifies that the fax modems on
the Fax Application Processor can send and receive
fax data and that the TDM bus connection is
correct.
x = slot number
y and z = fax channels
Data Fields
BITTST x
Converts hardware error data fields into bit sets.
x = hexadecimal number.
List Hardware Error
Table
L H
Lists the Hardware Error Table.
Clear Hardware
Error Table
C H
Clears the Hardware Error Table.
Diagnostics
(continued)
Hardware
Errors
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Section
Subject
Command
Integration
Integration Unit
CD x y
Takes the integration unit out of service.
x = slot number
y = unit number
CU x y
Brings the integration unit into service.
x = slot number
y = unit number
Integration Unit
ISTAT x y
Gives the current status of an integration unit.
x = slot number
y = unit number
Integration Board
L INT x y
Lists the current state of the integration board, the
diagnostic status, and the status of the links, and
the pegs.
x = slot number
y = unit number.
Incoming Call
Records
MON2
Used to monitor incoming call records over the
RS-232C link (port 2). To exit the monitor mode,
press .
MON2 H
Show call record data in hexadecimal values as it is
sent by the PBX.
MWL RELITE
Send commands to relight each message waiting
lamp that the Octel Overture 200/300 has marked
as ON.
MWL RECALC
Examines each mailbox to determine whether its
message waiting lamp should be ON or OFF.
MWOFF x
Turns OFF lamp message waiting.
x = mailbox number. The maximum number of
digits is eight. For ALL, enter A.
L RT 1
List round trip time for message waiting.
C RT 1
Clears round trip time for message waiting.
Integration
(continued)
Message Waiting
Lamps
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Subject
Command
Integration Cards
UPINTG
Restarts the integration cards and therefore disrupts
call processing for approximately one to two
minutes.
Integration Board
C I x y
Clears the integration board pegs.
x = slot number
y = unit number
Traffic Pegs
Traffic Peg Count
Table
L P
Lists the pegs.
C P
Clears the pegs.
Miscellaneous
Baud Rate
BAUD
Displays the current baud rate setting. The
available baud rates are 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, and 19200.
LAN Card
CD x
For Digital Networking, removes the LAN card
from service.
CU x
For Digital Networking, returns the LAN card to
service.
x = slot number
Automatic Message
Purge
APURGE x y z
Starts the message purge function if Automatic
Message Purge is not already in progress. Displays
the thresholds specified and asks for confirmation
before initiating the message purge function.
x = save threshold
y = new threshold
z = Net Name
Automatic Message
Purge
CPURGE
Cancels message purge if it is in progress,
regardless of whether it was initiated automatically
or by the APURGE command. Asks for
confirmation before cancelling message purge.
Message Purge
MBLOCK x y
Blocks a message from being played. It prevents a
mailbox holder from starting to play, or replay, the
message after it is blocked.
x = message header number
y = indicates that the message is to be blocked.
Section
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Section
Subject
Miscellaneous
(continued)
Command
MPURGE x
Deletes the message from every mailbox the
message was sent to on the message server except
for messages that were forwarded or sent over the
network.
x = message header number
Back up and Restore
FLOPPY
Used to back up and restore greetings, names,
scripted and sequential messages, and personal
distribution list names. Also used to load system
prompts.
Allowable
Commands
HELP
Displays the allowable commands for the password
level of operation currently logged in to.
System
Configuration
INSTA
Command to enter the system configuration
program INSTALL. This program consists of a
series of questions that define the system database.
Call Detail Record,
Call Processing and
Moves, Adds,
Changes Trace
LOG
Used to collect detailed information about specific
events for Call Processing Trace activities Call
Detail Record log activities, and Moves, Adds,
Changes log activities..
Internal Modem
MOD DISABLE
Blocks access to the Octel Overture 200/300 via
the internal modem.
MOD ENABLE
Restores access to the Octel Overture 200/300 via
the internal modem.
PASS x y
Sets the password.
x = password level
y = new password.
Password
There are three password levels. Each password
may be a maximum of eight alphanumeric
characters, 0–9 and A–Z. All alpha characters must
be in capital letters.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
Section
Subject
Command
Miscellaneous
(continued)
Patch Status
PAT STAT
This command shows the status of all patches
currently applied on the message server, the patch
number, the date the patch was applied and the
target(s).
Restart
RESTA
Restarts the CPU. All active ports are dropped, and
the modem is dropped. The maintenance level
password must be entered before restart begins.
Restart
RESTA 2
Restarts the CPU. Reloads software from the hard
disk. All active ports are dropped, and the modem
is dropped.
Time
TIME
Displays the current system date and time. Used
only at the @ prompt.
Network Failures
L NF
Lists Protocol 2 or Protocol 4 failures.
Refer to the Networking volume — REMOTE
ANALOG NETWORKING chapter for details.
List Drive Map
L DMAP
S3.0 Provides disk information report on the
physical characteristic of the disk drive.
VCU
VCU
S3.0 Connects to the VCU. It provides detailed
drive status, drive configuration, message header
information on installed hardware. In addition,
from this command you can enter the L DMAP
command to get more details.
Write Protect Drive
WPDISK
S3.0 This command write protects a disk drive to
prevent any new messages from being created on
that drive.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6.1
6-1
COMMAND SUMMARY
Maintenance commands for the Octel Overture200/300 message server are entered from the @ prompt.
In this chapter, the maintenance commands are divided into five command types:
List commands
Clear commands
Test commands
System service mode commands
Miscellaneous commands
The basic command input is listed in BOLD letters, in the left column. The complete command name is in
bold in the right column. In some instances, a modifier and extension might be required to complete the
command string. You must press following all command strings before the message server
executes the command.
The message server indicates that it is ready to receive information by displaying the @ prompt. For
example, to list the Hardware Error Table, at the @ prompt, type
L H
List Commands
Use a LIST command to display maintenance tables, such as the Hardware Error Table or Traffic Peg
Count Table, features, and mailbox information. A space is always required between the L (for LIST)
and the letter following. At the @ prompt type
L [name]
Command
Basic Definition
L CCM
Displays the current message server utilization for the Client Controlled
Message pool (CCM). This command is used for OctelAccess application
development.
L C
Used for OctelAccess troubleshooting. Lists the client error log that shows
errors that are caused by invalid client requests. The error log contains all
relevant information required to isolate the source of the error.
L F
LIST FEATURES
Prints the optional packages installed on the Octel Overture 200/300. Lists
the maximum number of ports, drives, SCHEDULE Table entries, and
mailboxes.
L H
LIST HARDWARE
Lists the Hardware Error Table.
L HE x
LIST HEADER
Lists the status of a message, where x is the message number.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-2
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Command
Basic Definition
L INT x y
LIST INTEGRATION STATUS
Lists the current state of the integration board, the diagnostic status, the
status of the links, and the pegs, where x is the slot number, and y is the unit
number.
L M x
This command is not used for DPNSS integration.
LIST MAILBOX
Lists the current configuration of the mailbox specified, where x is the
mailbox number.
L M x M
LIST MAILBOX MESSAGES
Lists information about messages for a specific mailbox, where x
is the mailbox number.
L NET x
LIST NETWORK MAILBOX
Lists messages pending in analog and digital domain network mailboxes
waiting to be sent to the specified network location, where x is the network
location code. Beginning with S3.0, the information listed with this
command includes the current network delivery schedule(s).
L NET D [x]
LIST NETWORK DOMAIN [LOCATION]
Lists messages pending transfer to the domain in general or specific domain
locations, where x is the the domain location (optional). Messages that are
pending response to LAN queries are also listed.
L NF
LIST NETWORK FAILURES
Lists the Network Failure Table, which contains Protocol 2, Protocol 4,
Protocol 5, and digital-network errors. The table entries identify the date and
time and the system port on which each error occurred. Additional
information about each error type is reported in the DATA1 – DATA4
columns. Refer to the Networking volume, Remote Analog Networking and
Digital Networking chapters.
L P
LIST PEG
Lists the Traffic Peg Count Table.
L PDL
LIST PERSONAL DISTRIBUTION LISTS
Lists the number of personal distribution list (PDL) sectors currently used.
L PO x
LIST PORT
Lists the current configuration status for the port number specified, where x
is the port number.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
Command
Basic Definition
L R
LIST REPORT
6-3
Prints a menu for the type of report to list, as follows:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L R x
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
System Performance
Network Traffic
User Message Statistics
User Calling Statistics
Disk Usage
Port Statistics
Mailbox Usage
User Status Detail
Integration Calling Statistics
System Performance by COS
LIST REPORT NUMBER
Lists the report number specified without printing the menu, where x is the
report number.
L RT 1
LIST ROUND TRIP TIME
Lists the round trip time for message waiting.
For integration, this command lists the following, by link:
L T
Number of mailbox holders assigned
Longest message waiting round trip time
Total number of ON commands in the trip listed
Total number of OFF commands in the trip listed
Current round-trip start-time
Number of ON commands
Number of OFF commands
LIST TRACE
Prints a menu for type of trace to list, as follows:
1=
2=
3=
4=
5=
6=
7=
L VM
All Activities
Mailbox Activity
Port Activity
Location Activity
Message Activity
Integration Activity
APlink Activity
LIST VISUAL MAILBOX USERS
Lists the total number of configured Visual Mailbox users and the total
number of purchased Visual Mailbox licenses.
Clear Commands
Use the CLEAR command to clear maintenance tables and reset all data to zero. A space is always
required between the C (for CLEAR) and the letter following. At the @ prompt, type
C [name]
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-4
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Command
Basic Definition
C H
CLEAR HARDWARE
Clears the Hardware Error Table. Also opens the alarm relay, and turns OFF the
alarm LED.
C I x y
CLEAR INTEGRATION
Clears the integration pegs, where x is the slot number and y is the unit number.
C P
CLEAR PEG
Clears the Traffic Peg Count Table and the System Performance report.
C NF
CLEAR NETWORK FAILURES
Clears the Network Failure Table, which contains Protocol 2, Protocol 4, Protocol
5, and digital-network errors.
C R
CLEAR REPORT
Gives a menu as follows, for the type of report to clear.
1.
2.
3.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (IN TRAFFIC PEGS) AND PORT STATISTICS.
NETWORK TRAFFIC.
USER MESSAGE, USER CALLING AND MAILBOX USAGE.
SELECT REPORT TO BE CLEARED. (1 – 3, EMPTY LINE = EXIT).
C RT 1
CLEAR ROUND TRIP
Clears the round-trip time for message waiting.
Test Commands
The following commands test the status of the LAN card connection, alarm callout, forwarding string,
initializing string, floppy diskette, hard disk, line card, network location, and message server. At the @
prompt, type TEST or TE, followed by the name of the function to be tested. For example, to test the
alarm, at the @ prompt, type
TE A
A space is always required between the TE (for TEST) and the following letter.
Command
Basic Definition
CMD x PING y
For Digital Networking, performs the lowest-level “echo” test from the LAN
card at the local end to the destination server. This is the best tool to use to
identify whether there is end-to-end connectivity across the digital network
between two Octel Overture message servers. It is especially useful to verify that
IP addresses are correctly configured. In the command, x is the slot number in
which the LAN card is installed, and y is the IP address of the device to which
the test Ethernet packet is sent.
TE A
TEST ALARM
Tests the alarm call out feature. Places a call to the number specified in the
SYSTEM PARAMETER Table — System Parameter 31.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
Command
Basic Definition
TE C 1 x y
TEST CHANNEL 1
6-5
You can use either the TE C 1 command or the CD command to forward ports.
Refer to the System Service Mode Commands, Courtesy Up/Courtesy Down,
section. In the command, x is the port number or first port in a range of ports
(optional), and y is the port number of the last port in a range of ports (optional).
TE C 2 x y
TEST CHANNEL 2
You can use either the TE C 2 command or the CD command to cancel
forwarded ports. Refer to the System Service Mode Commands, Courtesy
Up/Courtesy Down, section. In the command, x is the port number or first port
in a range of ports (optional), and y is the port number of the last port in a range
of ports (optional).
TE F 1
TEST FLOPPY 1
Reads each sector on the floppy diskette and reports any errors detected. This
test does not verify data on the diskette for accuracy.
TE L 1
TEST LINE 1
Tests the tone reflection. Ports that fail are left in a test state.
TE L 2
This command is not used for DPNSS integration.
TEST LINE 2
Tests ring-through capability of all the ports.
TE L 4 x
TEST LINE 4
Tests to see whether loop current is present on a specific port, where x is
the port number. The port number must be entered in decimals.
TE L 5 x
This command is not used for DPNSS integration.
TEST LINE 5
Tests tone reflection on one port, where x is the port number.
TE NET x y
TEST NETWORK
Tests network routes to a network location, where x is the network location code
(optional), and y is the non-zero show digits entered. Tests all locations if no
network location is specified.
TE S
TEST STATUS
Tests the temperatures and voltages for the Octel Overture 200/300.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-6
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Command
Basic Definition
TE INT x y
TEST INTEGRATION
Tells the integration card to run a link self-test, where x is the slot number, and
y is the unit number. Used only for message servers with integration cards.
T DNET
This command is not used for DPNSS integration.
TEST DNET
Use this command for Digital Networking, to get a quick indication of the
general “health” of the configuration and hardware at the local and remote
cabinets.
TE X x y z
TEST FAX
Perform a loopback test on the specified fax channels to verify that the fax
modems can send and receive fax data and to test the TDM bus connection.
Fax-modem data is sent across the Octel Overture 200/300’s TDM bus, using
one of the fax channels as a sender and the other as a receiver. When this
transaction is completed, the fax application processor reverses the direction of
the data flow and repeats the transaction. In this command, x is the slot number,
y is the fax channel, and z is the fax channel. Refer to the Feature Description
volume, Fax Mail Plus chapter.
T SNMP
TEST SNMP
An Octel Overture 200/300 can inform an SNMP manager system when a
qualified hardware error is logged. This command tests the mechanism for an
Octel Overture 200/300 to communicate to an SNMP manager system.
DEX x y
Disk EXerciser
Tests all hard disk sectors for read errors, where x is the disk number, and y is
the region number.
System Service Mode Commands
Use the Courtesy Down command, CD, to remove from service ports, fax cards, LAN cards, or
integration units or to disable the functionality of the Gateway Link feature. Use the Courtesy Up
command, CU, to return them to service.
Use the Shutdown command before LAN Backup and Restore procedures to put the message server in an
off–line mode without physically restarting or reloading the server. Like Courtesy Down, Shutdown
removes ports, fax cards, and integration units from service, and disables digital and analog networking.
However, unlike Courtesy Down, Shutdown does not disable the LAN card.
Use the Startup command after a LAN Backup or Restore to bring the message server back online,
removing port forwarding, enabling fax cards, integration units, and analog and digital network
messaging activity.
Octel Overture 200/300
Shutdown is required before restoring prompts and system configuration files. It is recommended
that Shutdown be used before all LAN Restore procedures to prevent callers and mailbox holders
from accessing the server during restore sessions. Such server activity could disrupt the restore
procedure. For LAN Backup, if there is any possibility that voice messages being backed up could
change during the procedure, the server should be in Shutdown mode.
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
Command
Basic Definition
CD x y z
COURTESY DOWN
6-7
Use the Courtesy Down command with modifiers to remove the following from
service:
Port or ports
Integration units
Fax cards
LAN cards
CD
CD
CD
CD
x y z
x y
x
x
For this command, x is the slot number, y is the relative port, or first port in a
range or relative unit number, and z is the port number of last port in range of
ports (optional).
Port or ports – CD x y z
When you use the CD command to specify ports, the Octel Overture 200/300
forwards the ports specified. If no port is specified, the Octel Overture 200/300
tries to forward all ports. If a port is successfully forwarded, it is left in a
forwarded (FWD) state. If a port fails to complete the forward string, it is left in
the no-dial-tone (NDT) state. The Octel Overture 200/300 continues to try to
forward all ports specified until successful or until you press .
You can also use the command TE C 1 y z to forward all ports.
CU x y z
COURTESY UP
Use the Courtesy Up command with modifiers to return the following to service:
Port or ports
Integration units
Fax cards
LAN cards
CU
CU
CU
CU
x y z
x y
x
x
In this command, x is the slot number, y is the relative port, or first port in a
range or relative unit number, and z is the port number of last port in range of
ports (optional).
Port or ports – CU x y z
When you use the CU command to specify ports, the Octel Overture 200/300 tries
to initialize and cancels forwarding for the ports specified. If no port is specified,
the message server tries to initialize and cancels forwarding for all ports. If a port
successfully initializes and cancels forwarding, it goes to the idle (IDL) state. If a
port fails to complete either the initialization or cancel forward string, it is left in
the no-dial-tone (NDT) state.
PB60014–01
You can also use the command TE C 2 y z to cancel forwarding of
ports.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-8
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Command
Basic Definition
The following commands also can be used.
CDFAX x y
COURTESY DOWN FAX
Removes the fax channel from service.
CUFAX x y
COURTESY UP FAX
Returns the fax channel to service.
CDINTG x y
COURTESY DOWN INTEGRATION UNIT
Remove the integration unit from service.
CUINTG x y
COURTESY UP INTEGRATION UNIT
Returns the integration unit to service.
CDGWL [f]
COURTESY DOWN GATEWAY LINK
Removes the OctelAccess server link (gateway) from service. All new requests
from a remote OctelAccess server are rejected, and all current requests in
progress are finished before communication with the OctelAccess server is
stopped. A progress message is displayed. This command is also used to
re-initialize the OctelAccess link to recover from serious unexpected error
conditions. This courtesy down state is maintained across a reload and restart.
Only the CUGWL command can clear this state.
f = Type f to force the OctelAccess Server link to shutdown immediately
without waiting for in-progress requests or sessions to finish. (optional)
CUGWL
COURTESY UP GATEWAY LINK
Returns the OctelAccess linkn (gateway) to service.
The following commands are required before restoring prompts and system
configuration files and are recommended for all LAN Restore procedures. These
commands should also be used for backup procedures when information being
backed up could change as the procedure is being run.
SHUTDOWN
SHUTDOWN
Use this command to put the message server in an off–line mode, removing ports,
fax cards, and integration units from service, and disabling digital and analog
networking, but without physically restarting or reloading the system or disabling
the LAN card.
⇒ Important:
STARTUP
Whenever the SHUTDOWN command is used to put the server in an
off–line mode, the STARTUP command must be used to bring the
server back online. Even when the server is rebooted after a
SHUTDOWN command, it is still necessary to issue the STARTUP
command to initialize fax cards and the LAN card.
STARTUP
Use this command to bring the message server back online, removing port
forwarding, enabling fax cards, integration units, and analog and digital network
messaging activity.
Miscellaneous Commands
Use these miscellaneous commands as described in the following:
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
Command
Basic Definition
APURGE x y z
Starts the message purge function, if Automatic Message Purge is not already in
process. This command allows you to specify purge thresholds, with the same
restrictions enforced by UPDATE for the message server and CSTAT parameters.
Before initiating the message-purge function, this command displays the
thresholds specified and asks for confirmation. In this command, x is the save
threshold, y is the new threshold, and z is the Net Name.
BAUD
Displays the current baud rate setting of the Octel Overture 200/300. To change
the baud rate, enter BAUD at the @ prompt, followed by the desired baud rate.
Then change the terminal’s baud rate, and press Enter when prompted. The
available baud rates are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200.
BITTST x
Converts hardware errors data fields into bit sets, where x is the hexadecimal
number. Refer to the System Errors and Traffic Pegs chapter, Hardware Errors
section, in this volume.
CPURGE x y
Cancels message purge if it is in process, regardless of whether it was initiated
automatically or by the APURGE command. Asks for confirmation before
canceling message purge. In this command, x is the slot number, and y is the unit
number.
DCSTAT [x]
DCSTAT
6-9
For Digital Networking, this command displays the status of the digital
networking channels. You can specify the status of all digital networking
channels, a specific channel, or a range.
PB60014–01
DEX x y
Reads all disk sectors. Tests each of the specified regions separately, starting with
the lowest-numbered region. Up to six drives are tested. Refer to the
Hard-Disk-Drive Diagnostics (DEX) section in this chapter. In this command, x
is the disk to test, and y is the region to test.
DSKMAP
Displays the last known status of all drives as recorded by the VCU. You can run
DSKMAP from the hard disk or from the software diskette.
DSKTST
Tests the drive slot specified, updates the last known status record of the VCU,
and displays the status. You can run DSKTST from the hard disk or from the
software diskette.
EXPORTNAMES
Creates and manually initiate the Names Directory export file that includes
all names directory information. This file is automatically exported to the
OctelAccess server.
FINDMBOX
For Digital Networking, to ensure that a mailbox number is unique in a domain,
searches for a mailbox in the local USER Table, local Network Name Table, and
in the uniform numbering plan domain. The command then prints a status
message of the results of each search.
FLOPPY
Used to back up and restore greetings, names, scripted and sequential messages,
and personal distribution list names. Also used to load message server prompts.
Refer to the Procedures chapter, Greeting Backup/Restore section, in this volume.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-10
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Command
Basic Definition
GWLSTAT
This command is used as a diagnostic tool to review the current status of the
OctelAccess server link, to determine
Whether the OctelAccess server is up or down and if it is down, why is it
down
Last time the OctelAccess server was initialized
Number of open sessions
Statistics about the number of sessions, new calls pending and number of
gateways established.
HELP
Displays the allowable commands for the password level of operation currently
logged in to.
INSTA
INSTALL
Use this command to enter the message-server configuration program, INSTALL.
This program consists of a series of questions that define the Octel Overture
200/300 database. Answers to questions can be selected from a list, a default
value, or created by the installer.
The required INSTALL command must be a minimum of five letters. After you
have completed the initial INSTALL program, you must enter a
maintenance-level password before the INSTALL program begins.
ISTAT x y
Gives the current status of an integration unit, where x is the slot number, and y
is the unit number.
L DMAP
Provides information regarding each drive in the system, including the logical
and physical state of the disk, the vendor, the physical and logical size of the
disk, and the disk key, for example, non-COD or COD. This command can only
be issued after a connection has been made to the VCU. Beginning with S3.0.
LANG
Displays the languages installed. When a language is selected, this command lists
the settings for the language. These settings can be modified; however, some
settings require a special set of prompts. The settings that can be modified are as
follows:
SPECIAL TRANSLATE
When Japanese and Korean language prompts are used, you can modify this
option to specify either Japanese or Korean. This is required, so that various
counting and grammar phrases are spoken correctly.
CLOCK FORMAT
This option is modified to specify whether the message server is configured for
12-hour, or 24-hour clock, or whether the change from a.m. to p.m. occurs at 1:00
for the 12-hour clock mode.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
Command
6-11
Basic Definition
SPEAK DATE BEFORE TIME
You can modify this option to YES, to cause the server to speak the date before
speaking the time. For example, “April fifth at 5:00 p.m.”
SPEAK DAY BEFORE MONTH
You can modify this option to YES, to cause the server to speak the day before
speaking the month. For example, “Fifth of April.”
SPEAK NAME BEFORE “ONE MESSAGE WAITING” PHRASE
You can modify this option to YES, to cause the server to speak the name of the
message recipient before the prompt “there is one new message for . . . ”
SPEAK NAME BEFORE “MULTI MESSAGE WAITING” PHRASE
You can modify this option to YES, to cause the server to speak the name of the
message recipient before the prompt “there are two new messages for . . . ”
SPEAK NAME BEFORE “CALL FOR” PHRASE
You can modify this option to YES, to cause the server to speak the name of the
message recipient before an incoming call is announced.
SPEAK YEAR AS A NUMBER
You can modify this option to YES, to cause the server to speak the year as a
number. For example, 1997 is spoken as “One thousand, nine hundred, ninety
seven.”
S3.0, this option has been removed.
SPEAK “THOUSAND” WHEN YEAR IS 1XXX
You can modify this option to YES, to cause the server to speak the year without
the first-digit quantity. For example, 1997 is spoken as “Thousand, nine hundred,
ninety seven.”
S3.0, this option has been removed.
SPEAK SPECIAL PHRASE WHEN YEAR IS X100
You can modify this option to YES if the last two digits for years ending in even
hundreds should not be spoken. For example, the year 2100 is spoken as “Two
thousand, one hundred.”
S3.0, this option has been removed.
LANSTAT
LANSTAT
This command gives basic information about the current status of the LAN,
including whether the LAN is UP or DOWN, and the state of the high-speed
links.
LOG x y
PB60014–01
Use this command to collect information about specific events for Call
Processing Trace (CPT) activities, Call Detail Record (CDR) log activities,
Moves, Adds and Changes (MAC) log activities and Server Activity Trace (SAT)
log activities. This command displays the collected data according to specific
filters that can limit the time interval and the type of log defined. In this
command, x is the specific filter for data collected in the logs, and y is the log to
be traced. For details, refer to the Log Commands chapter in this volume.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-12
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Command
MOD DISABLE
Basic Definition
MODEM DISABLE
Use this command to block access to the Octel Overture 200/300 through the
internal modem. When the modem is disabled, if a logon is attempted by
pressing , a caller receives the error message “That command is not
allowed.”
MOD ENABLE
MODEM ENABLE
Use this command to restore access to the Octel Overture 200/300 through the
internal modem.
MON2
MONITOR TERMINAL #2
Use this option to monitor incoming call records over the RS-232C link (port 2).
To exit the monitor mode, press
.
MON2 H
Use this command to display call record data in hexadecimal format as it is sent
by the PBX.
MWL RECALC
Use this command in certain integrations where the PBX lights lamps through a
computer (for example, AT&T System 85), when the computer has been out of
service. Examines each mailbox to determine whether its message-waiting lamp
should be turned ON or OFF.
MWOFF x
Use this command to turn OFF lamp message waiting that the message-server
link turned ON. This does not turn off the HASMSG flag that marks the message
as newly received. In this command, x is the mailbox number (up to eight digits).
For All, enter A.
MWL RELITE
This command is used in certain integrations, when the PBX has been restarted.
Use this command to turns ON all message-waiting lamps that were ON before
the PBX was restarted. The server checks the HASMSG flag. If it is still set, the
lamp is relit.
NAMESTAT
NAMESTAT
Use this command to print the status of the Dial-by-Name directory (Names
Directory). This command provides overall figures for Dial-by-Name; that is, the
number of local names stored and the number of network names stored.
PASS x y
PASSWORD
The Octel Overture 200/300 has three password levels. Each password can be a
maximum of eight alphanumeric characters, 0–9 and A–Z. Refer to the
Configuration volume, Understanding Configuration, Security Protection
Procedures and Guidelines section.
In this command, x is the password level, and y is the new password.
Default passwords are created by the manufacturer. These passwords should be
changed immediately. The following describes the three password levels:
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
Command
6-13
Basic Definition
MAINTENANCE
This level allows full access to message-server diagnostics, error information,
and the INSTALL and UPDATE programs. A default password, MAINT, is set by
the manufacturer.
ADMINISTRATIVE
This level allows entrance to the UPDATE program. It also allows you to use the
LIST and CLEAR commands for the Hardware Error Table, Traffic Peg Count
Table, and all reports. A default password, ADMIN, is set by the manufacturer.
REPORT
This level allows you to use the LIST and CLEAR commands for the Hardware
Error Table, Traffic Peg Count Table, and all reports, and the DEV command for
DID/E&M reports. A default password, REPORT, is set by the manufacturer.
Passwords can be set for each level, as follows:
Level
Set or Change Password
Maintenance
Maintenance, Administration, Report
Administrative
Administration, Report
Report
Report
To set or change the password, at the @ prompt, enter one of the following
commands, followed by the password:
PASS A (for administrative)
PASS M (for maintenance)
PASS R (for report)
The message server requests a password when a terminal is connected to the
message server, when an already connected terminal is turned ON, or when the
modem is accessed. The password entered at that time determines the level of
access to the message server. When a task is complete, you should disconnect the
terminal from the modem or turn it OFF. This ensures that the appropriate access
level is available for the next session.
PAT STA
PATCH STATUS
Use this command to show the status of all patches currently applied on the Octel
Octel Overture 200/300, the patch number, the date the patch was applied, and
the targets. If a patch is a special patch, enter sp* following the patch number.
This information is retained through all restarts. Following a reboot, patches that
were applied to memory-only are removed from the status database.
After the patch status is displayed, a listing of all patches that are on the
message-server hard disk, but not yet applied, are listed.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-14
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Command
Basic Definition
PRT x
PRINT TONE
Use this command to monitor and print DTMF tones entered by the caller, the
DTMF tones sent by the Octel Overture 200/300 port, and the call-progress tones
from the PBX to the terminal. This is a real-time command, and it can be
initiated on only one port at a time. The information is not stored.
In this command, x is the port to monitor. To exit the monitor mode, press
.
The following lists the types of messages that can be displayed when the PRT
command is initiated:
ANSWER
The Octel Overture 200/300 detected that the called party answered the
telephone.
NO ANSWER
The Octel Overture 200/300 determined that the called party did not answer
within the specified time period.
SLOW BUSY
Reorder tone from the PBX or central office was detected.
FAST BUSY
Reorder tone from the PBX or central office was detected.
VACANT EXT.
Solid dial tone from the PBX or central office was detected.
FLASH
The Octel Overture 200/300 performed a hook switch.
NO DIAL TONE
The Octel Overture 200/300 did not receive a PBX or central office dial tone.
EXPECT DIAL TONE
The Octel Overture 200/300 is configured to expect a PBX or central office dial
tone.
IN—x
x is the incoming digit entered by the caller.
DIAL—x
x is the digits being sent by the Octel Overture 200/300.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
Command
6-15
Basic Definition
T ON
The Octel Overture 200/300 is reporting that a tone was received from the PBX
or central office. The number displayed is the actual time duration of the tone
received.
T OFF
The Octel Overture 200/300 is reporting that no tone (silence) was received from
the PBX or central office. The number displayed is the actual time duration that
no tone was present.
PRTMAP
LIST PORT MAPPING
Lists allocation of message server port numbers to ports configured in each slot,
and displays the allocation of each port to integration unit.
PS x
PORT STATUS
Use this command to print the status of all ports, where x is the non-zero for
continuous (optional) printing.
RESTA
RESTART
Use this command to restart the CPU. All active ports and the modem are
dropped. With the RESTA command, the software is not reloaded from the hard
drive.
The maintenance-level password is requested before restart is initiated.
RESTA 2
RESTA 2
Use this command to restart the CPU, which reloads software from the hard disk.
All active ports and the modem are dropped.
SDBG
Use this command to allow card integration trace information to be logged to the
message server’s call-processing trace log file.
To trace APIC and NPIC integrations, at the @ prompt enter
SDBG xx 1 FF yy
where xx is the slot number and yy is either 7F to turn on debug or 00 to turn off.
To trace other integrations, at the @ prompt enter
SDBG xx yy ll zz
where xx is the slot number, yy is the unit number 11 is the link number, and zz is
either 7F to turn on debug or 00 to turn off.
For example, SDBG 2 1 2 7F turns on debug for slot 2, unit 1, link 2.
TIME
TIME
Use this command to display the current message-server date and time.
PB60014–01
To change the date and time, use the UPDATE program. At the . (dot)
prompt, enter MODIFY DATE. the Configuration volume, Update chapter
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-16
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Command
Basic Definition
UPINTG
UPDATE INTEGRATION
Use this command to restart the integration cards, which disrupts call processing
for 1 or 2 minutes.
VCU
Use this command to connect to the VCU. It provides detailed drive status, drive
configuration, message header information and status on installed hardware. It
also provides error status reported by the VCU such as hard disk drive read-write
errors. In addition, from this command, you can enter the L DMAP command to
get more details about the disk drive.
WPDISK
WRITE PROTECT DISK DRIVE
Use this command to write protect a disk, which prevents any new messages from
being created on that disk. If a message server with one or more drives in a
write-protected condition, a type 34 hardware error is logged.
Refer to DID/E&M Trunk Interface Installation and Maintenance manual, Diagnostic and
Administrative Commands section, for the commands used to communicate with the DID/E&M
Trunk Interface Modules. Refer to the Direct Access Card (DAC) Installation and Maintenance
Manual for information about direct access cards.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6.2
6-17
DIAGNOSTICS
The Octel Overture 200/300 performs self-testing diagnostic programs that run continuously and do not
interfere with normal message-server operation. These tests are designed to locate faults in the message
server and reduce the need for additional test equipment, circuit descriptions, and schematic diagrams.
When errors are detected, they are logged into the Hardware Error Table, by error code, with the fault
and its location described.
In addition to the background diagnostics, you can run several diagnostic or test programs by command
from a terminal. These demand diagnostics are described in this section.
Poll the message server on a regular schedule by using a 103A- or 212A-compatible modem, or poll it
directly through a terminal or teleprinter. Print the Hardware Error Table, Traffic Peg Count Table,
System Performance report, and User Statistics report. Study the reports for any abnormal indications,
which allows for scheduled maintenance or corrective action, rather than reactive emergency procedures.
The screen examples shown in this section might differ from the screens for your message server.
Fields could be added, deleted, or relocated, depending on the software release.
Mailbox Configuration Status
The mailbox configuration command LIST MAILBOX displays information quickly about a specific
mailbox. At the @ prompt, type
L M x
For this command, x is the mailbox number.
When listing a mailbox configured with multiple INFORMATION Tables, status information is displayed
only for the current time period.
The following example shows all possible mailbox-configuration items that can be displayed, including
those items added by configuring optional feature packages.
@L M 1019
INFORMATION TABLE NUMBER: 10
CLASS OF SERVICE: 10
WITH ATTRIBUTES: 0 7 8 10 12 17 19 24 28 41 48 54 61 64 76 77 79 82 93 94
EXTENSION NUMBER:
MESSAGE WAITING: ON
OFFSITE OR PAGER #: NONE
GREETING: EXTENDED ABSENCE ON
THIS MAILBOX HAS A SECURITY CODE
PERSONAL ASSISTANCE MAILBOX: NONE
WILL USE PORT INTERCEPT
NUMBER OF MESSAGES: 1
NUMBER OF FUTURE DELIVERY MESSAGES: 0
AUTOMATIC FAX DELIVERY: OFF
AUTOMATIC FAX DELETION: OFF
PERSONAL FAX #: NONE
NAMESCAN: ON
USER #: 0014
GREETING MSG. 1294
NAME MSG. #: 1274
MBOX MSG. #: 0000
MSG. WAIT DELAY: 00
OFFSITE ATTEMPTS: 0
MAX ATTEMPTS: 0
LOG–ON LANGUAGE : NONE
SINGLE DIGIT MENU MAX DIGIT: 0
PREFIX DIGITS: NONE
FLAGS: IN–RNG
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-18
Installation and Maintenance Volume
The SINGLE DIGIT MENU MAX DIGIT: and PREFIX DIGITS: fields are for a Single
Digit Menu that was created through the USER Table. Entries in these fields override any entries
made in INFORMATION Table indexes 4 and 5, associated with the COS for the mailbox.
The FLAGS: field describes the state that the mailbox is currently in. The following definitions are for
the flags that might occur.
Screen Text
LOG-ON
SD-USE
IS-FUL
IN-RNG
HASMSG
MW–CAL
LMP-ON
LP-CAL
FX–DEL
LPRTRY
INTGIP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Definition
Mailbox holder currently logged on
Mailbox in use by SEND TASK
Mailbox full
Message waiting in range for this mailbox
Mailbox with a newly received message
Message waiting call in progress (or shortly will be)
Message waiting lamp turned ON
Calling to turn ON/OFF lamp
Fax delivery
Lamp-message-waiting command retry
Integration lamp command in progress
Distribution lists are not mailboxes and cannot be listed with this command.
Use L M x M as an extension of the mailbox configuration status command to list all the messages and
their status for a specific mailbox. To list message information for the mailbox, you must add the letter M
to the command. At the @ prompt, type
L M x M
For this command, x is the mailbox number.
An example of this extended command follows:
@L M 2000 M
STATUS
10 NEW
10 NEW
MSG CRE
50B6 003E
51AC 003E
FAX STATUS
00
08 FAX
STATUS
20 SAV
40 LSN
MSG CRE
501D 003E
13FA 0000
FAX STATUS
08 FAX
28 FAX PERSNL
STATUS
48 LSN
40 LSN
MSG CRE
5008 0002
5007 0000
FAX STATUS
08 FAX
00
STATUS
10 NEW
40 LSN
MSG CRE
5187 003E
3002 0000
FAX STATUS
00
18 FAX GROUP
The STATUS, MSG, and CRE columns display information about voice and fax messages. To determine
whether a message listed in these fields is a fax, refer to the FAX STATUS column of the corresponding
row. If a message is a fax, the fax status is described in the column.
STATUS
The abbreviation or term listed in this column indicates whether a message is new
(NEW), listened to (LSN), saved (SAV), or tagged for future delivery (FUT).
MSG
The message-header number that the Octel Overture 200/300 associates with a
specific message is listed in this column. The message-header number is a locator
of where voice or fax data is stored on the hard drive.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6-19
CRE
This column contains a hexadecimal user number for the mailbox that created the
message. To find out the mailbox number from the hexadecimal number, type @L
M x where x is the hexadecimal number. The message server displays the mailbox
number.
FAX STATUS
In this column, in addition to the fax-status code, the wording indicates whether a
message is a fax, or a fax marked for delivery to a personal or group fax machine.
If the message is not a fax, the fax status displays 00 only.
Message Status
The LIST HEADER command displays information about a message. At the @ prompt, type
L HE x
For this command, x is the message number listed when L M x M is entered.
@L HE 1179
CREATOR MAILBOX NUMBER: 1102
EXTENSION MESSAGE NUMBER: 0000
ACM REFERENCE NUMBER: 0000
TIME 05/12/97 07:11
USE COUNT: 00001
ORIGINAL MESSAGE TYPE: 1 (make)
DEPTH OF FORWARDING: 0
MSG TRANSMISSION TYPE: 1
CODE RATE: 24 KBS
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
VOICE BLOCKS:
00003
00000
VOICE BLOCK SIZE: 8KBYTES
8KBYTES
DISK NUMBER:
1
0
FLAGS:
ADDRESSES:
7364
CALLING PARTY DIGITS: 808
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-20
Installation and Maintenance Volume
For the ORIGINAL MESSAGE TYPES: field, the following lists possible descriptions:
Number
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Made by message command
Forwarded message
Reply message
Greeting message
Name message
Broadcast message
Message left after call to busy extension
Message after no answer/vacant/Centrex
Quick message
Message left after greeting played or no extension defined
Message came from network
Return receipt message
Message has been forwarded on the network
Mailbox is full
Mailbox does not exist
Disk full
Routes failed too many times
Message undeliverable
Too many addresses for location
Generic mailbox failure (Octel networking)
Not used
Auto-forward of a broadcast message
Personal Distribution List name message
Send failure caused by mailbox being full
Record AP processor
Sent by AP processor
Network clone message
Broadcast message to collocated cabinet
Standard fax message
Message left after forward from busy extension
Message left after forward from no answer
Message left after all forward
Fax recorded for an application processor
Fax voice annotation
Network Diagnostics
Use the LIST NETWORK command to allow messages pending to be listed for analog locations to be
listed. The diagnostic commands available for networking depend on whether the networking is analog or
digital.
Type LIST NET to allow messages pending for analog and domain locations to be listed.
Whether listing an analog network location or a domain location, the screen displays the information in
the same format.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6-21
Beginning with S3.0, Network Schedule Table information is displayed. The screen display changes to
show the appropriate network deivery schedule information.
@L Net ...
LOCATION FRAME NUMBER: 0000
DELIVERY SCHEDULE : NORSCH
START TIME: 07:00 END TIME : 12:00
INTERVAL : 0 Minutes
LAST OUTCALL : 12/21/1997 08:07
DELAY: 00000 MIN.
ERRORS: 00000
LIMIT: 00000
MESSAGE #
1BB2
CURRENT WINDOW
:DEFAULT,2,3,4,5
LOCATION FRAME
NUMBER
Octel internal use only.
DELIVERY
SCHEDULE
This is the name of the Network Schedule used.
CURRENT
WINDOW
All message delivery windows that are open/active for that location at the current
time.
START TIME
END TIME
The start and time for the delivery scheudles.
INTERVAL
The minimum time for which a message must wait before an outcall is made.
LAST OUTCALL
The date and time of the last outcall.
DELAY
The entry in this field shows how many minutes the message server waits before
attempting to send remaining messages after a failure. Its value is set by System
Parameter 69 — NET: REMOTE DELAY BEFORE RETRY (MIN).
For Digital Networking, this field applies only when a particular domain location is
listed.
ERRORS
The entry in this field is the number of times a network call or message attempt to
this location has failed.
For Digital Networking, this field applies only when a particular domain location is
listed.
LIMIT
The entry in this field shows how many times the message server retries network
calls to this location before returning the current message to the creator’s mailbox.
Its value is set by System Parameter 68 — NET: REMOTE DELIVERY ATTEMPT
LIMIT.
For Digital Networking, this field applies only when a particular domain location is
listed.
MESSAGE #
PB60014–01
This field lists the hexadecimal header number of all messages waiting to be sent.
Refer to the Message Status section in this chapter.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-22
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Beginning with S3.0, this can also the message priority for Network Delivery
Schedules listed.
For Digital Networking, if the listing is for all domain locations, the header
numbers of all messages in the domain waiting to be sent are listed. If the listing is
for a particular domain location, the header numbers of messages waiting to be sent
to that particular domain location are listed.
MESSAGE
PENDING QUERY
Domain messages could be delayed in the predelivery processing and might not
show up in the list of messages pending for a specific location. These messages
appear under this heading.
Network Mailbox Status for Analog Networking
Use the LIST NETWORK MAILBOX command to display information contained in the network mailbox
about a specific location, including the message numbers of all the messages in the network mailbox
waiting to be sent to that location. It also shows the current delay (in minutes), the error retry count, and
the retry limit.
L NET x
For this command, x is the location of the system to which the messages will be sent. The command can
also be abbreviated as L N.
@L Net 6400
LOCATION FRAME NUMBER: 0005
DELAY: 00000 MIN.
ERRORS: 00000
LIMIT: 00010
MESSAGE #
000E
0010
0012
Network Domain Status for Digital Networking
Use the LIST NETWORK DOMAIN command to list the messages pending for all domain locations
within a uniform-numbering-plan domain. The following example shows such a listing:
@L NET D
LOCATION FRAME NUMBER: 0002
MESSAGE #
2001
3002
MESSAGES PENDING QUERY:
4003
5002
6002
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6-23
If the LIST NET command is followed by digits from the uniform numbering plan of a domain, the
messages pending for all domain network locations are listed. For example, the command LIST NET 4,
where the digit 4 is the first digit in the uniform numbering plan, gives exactly the same listing as LIST
NET DOMAIN in the preceding example.
You can list information about a specific domain location, rather than all domain locations, by adding the
location name after the D in the LIST NET D command, as follows:
@L NET D DALLAS
LOCATION FRAME NUMBER: 0004
DELAY: 00002 MIN.
ERRORS: 00000
LIMIT: 00001
MESSAGE #
2001
LAN Status
Use the LANSTAT command to provide basic information about the current status of the LAN card,
digital networking and the Gateway Link. Information about the status of the LAN for previous periods in
the Network Traffic Report for Digital Networks and the Digital Network Performance Report. For
information about those reports, refer to the Reports chapter, Network Reports section, in this volume.
Use the LANSTAT command for information about the current status, whether the LAN is UP or DOWN
and the state of the high-speed links.
The following example shows that the LAN is up and running:
@LANSTAT
LAN STATUS: UP
LAST INITIALIZED ON 05/25/97 AT 06:05 PM
DIGITAL NETWORKING STATUS:
UP
–––––––– HIGH–SPEED–LINK STATUS ––––––––––––––––
LOCATION
STATUS
LAN–PRTCL OTHER
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
SELF
–
3
CHCGO
UP
2
NEWYRK
DOWN
–
DALLAS
DOWN
1
OEM–FAIL
SFO
UP
3
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
GWL STATUS: DOWN – GATEWAY LINK SYSTEM PARAMETER IS NOT ENABLED
@
The entry in the LAN STATUS field is always UP, INITIALIZING, or DOWN.
LAN Status
The LAN card is running, with CPU communication to the card. The LAN is
running normally. If a Courtesy Down is in progress, the message COURTESY
DOWN IN PROGRESS is shown.
When the LAN status is UP, the high-speed link status is given for each high-speed
digital location, as follows:
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-24
Installation and Maintenance Volume
INITIALIZING
Entry
DOWN Entry
LOCATION
The entry in this column is the location name.
STATUS
The entry in this column is the status of the link to this
location, which is either UP or DOWN.
LAN-PRTCL
The entry in this column is the Digital Networking Protocol
level of the other system. This entry allows compatibility
with future releases. It does not relate to analog protocol
numbering.
OTHER
The entry in this column can be one of the following:
HNDSHAKE, waiting for start-up handshake reply;
OEM-FAIL, cannot establish connection, OEM mismatch.
The LAN is in the initialization process. The current status of the initialization
process is given, from among the following:
WAITING FOR LAN-REBUILD TO COMPLETE
WAITING FOR LAN-BOARD TO START
WAITING FOR LAN INFO FROM VCU
STARTING HIGH-SPEED CONNECTIONS
CPU communication to the LAN card is not UP, and no LAN activity is possible.
The reason, if known, is given. The following are possible reasons:
System does not have the Digital Networking feature.
A COURTESY-DOWN is in process.
LAN SYSTEM PARAMETER NOT ENABLED.
LAN BOARD NOT CONFIGURED IN SLOTS TABLE.
At any time during the listing of the LAN status, you can press
line or two.
to terminate the listing within a
Status of FINDMBOX
Use the command FINDMBOX to search for a mailbox in the local USER Table, local Network Names
Table, and Uniform Numbering Plan Domain. The command then prints a status message of the results of
each search. Refer to Table 6-1 for a list of the status messages.
Table 6-1 FINDMBOX Messages and Descriptions
Status Messages
Description
FOUND IN LOCAL USER TABLE
The mailbox exists in the local USER Table.
NOT FOUND IN LOCAL USER TABLE
The mailbox does not exist in the local USER Table.
FOUND IN LOCAL NETNAME TABLE,
EXISTS IN XXXXXX
The mailbox is found in the local Network Names Table,
which says that it exists in XXXXXX.
NOT FOUND IN LOCAL NETNAMES
TABLE
The mailbox was not found in the local Network Names
Table.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6-25
Table 6-1 FINDMBOX Messages and Descriptions (continued)
Status Messages
Description
FOUND IN DOMAIN LOCATION YYYYYY Domain location YYYYYY sent a positive response to the
query; that is, the mailbox exists in YYYYYY.
NOT FOUND IN ANY OTHER DOMAIN
LOCATION
All locations in this domain sent negative responses to the
query.
The FINDMBOX command is useful for the following:
Ensuring that a mailbox number is unique in a domain
Detecting stale entries in local Network Names Tables where a mailbox has been moved from one
location to another in the domain
You can use the FINDMBOX command to search for a single mailbox or a range of mailboxes. To use the
command to search for a single mailbox, at the @ prompt, type
FINDMBOX x
For this command, x is the mailbox number to be searched for.
To use the command to search for a range of mailboxes, at the @ prompt, type
FINDMBOX x y
For this command, x is the first mailbox number in a range of mailboxes to be searched for, and y is the
last mailbox number in the range.
Press
to abort this command.
The following is an example of the FINDMBOX command:
@FINDMBOX 4573
FOUND
FOUND
FOUND
FOUND
IN
IN
IN
IN
LOCAL USER TABLE.
LOCAL NETNAMES TABLE, EXISTS IN NYORK1.
DOMAIN LOCATION NYORK1.
DOMAIN LOCATION CHICGO.
@
Print Status of LAN
Use the DCSTAT command to print the status for all digital networking channels, for only the LAN
channel specified, or for a range of digital networking channels specified. With the C option, you can
continuously print the status for the digital networking channel number specified.
To use the command to print the status for all digital network channels, at the @ prompt, type
DCSTAT
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-26
Installation and Maintenance Volume
To use the command to print the status for only the digital network channel specified, at the @
prompt, type
DCSTAT x
For this command, x is the channel number.
To use the command to print the status for a range of digital network channels, at the @ prompt, type
DCSTAT x y
For this command, x is the first digital network channel number in a range, and y is the last digital
network channel number in the range.
The Continuous option repeats the command until you press . To use the command to print
the status continuously for the digital network channel specified, at the @ prompt, type
DCSTAT x C
For this command, x is the digital network channel number and C specifies continuous print.
Octel Overture 200/300
Press
Serenade 3.0
to interrupt this command.
PB60014–01
Commands
6-27
The following is an example of the DCSTAT command display:
@DCSTAT
LCH01
IDLE
LCH02
IDLE
LCH03
SND
LCH04
IDLE
LCH05
IDLE
LCH06
IDLE
LCH07
CONN
LCH08
CONN
LCH09
IDLE
LCH10
SND
LCH03
SND
LCH04
IDLE
LCH05
IDLE
LCH06
IDLE
LCH07
CONN
LCH08
IDLE
@
Low-Level Echo Test (CMD PING)
Use the CMD PING command for the lowest-level “echo” test from the LAN card at this end to the
destination server. It verifies that all the basic requirements are there, as follows:
Both LAN cards are there, up and running, and talking to the CPU.
LAN end-to-end data transfer is possible across the digital network.
The LAN card IP addresses are correctly configured.
This is the best tool to use to identify whether there is end-to-end connectivity across the digital network
between two Octel Overture message servers. It is especially useful to verify that IP addresses are
correctly configured.
To use the command, at the @ prompt, type
CMD x PING y
For this command, x is the slot number in which the LAN card is installed, and y is the IP address of the
device to which the test Ethernet packet is sent.
For additional Networking diagnostic information, refer to the Networking volume, Digital
Networking chapter, Network Maintenance and Troubleshooting section.
Port Configuration Status
Use the LIST PORT command to list the current configuration status for a port. At the @ prompt, type
L PO x
For this command, x represents the port number.
When a port is configured to use different INFORMATION Tables, only current information is displayed.
The following example shows various items that can be displayed, including those added by optional
feature packages.
@L PORT 1
CLASS OF SERVICE: 241 WITH ATTRIBUTES:
USE FOR OUTCALL: YES ANSWERING MODE: AX
PORT TYPE: LIC4 TEST PORT: YES
INFORMATION TABLE NUMBER: 254
INTERCEPT MAILBOX: 4932 INTERCEPT EXTENSION: 1000
PORT EXTENSION: 300
COMPANY GREETING MAILBOX: 4665
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-28
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Port Mapping Status
Use the PRTMAP command to display information about the assignment of message-server port numbers
to ports configured in each slot. This command also displays the assignment of each port to an integration
unit. At the @ prompt, type
PRTMAP
If the PBX type is ATT75, each port can be assigned to more than one integration unit. If the PBX type is
not ATT75, each port can be assigned to only one integration unit and is assigned a line-appearance
number for that integration unit.
If a port is assigned to an integration unit and that port has the COS attribute for nonintegration, Attribute
58 — DO NOT USE THIS PORT FOR INTEGRATION, this command prints *** after the integration
information for the port. The discrepancy in the configuration must be resolved, either by removing the
COS attribute from the port or removing the port from all integration units.
The following is an example of the PRTMAP command without ATT75 assigned:
@PRTMAP
SYSTEM
PORT
ID= 0
1
2
3
4
ID= 0
5
SLOT
PORT
EXTN
INTEGRATION
SLOT/UNIT
LINE
APPEARANCE
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
1210
1211
1212
1213
10/1
10/1
10/1
10/1
1
2
3
4
2
1
125
10/1
5
The following is an example of the PRTMAP command with ATT75 assigned:
@PRTMAP
SYSTEM
PORT
SLOT
ID= 0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
ID= 0
5
2
PORT
EXTN
INTEGRATION
SLOT/UNIT
1
2
3
4
121
122
123
124
10/1 10/2 11/1 11/2
10/1 10/2 11/1 11/2
10/1
10/2
1
125
10/2
Floppy-Disk-Drive Diagnostics
Use the floppy-disk-drive (FD) diagnostic command TEST FLOPPY 1 to isolate faults to the diskette,
floppy-disk drive, or floppy-disk controller. To run this test, at the @ prompt, type
TE F 1
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6-29
This test reads the entire diskette; if there are errors, the message server responds with the following:
SOFT ERRORS DETECTED
or
FATAL ERROR DETECTED, SEE HARDWARE ERROR TABLE
When the diagnostic is completed, the message server responds as follows:
TEST 01 COMPLETED
If the message server fails to read from or write information to the diskette on the first attempt, but is
successful in a subsequent attempt, the message server records a soft error. Soft errors can be caused by
diskette wear, contamination on the recording surface, or aging of the floppy-disk-drive head.
Refer to the Installation chapter for information about the floppy-disk write-protect feature.
Hard-Disk-Drive Diagnostics (DEX)
The purpose of the DEX command is to “exercise” the disks; hence its name Disk EXerciser. Because
only a small percentage of disk sectors are accessed in the course of normal operation and disk-error
handling cannot be performed for any sectors that are never accessed, DEX provides an orderly and
efficient means to read all disk sectors.
Each disk is divided into five regions, as follows:
Region 1
Region 2
Region 4
Region 8
Region 10
Critical sectors
File system
Prompts
Message headers
Voice data
DEX tests each of the specified regions separately, starting with the lowest-numbered region through the
highest-numbered region. Up to six drives are tested.
When the DEX command finishes testing a region, it displays a status line, as follows:
REGION WW COMPLETE
PB60014–01
DISK #1:
DISK #4:
XXXXX
XXXXX
DISK #2: XXXXX
DISK #5: XXXXX
DISK #3: XXXXX
DISK #6: XXXXX
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-30
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Where WW is the Region tested, and XXXXX is the Number of sectors on the disk that had read errors.
All drives are listed on the status line, even if not installed. If not installed, zeros are displayed.
To use the command, at the @ prompt, type
DEX x y
Where x and y are one of the following:
x = DISK
This argument specifies which disk to test:
1
= Test disk #1 (if system drive #1 is installed)
2
= Test disk #2 (if system drive #2 is installed)
3
= Test disk #3 (if voice drive #3 is installed)
4
= Test disk #4 (if voice drive #4 is installed)
5
= Test disk #5 (if voice drive #5 is installed)
6
= Test disk #6 (if voice drive #6 is installed)
FF
= Test all disks (or those disks that are actually installed)
=
Abort background DEX
If all disks are specified but not all are installed, DEX tests only those disks that are
actually installed. If an invalid option is specified, DEX responds with the following:
INVALID DISK NUMBER or DISK EXERCISE ABORTED
If none of the specified disks are actually installed, DEX responds with the
following:
DRIVE NOT INSTALLED
y = REGION
This argument specifies which regions to test:
1
= Critical sectors
2
= File system
4
= Prompts
8
= Message headers
10
= Voice data
=
All regions
Voice drives have two types of regions, Critical sectors and Voice data. When
running DEX to test all regions for all system and voice drives (that is, DEX FF),
invalid regions of the voice drives are ignored, but the corresponding regions on the
system drives are exercised.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
The DEX report for a voice drive region that does not exist displays zero
errors.
PB60014–01
Commands
6-31
The following example shows all regions on disk 1 tested:
@DEX 1
REGION 01 COMPLETE
REGION 02 COMPLETE
REGION 04 COMPLETE
REGION 08 COMPLETE
REGION 10 COMPLETE
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
#1:00000
#4:00000
#1:00004
#4:00000
#1:00003
#4:00000
#1:00000
#4:00000
#1:00012
#4:00000
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
#2:00000
#5:00000
#2:00000
#5:00000
#2:00000
#5:00000
#2:00000
#5:00000
#2:00000
#5:00000
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
DISK
#3:00000
#6:00000
#3:00000
#6:00000
#3:00000
#6:00000
#3:00000
#6:00000
#3:00000
#6:00000
DISK EXERCISE COMPLETE
If any errors are reported, refer to the Hardware Errors section in this chapter.
Disk Information Status (L DMAP)
Beginning with Serenade 3.0, the L DMAP command is used to display characteristics of each drive
installed in the system. You must connect to the VCU before you can enter this command. You can
determine the drive status, the drive manufacturer, the physical and logical size of each disk, and how the
disk is keyed from the information displayed.
At the @ prompt type
VCU
A> appears. At the A> prompt type
L DMAP
To return to the @ prompt, enter E
.
@VCU
Connecting to VCU
VCU 1.11 cksum=(1e0b843) Link:08/27/97 – 01/14/98 20:27
A>L DMAP
dev dsk log phy vendor prod_ID
rev
Mb
phy/ log
0 ––– –
–
1 ––– –
–
2 1/1 ACT ALV SEAGAT ST1480
5736 406
cb40e/ cb40e
3 ––– –
–
4 ––– –
–
5 ––– –
–
6 ––– –
–
A>E
@
dev =
dsk =
log =
PB60014–01
Mb
h/k
406
0/1
Logical SCSI disk identification number
Dik number/total number of disks
Logical state of the system
ACT
=
Disk is actively used by the system
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-32
Installation and Maintenance Volume
ERR
=
Disk has non-recoverable error
VLD
=
Disk part of configuration, but needs rebuild.
UNK =
Disk is valid, but not part of this configuration
INV
=
Disk does not have valid configuration block
WPD =
Disk slot is write protected
phy = physical state of the disk
ALV
=
Disk is alive
ERR
=
Disk has error
ILL
=
Disk is not a valid disk for the model defined
vendor = Disk manufacturer details
prod_ID = Disk manufacturer details
rev = Disk manufacturer detail
Mb = Physical size of the disk in Megabytes
phy = Physical size of the disk in disk blocks
/log = Logical size of the disk in disk blocks
MB = Logical size of disk in Megabytes
h/k = OEM identification/ Key revision (1=Non COD, 3=COD)
h = OEM key: 0/1 = Octel and 2/3/5 = OEM
k = COD/non-COD: 1 = non-COD and 3 = COD
A COD drive cannot be copied to a non-COD drive.
Line-Interface-Card Diagnostics
Three online diagnostic tests can be used to test the line interface cards (LIC). The first test is performed
periodically during normal message server operation. It is used to check the analog (voice) path of the
LIC. The second test is the ring detection/PBX connection test. The third test is the ring-through test.
These tests are described in the following sections.
Tone/DTMF/Beep Test
Use the TEST LINE 1 command to test line 1. To run the test, turn the terminal or teleprinter ON. At
the @ prompt, type
TE L 1
This test runs in sequence on each of the installed ports.
Use the TEST LINE 5 command to test line 5 for a specific port. At the @ prompt, type
TE L 5 x
For this command, x is the specific port number in HEX.
A hybrid transformer is used on the LIC to check tone generation and detection circuitry. A tone is applied
to the hybrid transformer and, as it is being reflected, the tone detector is turned ON. A comparison is made
to see whether the tones sent match the tones detected. The test sequence continues, through all assigned
ports. If a test tone sent is not received correctly, an error is entered in the Hardware Error Table.
Some PBXs have the capability of running diagnostics on their ports. The diagnostics can cause the Octel
Overture 200/300’s self-test to fail and place the Octel Overture 200/300 port in TST (test) mode, taking
the port out of service. The port remains in TST mode until the self-test runs again and can put the port in
service or until the message server is restarted. In cases of conflict with PBX diagnostics, the self-test can
be disabled in the SLOTS Table. Consult with Octel before you set the self-test to NO in the SLOTS Table.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6-33
Ring Detection/PBX Connection Test
Use the TEST LINE 4 command for this test. To run the test, turn on the terminal or teleprinter. At the
@ prompt, type
TE L 4 x
For this command, x is the installed port number (in HEX) to be tested.
This test runs only on the port requested in the command, and the port must have the self-test parameter
in the SLOT Table set to YES.
This port is rapidly seized and released repeatedly. This action causes charging and discharging of the
tip-and-ring circuitry on the LIC, if the port is correctly connected to the PBX. These pulses trigger the
ring-detection circuitry on the port.
The test is completed successfully when the LIC reports the detection of this “ringing” to the CPU. If
ringing is not detected, the test terminates unsuccessfully after 5 seconds and leaves the tested port in the
TST mode, removing the port from service. An error is also logged in the Hardware Error Table.
Some PBXs are not capable of generating sufficient voltage or loop current quickly enough for the
test to succeed. One example is the Northern Telecom SL1. Consult with Technical Support if you
are uncertain whether a particular PBX supports this test.
Ring-Through Test
The ring-through test is run only on demand and should be used only when the Octel Overture 200/300
is initially installed or when it is known that no calls are being processed.
The ring-through test performs the following sequence:
1.
Seizes a port
2.
Waits for dial tone from the PBX
3.
Sends digits to a port using the extension number entered in the SLOTS Table
4.
Waits for the port to answer, and sends a test pattern
For example, a four-port message server makes 12 test calls; each test call takes 20 to 30 seconds to
complete. If the port called is busy or does not answer, an error is logged in the Hardware Error Table.
The command for this test is TEST LINE 2. To initiate the test, at the @ prompt, type
TE L 2
Update Integration
The following changes to integration slots require that the integration cards be restarted before the
changes take effect:
PB60014–01
Adding or deleting integration slots
Modifying line appearances for an integration slot
Enabling or disabling message waiting links
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-34
Installation and Maintenance Volume
When any of these changes are made, the Octel Overture 200/300 presents the following message when
exiting from the UPDATE program.
WARNING:
FOR CHANGES TO TAKE EFFECT INTEGRATION MUST BE RESTARTED
To execute the command UPDATE INTEGRATION, at the @ prompt, type
UPINTG
The Octel Overture 200/300 then prompts the following:
RESTART INTEGRATION . . .
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO DO THIS?
This command restarts the integration cards and, therefore, disrupts call processing for approximately 1
or 2 minutes.
Port Status
The command PORT STATUS displays the current state of the installed ports. At the @ prompt, type
PS
The message server responds with the current state of each installed port.
CH 1
LSN
CH 2
IDL
CH 3
LSN
CH 4
NEW
CH 5
MOD
CH 6
IDL
CH 7
IDL
CH 8
IDL
CH 9
IDL
CH 10
IDL
CH 11
IDL
CH 12
IDL
CH 13
IDL
CH 14
IDL
CH 15
NMS
CH 16
IDL
CH 17
ERR
CH 18
ERR
CH 19
ERR
CH 20
ERR
CH 21
ERR
CH 22
ERR
CH 23
ERR
CH 24
ERR
CH 25 CH 26 CH 27 CH 28 CH 29 CH 30 CH 31 CH 32
FX.IDL FX.RCV FX.SND FX.IDL FX.IDL FX.IDL FX.IDL FX.CDN
The port states are shown under each port channel (CH 1, etc.) and the ports might be in any of the states
listed in Table 6-2.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6-35
Table 6-2 Abbreviations for Channel/Port State
Port State
Description
Abbreviation
ACM
CALLER USING OCCI HEARS GREETING AND MESSAGING INSTRUCTIONS
ACR
CALLER USING OCCI IS RECORDING A MESSAGE
ADR
COLLECT ADDRESS FOR A MESSAGE
AFC
AUTO COPY CONFIGURATION
AFZ
PLAY ALL PHRASES
AIC
(ASSISTED INWARD CALLING) CALLING A USER OR PLAYING A GREETING
ALM
ALARM-CALL-OUT
AMR
AMIS MESSAGE RECEIVE
APP
APPLICATION PROCESSOR LINK
APR
PLAY ALL PROMPTS
CHK
CHECK FEATURE
CON
CONFIGURATION, MSG WAITING PARAMETERS OR SECURITY
DID
DID
DIG
IN-BAND DTMF INTEGRATION
DIR
DAC ADDRESS COLLECTION
DRP
DROPPING CALL
EXT
EXIT
ERR
LINE CARD FOR PORT HAS REPORTED A FATAL ERROR
FAX
FAX BOARD CHANNEL STATE
FGT
FORCED GREETING RECORD
FNM
FORCED NAME RECORD
FXA
PRINT ALL FAX
FXC
FAX CONNECT (RECEIVE/SEND)
FXO
FAX MAILBOX CONFIGURATION OPTIONS
FXP
FAX MAILBOX PRINT OPTIONS
FX.ALC
ALLOCATED FAX CHANNEL
FX.CDN
COURTESY DOWN FOR FAX CHANNEL
FX.IDL
FAX IDLE
FX.INT
FAX CHANNEL INITIALIZATION
FX.RCV
RECEIVING FAX
FX.SND
SENDING FAX
FX.TST
PB60014–01
FAX CHANNEL TEST
FUT
FUTURE DELIVERY LISTEN
FWD
FORWARDED TO DIGITS IN SYSTEM PARAMETER TABLE
GRT
GREETING
HLP
ASKING FOR HELP
ID2
BUSY OUT PORT AFTER RING IN
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-36
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Table 6-2 Abbreviations for Channel/Port State (continued)
Port State
Description
Abbreviation
Octel Overture 200/300
IDL
IDLE
LSN
LISTENING TO A MESSAGE
MSW
MESSAGE WAITING
MOD
THIS PORT IS CONNECTED TO THE MODEM
NAM
NAME SETUP
NDT
NO DIAL TONE WHEN ATTEMPTING TO FORWARD OR INITIALIZE PORTS
NET
NETWORKING
NEW
CREATE NEW, FORWARD, REPLY OR GREETING MESSAGE
NMD
NAMES DIRECTORY STATE
NMR
NET MESSAGE RECEIVE - PROTOCOL 1
NMS
NET MESSAGE SEND - PROTOCOL 1
NNR
NETWORK NAME RECEIVE
NTS
NET TEST STATE
OMC
OFFSITE MESSAGE WAITING CONFIGURATION
OMR
OCTELNET MESSAGE RECEIVE
OMS
OCTELNET MESSAGE SENT
QAD
COLLECTING AN ADDRESS FOR A QUICK MESSAGE
QCK
RECORDING A QUICK MESSAGE OR MESSAGE AFTER CALL
PAC
PERSONAL ASSISTANCE CONFIGURATION
PDL
PERSONAL DISTRIBUTION LISTS
RDY
WAITING FOR COMMAND AT READY
RNM
USER RECORD OWN NAME
SCR
SCRIPTED GREETING
SLQ
SELECT MESSAGE QUEUE
STR
START OF INITIAL LOGON BEFORE READY
TST
SELFTEST IN PROGRESS OR PORT HAS FAILED SELFTEST
VMR
NET MESSAGE RECEIVED - PROTOCOL 2
VMS
NET MESSAGE SEND - PROTOCOL 2
WFA
WAITING FOR MAILBOX ADDRESS AFTER RECEIVING #
WFD
WAITING FOR FIRST DIGIT AFTER ANSWERING CALL
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6-37
Alarm Test
The TEST ALARM command tests the alarm callout feature. At the @ prompt, type
TE A
The message server attempts to call the string configured in System Parameter 31 — ALARM
NUMBER. If successful, the person answering the alarm call hears a message similar to the following:
“Beep-Beep-Beep-Beep. This is an alarm call from message server number 123. Error type O has
occurred. Press star to acknowledge alarm notification or press pound to connect to the modem.”
If not acknowledged, the message server disconnects the call after 1 minute and retries it every 10
minutes, until it is acknowledged (the listener presses ).
To log on for remote access, proceed as follows:
1.
Press . The line Beeps for up to 3 minutes, which allows time to connect the modem and the
terminal.
2.
Press when ready. This connects the modem, which enables remote access to the Octel Overture
200/300.
If the person answering the alarm call does not enter a second , the server disconnects the call
and continues to retry every 10 minutes, until the call is acknowledged.
Use the LIST HARDWARE command to list the Hardware Error Table after testing the alarm or enabling
remote access. At the @ prompt, type
L H
The Octel Overture 200/300 prompts *** ALARM HAS BEEN GIVEN *** to indicate an alarm test
was performed. The command CLEAR HARDWARE clears this test message. At the @ prompt, type
C H
Caution!
You must clear the Hardware Error Table to reset the
Octel Overture 200/300 callout feature, or the Octel
Overture 200/300 will not attempt to call the alarm
number when a true alarm occurs. If the Table shows
other errors, refer to the System Errors and Traffic
Pegs chapter, Hardware Errors section, in this
volume.
The TE A command also closes the Alarm Relay and turns ON the Alarm.
The C H command reopens the Alarm Relay and turns OFF the Alarm.
Figure 6-1 shows an alarm-test flow chart.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-38
Installation and Maintenance Volume
@TE A
Message server calls string entered in System Parameter 31
Beep, beep, beep. This is an alarm from
number 123. Error Type O has occurred. Press
star to confirm or press pound for modem
access."
Stop call
DISCONNECT
Call disconnects after 1 minute.
Message server retries call every 10
minutes, until acknowledged.
Logon for
remote access
Acknowledged
PRESS
Not
Acknowledged
PRESS
*
#
Line beeps" for up
to 3 minutes
CONNECT
Modem and Terminal
Goodbye
PRESS
#
@L H
FRI MM/DD HH:MM:SS YYYY SYSTEM NAME ID:XXX S/X:XXX PBX:XXX
CLEARED: MM/DD HH:MM
***ALARM HAS BEEN GIVEN***
TABLE IS EMPTY
@C
Callout feature tested
H
or
List Hardware
Error Table
Clear Hardware Error Table
Alarm Callout enabled
Figure 6-1 Alarm Test Flow
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6-39
System Forwarding
The forwarding string entered in System Parameter 45 — SYSTEM-RELOAD FORWARD STRING, is
automatically sent if the Octel Overture 200/300 reloads for any reason. During this time, calls are not
accepted for several minutes, while an automatic check is performed on the database. If forwarding
strings are not set up, incoming calls receive a ring-no-answer until the message server is ready. When
forwarding strings are set up correctly, the PBX forwards all incoming calls to an operator or attendant
for handling until the message server is ready to receive calls. The following describes the procedure for
testing this feature.
Either the COURTESY DOWN (CD x y z) command, or the TEST CHANNEL 1 (TE C 1 X Y)
command to test the forward feature. You can specify a specific port or range of ports. This command
causes each port to attempt the forward.
When successful, the following message is displayed:
Port #1 Forwarded
.
.
.
All Requested Ports Forwarded
If only one port is specified, the Octel Overture 200/300 attempts to forward only that port. If a range is
specified, the message server attempts to forward all ports in the range. If no port is specified, the
message server tries to forward all ports. If a port is successfully forwarded, it is left in the forwarded
state. If a port fails to complete the forwarding, it is left in the NDT state. The Octel Overture 200/300
continues to try to forward all ports specified, until successful or until you press . To review the
port status, use the P S command. To cancel forwarding, run the System Initialization test, as described
in the following section.
For additional information about using the CD x y z command, refer to the System Service Mode
Commands, Courtesy Up/Courtesy Down, section.
System Initialization
When the Octel Overture 200/300 has reloaded and is ready to handle calls, an initialization sequence
automatically takes place. First, the message server attempts PBX initialization (System Parameter 33 —
PBX INITIALIZE CODE), then attempts the cancel forward string (System Parameter 46 —
SYSTEM-RELOAD CANCEL FORWARD-STRING), for each port in turn. When a port fails to
complete the initialization or the cancel forward, the port is left in the NDT state. The message server
attempts to initialize a port every 10 seconds.
Use either the COURTESY UP (CU x y z) command or the TEST CHANNEL 2 (TE C 1 x y)
command to test this feature. You can specify a specific port or range of ports. This command causes the
server to attempt initialization and cancel forward for each port in turn.
When the initialization is successful, the following message is displayed:
Port #1 Initialized
.
.
.
All Requested Ports Initialized
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-40
Installation and Maintenance Volume
If only one port is specified, the Octel Overture 200/300 tries to initialize and cancel forwarding for only
the port specified. If a range is specified, the message server tries to initialize and cancel forwarding for
all ports in the range. If no port is specified, the message server tries to initialize and cancel forwarding
for all ports. If a port is successfully initialized and forwarding is canceled, it goes to the IDL state. If a
port fails to complete either the initialization or the forwarding, the status remains NDT.
For additional information about using the CU x y z command, refer to the System Service Mode
Commands, Courtesy Up/Courtesy Down, section.
System Status
Use the TEST STATUS command to check the message server status for d.c. voltages and the
temperature. At the @ prompt, type
TE S
If d.c. voltages and the temperature are within acceptable ranges, the Octel Overture 200/300 responds
with the following:
SYSTEM STATUS TESTED OK.
If d.c. voltages and the temperature are out of range, the Octel Overture 200/300 responds with the
following:
ERROR DETECTED. SEE HARDWARE ERROR TABLE.
List Features
Use the LIST FEATURES command to list the following:
Optional feature packages installed
Number of installed, authorized, and used ports, mailboxes, and disk-storage hours
Maximum number of drives, ports, and languages allowed in the message server
At the @ prompt, type
L F
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6-41
@L F
–––––––––––––––– SYSTEM SOFTWARE RELEASE S.x.x.x (MM/DD/YY) ––––––––––––––––
DAY MM/DD HH:MM:SS YYYY SYSTEMNAME ID:XXX S/N:XXXXXX PBX:23
MODEL TYPE: OCTEL OVERTURE 300
SERIAL NUMBER: 200003
FEATURE PACKAGES:
SW–30001 SW–30003 SW–30004 SW–30007 SW–30008 SW–30009 SW–30015
SW–30019 SW–30020 SW–30021 SW–30022 SW–30023 SW–30024 SW–30026 SW–30027
SW–30028 SW–30029 SW–30030 SW–30031 SW–30032 SW–30034 SW–30049 SW–30050
SW–30051 SW–30052 SW–30053 SW–30055 SW–30056 SW–30057
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Authorized
Used
Unused
Installed
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Ports :
Analog
––
0
0
0
Fax
––
8
0
8
DSP
16
8
8
16
PIC
24
20
4
24
MBXs :
Voice
Non–Voice
VMB
Fax
900
9100
250
640
678
0
144
507
222
9100
106
133
10000
10000
900
10000
Storage : Hours
100
58
42
106
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DRIVES: 6
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF PORTS: 64
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SCHEDULE TABLE ENTRIES: 8
NUMBER OF LANGUAGES: 2
@
The LIST FEATURE screen fields are described as follows:
PB60014–01
Model Type
Shows the model number that is configured.
Serial Number
Shows the serial number entered during INSTALL.
Feature
Packages
Lists the feature packages that are installed, including standard and optional
features.
Ports, Mbx, and
Storage
Information
Information for Ports, MBXs and Storage are divided into columns marked
Authorized, Used, Unused, and Installed.
The Authorized column shows the total number purchased.
The Used column shows the number configured or used. This number can be
as high as the number authorized.
The Unused column shows the number available to be used. (The total
number authorized minus the total number used.)
The Installed column shows the total capacity of the message server for
specific port or mailbox types and storage hours. With Capacity on Demand
(COD), a feature can be installed, but not authorized. For ports, this number is
the number of ports present on the cards physically installed in the message
server. For mailboxes, this indicates the maximum number of mailboxes that
this message server supports.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-42
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Ports
This rows lists the types of ports installed.
The Analog row refers to the 4- and 8-port LIC. If the 4- and 8-port line cards
are not controlled by Capacity on Demand (COD), the Authorized column is
empty.
The Fax row is the number of fax-application-processor channels installed. If
the fax card is not controlled by COD, the Authorized column is empty.
Mailboxes
Storage
The fax capability for a mailbox is controlled by COD.
The DSP row shows the number of DLC16 and ILC12 ports authorized, used,
and installed.
The PIC row shows the number of PBX integration card ports authorized, used,
and installed.
This row lists the types of mailboxes installed.
The Voice row is the number of authorized, used, and installed mailboxes
used for messaging.
The Non-Voice row shows the number of mailboxes designated for
applications use. These are mailboxes assigned Attribute 26 — MAY NOT
USE INTERNAL MESSAGING FEATURES. For non-voice mailboxes, the
value in the Authorized field is the installed number of mailboxes less the
number of used voice mailboxes.
The VMB row is the number of authorized, used, and installed Visual Mailbox
licenses. The value in the Installed field is equal to the value for authorized
voice mailboxes.
The Fax row is the number of authorized, used, and installed fax mailbox
licenses. The value in the Installed field is equal to the value for installed voice
mailboxes.
This row lists the number of message storage hours authorized, used and installed.
The value in the Authorized field is the number of hours purchased for COD drives
added to the total hours on non-COD drives, not including the message server
overhead. The Used field indicates the total number of hours actually used to store
messages, names, greetings, redundant copies and network names. The Installed
field is the actual physical capacity of all drives in the message server.
The hours used for message server overhead are not included in either the
Used or Installed values. If all drives were either non-COD drives or fully
authorized COD drives, Installed and Authorized would be the same.
Maximum
Number of
Drives
Shows the maximum number of disk-drive slots possible for the message server.
Maximum
Number of Ports
Shows the maximum number of ports possible for the message server, including
analog, DSP, PIC, and fax.
Maximum
Number of
Schedule Table
Entries
Shows the maximum number of entries allowed in SCHEDULE Table entries. The
maximum number is 8.
Number of
Languages
Lists the number of languages installed.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6.3
6-43
APPLICATION DELAYS
Application delays are timing values set in the Octel Overture 200/300. Some of these delays are used to
detect the tone cadence that the PBX provides to the Octel Overture 200/300. The tone cadence indicates
a specific call condition; for example, a ringback tone indicates that the called extension is ringing, and a
busy tone indicates that the called extension is busy.
When a PBX type is selected for System Parameter 3 — PBX TYPE/PBX MODEL, the default values
are set to match the tone cadence of the selected PBX. If the PBX type is not in the list provided by
System Parameter 3, select the PBX type OTHER. Because the tone-cadence values in that situation are
not known, the Octel Overture 200/300 defaults to generic/industry-standard values; for example, a
1-second-on/3-second-off ring cadence, a 500-ms-on/500-ms-off busy cadence, and a 250-ms-on/off for a
fast-busy cadence. These values could need to be changed to work correctly with your PBX when OTHER
has been selected.
If the Octel Overture 200/300 can already detect ringback, slow-busy, fast-busy, and if configured, double
interrupted ringback, the application delay indexes do not need to be modified. However, if the Octel
Overture 200/300 detects an answer condition while monitoring single or double interrupted-ringback,
slow-busy, or fast-busy tones, you must modify the application-delay indexes. The application-delay indexes
that can be modified are described in the How to Modify Application Delays section in this chapter.
How Tones Are Recognized
When the Octel Overture 200/300 screens a call, it is looking for single- or double-interrupted ringback,
slow-busy, or fast-busy tones. To process the call transfer, the Octel Overture 200/300 refers to
application-delay indexes 49 through 52. These indexes show the maximum and minimum ON/OFF
periods for any tone.
If the tone cadence detected does not comply with these delays, the Octel Overture 200/300 determines
that the tone is not a single or double interrupted ringback, slow busy, or fast busy and that the call has
been answered. If this occurs, the message server completes the call transfer. In a screen display of the
Print Tone (PRT) and List Trace, an answer condition is indicated.
If the tone cadence is within the values set for delays 49 through 52, the Octel Overture 200/300 then
compares the tone cadence with application-delay indexes 53 through 76 for single interrupted ringback,
double interrupted ringback, slow-busy and fast-busy delays, to determine what the condition is. If it does
not comply with any of these delays, it is assumed that the call has been answered and the Octel Overture
200/300 completes the transfer. Figure 5-2 shows the sequence that the Octel Overture 200/300 follows to
screen calls.
PB60014–01
If the PBX provides double interrupted ringback when an internal extension calls another internal
extension, System Parameter 26 — DOUBLE-INTERRUPTED RINGBACK, is set to YES. The
Octel Overture 200/300 looks for a double interrupted ringback versus a single interrupted
ringback when calling an extension.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-44
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Start of Transfer
Dial extension digits and begin looking for tone patterns
Do the tones
comply with ranges
set by delays
49, 50, 51,
or 52?
NO
Is System
Parameter 26
set to YES?
The call is
considered
answered
Do the
tones comply
with Indexes 61, 62,
63, 64, 65,
66, 67,or
68?
NO
Do the tones
comply with ranges
set by delays
53, 54, 55,
or 56?
NO
The phone rings,
monitor ringback (Information Table Index 7)
The phone rings,
monitor ringback (Information Table Index 7)
NO
Slow Busy
Do the tones
comply with ranges
set by delays 69, 70,
71, or 72?
Pull call back.
Speak “ . . . is
busy...”
NO
Fast Busy
Do the tones
comply with ranges
set by delays
73, 74, 75,
or 76?
Pull call back.
Speak “... is invalid . . . ”
Answer
End
Figure 6-2 Sequence Used by the Octel Overture 200/300 To Screen Calls
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6-45
How To Modify Application Delays
You should only modify those application-delay indexes for PBX tones that fail. Before modifying an
application-delay index, use the PRT (PRINT TONE) command and COS Attribute 70 — MEASURE
PBX TONES, to determine the correct timing value. Use the following steps:
1.
Assign COS Attribute 70 to a test mailbox that has an extension number for a telephone set located
near the terminal.
When a mailbox with COS Attribute 70 is called, the Octel Overture 200/300 dials the extension
number, stays on line for 10 tone changes, and then hangs up. During this call, you can determine the
tone cadence of the PBX.
2.
The extension called should not be set to forward on ring-no-answer, busy, or fast busy. Other
features, such as camp-on, must be disabled. This could give a false tone cadence.
Select an Octel Overture 200/300 port and at the @ prompt, type
PRT x
For this command, x is the port number to be used.
3.
Call that port’s extension number.
4.
When the message server answers, dial the test mailbox number.
The PRT command monitors and displays the DTMF tones dialed by the caller, the DTMF tones
dialed by the Octel Overture 200/300, and the call-progress tones from the PBX to the terminal. This
command is a real-time command and can be initiated on only one port at a time. The information is
not stored.
If the tones do not show on the screen when the PRT command displays the DTMF events, at
the @ prompt, type
C S
5.
Repeat steps 2 through 4. If executing the C S command does not help, contact your technical
support center.
The PRT command should be initiated for any call condition that fails, such as when the message
server calls an extension that is sending a ringback but the message server detects an answer
condition.
The following example displays tone information when the Octel Overture 200/300 screens a call to
a ring-no-answer extension that fails. Refer to the Miscellaneous Commands section in this chapter
for a list of Print Tone output types.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-46
Installation and Maintenance Volume
@PRT 1
IN–2
IN–2
IN–0
FLASH
EXPECT DIAL TONE
420 MS
T ON
600 MS
DIAL TONE
DIAL–2
DIAL–2
DIAL–0
2620 MS
T ON
1000 MS
T OFF
2880 MS
T ON
980 MS
T OFF
2920 MS
T ON
790 MS
ANSWER
The caller enters DTMF digits.
The Octel Overture 200/300 monitors tones for dial tone.
Dial tone is detected.
Octel Overture 200/300 dials DTMF digits.
Octel Overture 200/300 ignores the first tone change.
Octel Overture 200/300 monitors call progress tones from
the PBX to determine the status of the called extension.
Failure: Octel Overture 200/300 detects an answer condition
because one of the tones from the PBX does not conform to
delays in the Application Delay Table.
6.
Review the PRT display to determine the tone cadence of the tone being monitored. Refer to the
How to Modify Application Delays section in this chapter to find the application-delay indexes that
refer to the error received.
7.
Enter UPDATE to list the current values in the Application Delay Table; at the dot (.) prompt, type
L APP
8.
Create a tone timing diagram to help determine the tone cadence.
The tone values from the PRT display and the current application-delay values listed in the
Application Delay Table can be included in the diagram to determine how much an individual tone
needs to be modified.
For the preceding PRT example, the application-delay indexes that refer to the error received are
indexes 50 and 54. Figure 6-3 shows what the failure would look like on a tone timing diagram. Note
that the failure occurred when the PBX sent a TONE ON for 790 ms. The Octel Overture 200/300 was
set to expect a TONE ON (ringback) for no less then 800 ms and no greater than 1200 ms. This is
referred to as the “window.” In the diagram, the window for the silence period (TONE OFF) between
rings is set to no less than 2800 ms and no greater than 3400 ms. The TONE OFF values are within
that window.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6-47
PBX Tone ON
1
1200 ms
800 ms
1200 ms
1000 ms
980 ms
1200 ms
800 ms
800 ms
2920 ms
2800 ms
3400 ms
2880 ms
2800 ms
3400 ms
Answer Condition
1 Maximum Tone ON (53)
Minimum Tone ON (54)
Actual Time Tone ON
Actual Time Tone was OFF
Minimum Tone OFF (56)
Maximum Tone OFF (55)
Figure 6-3 Ring/No Answer Tone-Timing Failure
9.
Modify the required application delays.
In this case, Application Delay index 54 would be changed from 800 ms to 760 ms. Decreasing
Index 54 allows for the 790 ms TONE ON.
Index 50 must be equal to or less than Index 54.
10. After modifying the appropriate delays, remove Attribute 70, and retest the calls that failed.
If calls still fail, repeat this procedure from step 1.
Modifiable Application-Delay Indexes
The application-delay indexes that can be modified at the Maintenance level while in UPDATE are listed
below, with descriptions of what the delay does and how to use it.
Application Delays for Addressing
131
WAIT DURING ADDRESSING TO RESOLVE DIGIT ENTERED
During addressing, Application Delay 131 causes a delay between digit entries when 0 is the
first digit of mailboxes and extensions or when local mailbox addresses overlap network
prefixes. The default delay is 2.0 seconds.
Use — When 0 is the initial digit for mailboxes and extensions, after 0, or 00–09 are entered,
the message server waits for more digits. If no more digits are entered, the call is transferred
to the operator (0), to the Dial-by-Name directory (00), or, in the case of a PDL address
(01–09), the address is registered.
When local mailbox addresses overlap network prefixes, the message server waits for more
digits after the local mailbox address is entered. If more digits are entered before the timeout
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-48
Installation and Maintenance Volume
period expires, the address is considered to be a network address. For details about
overlapping mailbox addresses and network prefixes, refer to the Networking volume, Remote
Analog Networking chapter, Remote Networking Operation, Addressing for Overlapping
Mailbox Addresses, and Network Prefixes sections.
Application Delays for Call Processing
8
WAIT AFTER OFF HOOK BEFORE GIVING PROMPT
Application Delay 8 causes a delay between the time the port goes off hook and the time the
greeting or system prompt is played.
Use — If the PBX is slow in sending the speech paths through, it could cause greetings or
prompts to be clipped (only part of the greeting or prompt heard). Modify Application Delay
8 to delay for a longer time before the message server plays the greeting or prompt.
19
TIMEOUT BEFORE LOOKING FOR RINGBACK OR BUSY
After dialing an extension number, the message server waits the amount of time specified in
Application Delay 19 before looking for a ringback, busy, or fast-busy tone.
Use — Some PBXs send a partial ringback or busy tone before starting the ringback or
busy-tone cycle. That would cause the Octel Overture 200/300 to fail, because the partial tone
would not comply with any of the tone windows established in the Application Delay Table.
Modify Application Delay 19 for a longer time interval.
87
WAIT LONGER BEFORE LOOKING FOR RINGBACK
Application Delay 87 only works in conjunction with COS Attribute 30 — EXTENSION IS ON
ANOTHER PBX, WAIT LONGER BEFORE LOOKING AT TONES. After dialing an extension
number, the message server waits the amount of time specified in Application Delay 87
before looking for a ringback, busy, or fast-busy tone.
Use — In some PBX environments, two or more PBXs might be connected through tie lines,
so users on a local PBX could dial an extension number on a remote PBX and be routed
directly to it, without going over the public network. The ringback tone from the distant PBX
is delayed while the PBXs set up the call. Without Attribute 30 and Application Delay 87, the
Octel Overture 200/300 detects the longer silence as an answer and attempts to transfer the
call, which causes a failure. This COS attribute and application-delay combination allows the
Octel Overture 200/300 to wait before looking for a ringback tone when calling certain
extensions.
Application Delays used with Enhanced DTMF In-band Integration
79
This delay is used as the first delay when looking for dial tone after flash, or whenever E,
expect dial tone, is in a dialing string.
Use —The message server uses this delay to determine if the PBX has provided dialtone after
flash or whenever E is in a dialing string. If dialtone is not received from the PBX within the
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6-49
duration of this delay, the message server flashes again for dialtone, or, in the case of dialing
strings, hangs up and tries again.
110
This delay may be modified in the CPT environment to account for slow CPT (for
dialtone) from the PBX.
FIRST DIGIT TIMEOUT WHILE WAITING FOR DTMF CALL RECORD
This delay value is the time the message server waits after going off hook for the first DTMF
digit of an enhanced DTMF in-band call record.
Use — Some PBXs might not send DTMF call records (digits) in a timely manner. If this
occurs, the Octel Overture 200/300 plays the default company greeting. This delay forces the
message server to wait longer for the first DTMF digit of the call record.
111
INTERDIGIT TIMEOUT WHILE WAITING FOR DTMF CALL RECORD
This delay is the length of time that the message server waits for subsequent DTMF digits of
an enhanced DTMF in-band call record. After the message server receives a DTMF digit of a
call record, this timer starts. If the time ends before receiving another digit, the message
server assumes that the PBX is finished sending digits. If the digits received match a Call
Record Condition in the DTMFINT Table, the message server takes the appropriate action
(plays mailbox greeting, etc.). If the digits received do not match a Call Record Condition,
the message server plays the default company greeting.
Use — If a PBX is slow in sending DTMF digits, this delay should be increased to
compensate for this.
112
DELAY BEFORE PLAYING PROMPT AFTER RECEIVING CALL RECORD
This delay is the time that the message server waits before playing a greeting or prompt after
receiving a complete enhanced DTMF call record.
Use — When the PBX sends a DTMF call record to the Octel Overture 200/300, the speech
path is not sent through to the caller. The caller hears silence or a ringback tone. After the
PBX sends the last DTMF digit of the call record, it connects the caller and the Octel
Overture 200/300. If the PBX is slow to send the speech path through, part of the greeting or
prompt could be clipped. By extending this delay, the message server waits longer before
playing a greeting or prompt.
141
This delay is used to detect Ring-No-Answer (RNA). The default for this delay is a value of
5000 msec.
Use — When internal calls have a value specified in Information Index Table 7 —
NUMBER OF RINGS BEFORE EXTENSION NO ANSWER, this value multiplied by the
duration of one ring gives the time-out value for RNA. When message waiting outcalls have a
value specified in Information Index Table 8 — NUMBER OF MESSAGE WAITING
RINGS, this value is used to compute the time-out value for RNA.
142
This delay is used to detect call transferring hang-up delays. The default for this delay is a
value of 30000 msec.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-50
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Use — When specifying the maximum time the message server waits for the call
transferring party to hang up, so that the transfer to an extension forwarded to the message
server is completed.
Application Delays for Cadence Recognition
49
MAXIMUM TONE ON PERIOD FOR ANY TONE
This delay must be set to a value equal to the largest value for any of the following delays set
in the Application Delay Table: 53, 61, 63, 69, or 73.
Use — When the message server looks for a ringback, busy, or fast-busy tone, it uses this
delay to determine whether the TONE ON is a valid tone. If the TONE ON is longer than this
delay, the message server assumes an answer condition has occurred.
50
MINIMUM TONE ON PERIOD FOR ANY TONE
This delay must be set to a value less than the value for any of the following delays set in the
Application Delay Table: 54, 62, 64, 70, or 74.
Use — When the message server looks for a ringback, busy, or fast-busy tone, it uses this
delay to determine whether the TONE ON is a valid tone. If the TONE ON is less than this
delay, the message server assumes an answer condition has occurred.
51
MAXIMUM TONE OFF PERIOD FOR ANY TONE
This delay must be set to a value equal to the largest value for any of the following delays in
the Application Delay Table: 55, 65, 67, 71, or 75.
Use — When the message server looks for a ringback, busy, or fast-busy tone, it uses this
delay to determine whether the TONE OFF is a valid silence period. If the TONE OFF is
greater than this delay, the message server assumes an answer condition has occurred.
52
Application delay 123 must be set to 0 for the server to wait the time specified in
application 51. See application delay 123.
MINIMUM TONE OFF PERIOD FOR ANY TONE
This delay must be set to a value less than the value for any of the following delays in the
Application Delay Table: 56, 66, 68, 72, or 76.
Use — When the message server looks for a ringback, busy, or fast-busy tone, it uses this
delay to determine whether the TONE OFF is a valid silence period. If the TONE OFF is less
than this delay, the message server assumes that an answer condition has occurred.
53
RINGBACK MAXIMUM TONE ON PERIOD
This delay is the longest delay that a TONE ON can be to qualify as a ringback.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a ringback. If the TONE ON is longer than this delay, the message server
assumes that it is not a ringback.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
54
6-51
RINGBACK MINIMUM TONE ON PERIOD
This delay is the shortest delay that a TONE ON can be to qualify as a ringback.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a ringback. If the TONE ON is shorter than this delay, the message server
assumes that it is not a ringback.
55
RINGBACK MAXIMUM TONE OFF PERIOD
This delay is the longest delay that a TONE OFF can be to qualify as a ringback.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a ringback. If the TONE OFF is longer than this delay, the message server
assumes that it is not a ringback.
56
RINGBACK MINIMUM TONE OFF PERIOD
This delay is the shortest delay that a TONE OFF can be to qualify as a ringback.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a ringback. If the TONE OFF is shorter than this delay, the message server
assumes that it is not a ringback.
123
This delay should only be modified when using CPT-DTMF integration and must be set to 0
or a value greater than application delay 51.
Use — If application delay 123 is 0, the server waits for the amount of time specified by
application delay 51 for the first TONE ON. If application delay 123 is non-zero, after dialing
out digits for an outcall, the server waits this amount of time for the FIRST TONE ON
condition. If no TONE ON occurs in this specified time, the server assumes the call was
answered.
Application Delay indexes 61 through 68 are used only if System Parameter 26 is set to YES.
61
DOUBLE INTERRUPTED RINGBACK MAXIMUM TONE ON LONG PERIOD
This delay is the longest delay that a TONE ON, of the long TONE ON period, can be to
qualify as a double interrupted ringback.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a double interrupted ringback. If the TONE ON is longer than this delay, the
message server assumes that it is not a double interrupted ringback.
62
DOUBLE INTERRUPTED RINGBACK MINIMUM TONE ON LONG PERIOD
This delay is the shortest delay that a TONE ON, of the long TONE ON period, can be to
qualify as a double interrupted ringback.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that is
monitoring is a double interrupted ringback. If the TONE ON is shorter than this delay, the
message server assumes that it is not a double interrupted ringback.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-52
Installation and Maintenance Volume
63
DOUBLE INTERRUPTED RINGBACK MAXIMUM TONE ON SHORT PERIOD
This delay is the longest delay that a TONE ON, of the short TONE ON period, can be to
qualify as a double interrupted ringback.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadence that it is
monitoring is a double interrupted ringback. If the TONE ON is longer than this delay, the
message server assumes that it is not a double interrupted ringback.
64
DOUBLE INTERRUPTED RINGBACK MINIMUM TONE ON SHORT PERIOD
This delay is the shortest delay that a TONE ON, of the short TONE ON period, can be to
qualify as a double interrupted ringback.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a double interrupted ringback. If the TONE ON is shorter than this delay, the
message server assumes that it is not a double interrupted ringback.
65
DOUBLE INTERRUPTED RINGBACK MAXIMUM TONE OFF LONG PERIOD
This delay is the longest delay that a TONE OFF, of the long TONE OFF period, can be to
qualify as a double interrupted ringback.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a double interrupted ringback. If the TONE OFF is longer than this delay, the
message server assumes that it is not a double interrupted ringback.
66
DOUBLE INTERRUPTED RINGBACK MINIMUM TONE OFF LONG PERIOD
This delay is the shortest delay that a TONE OFF, of the long TONE OFF period, can be to
qualify as a double interrupted ringback.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a double interrupted ringback. If the TONE OFF is shorter than this delay, the
message server assumes that it is not a double interrupted ringback.
67
DOUBLE INTERRUPTED RINGBACK MAXIMUM TONE OFF SHORT PERIOD
This delay is the longest delay that a TONE OFF, of the short TONE OFF period, can be to
qualify as a double interrupted ringback.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a double interrupted ringback. If the TONE OFF is longer than this delay, the
message server assumes that it is not a double interrupted ringback.
68
DOUBLE INTERRUPTED RINGBACK MINIMUM TONE OFF SHORT PERIOD
This delay is the shortest delay that a TONE OFF, of the short TONE OFF period, can be to
qualify as a double interrupted ringback.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is double interrupted ringback. If the TONE OFF is shorter than this delay, the
message server assumes that it is not a double interrupted ringback.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
69
6-53
SLOW BUSY MAXIMUM TONE ON PERIOD
This delay is the longest delay that a TONE ON can be to qualify as a slow-busy tone.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a slow-busy tone. If the TONE ON is longer than this delay, the message server
assumes that it is not a slow-busy tone.
70
SLOW BUSY MINIMUM TONE ON PERIOD
This delay is the shortest delay that a TONE ON can be to qualify as a slow-busy tone.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a slow-busy tone. If the TONE ON is shorter than this delay, the message server
assumes that it is not a slow-busy tone.
71
SLOW BUSY MAXIMUM TONE OFF PERIOD
This delay is the longest delay that a TONE OFF can be to qualify as a slow-busy tone.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a slow-busy tone. If the TONE OFF is longer than this delay, the message server
assumes that it is not a slow-busy tone.
72
SLOW BUSY MINIMUM TONE OFF PERIOD
This delay is the shortest delay that a TONE OFF can be to qualify as a slow-busy tone.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a slow-busy tone. If the TONE OFF is shorter than this delay, the message
server assumes that it is not a slow-busy tone.
73
FAST BUSY MAXIMUM TONE ON PERIOD
This delay is the longest delay that a TONE ON can be to qualify as a fast-busy tone.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a fast-busy tone. If the TONE ON is longer than this delay, the message server
assumes that it is not a fast-busy tone.
74
FAST BUSY MINIMUM TONE ON PERIOD
This delay is the shortest delay that a TONE ON can be to qualify as a fast-busy tone.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a fast-busy tone. If the TONE ON is shorter than this delay, the message server
assumes that it is not a fast-busy tone.
75
FAST BUSY MAXIMUM TONE OFF PERIOD
This delay is the longest delay that a TONE OFF can be to qualify as a fast-busy tone.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a fast-busy tone. If the TONE OFF is longer than this delay, the message server
assumes that it is not a fast-busy tone.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-54
Installation and Maintenance Volume
76
FAST BUSY MINIMUM TONE OFF PERIOD
This delay is the shortest delay that a TONE OFF can be to qualify as a fast-busy tone.
Use — The message server uses this delay to determine whether the tone cadences that it is
monitoring is a fast-busy tone. If the TONE OFF is shorter than this delay, the message server
assumes that it is not a fast-busy tone.
Coordinate the following application-delay indexes for cadence recognition. Refer to Table 6-3.
Set index 49 to a value equal to the largest value for any of the following delay indexes: 53, 61, 63,
69, or 71.
Set index 50 to a value less than the value for any of the following delay indexes: 54, 62, 64, 70, or 74.
Set index 51 to a value equal to the largest value for any of the following delay indexes: 55, 65, 67,
71, or 75.
Set index 52 to a value less than the value for any of the following delay indexes: 56, 66, 68, 72, or 76.
Table 6-3 Application Delays for Cadence Recognition, for Determining Tone On/Tone Off
TONE EVENT
Maximum
Tone On
Minimum
Tone On
Maximum
Tone Off
Minimum
Tone Off
Single Interrupt Ringback
Index 53
Index 54
Index 55
Index 56
Max/Min Acceptable Tone Ranges
Index 49
Index 50
Index 51
Index 52
Double Interrupt Ringback, long periods
Index 61
Index 62
Index 65
Index 66
Double Interrupt Ringback, short periods
Index 63
Index 64
Index 67
Index 68
Slow Busy
Index 69
Index 70
Index 71
Index 72
Fast Busy
Index 73
Index 74
Index 75
Index 76
Using UPDATE to Modify Application Delays
You can use UPDATE to modify specific application delays. When you modify an application-delay
index, enter the new value in milliseconds, rounded to the nearest 20 ms.
Use the UPDATE program as follows:
List the current values in the Application Delay Table
Modify the values
List Command
.L APP
Use the LIST command to list the current values in the Application Delay Table. The message server
prompts for an individual delay. Enter the application-delay index to be listed.
To list all application delay indexes, press
Table.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
. The following is an example of the Application Delay
PB60014–01
Commands
6-55
.L APP
LST:
APPLICATION DELAY TABLE
INDEX
DELAY (msec.)
0
0
1
7000
2
5000
3
500
4
3000
5
1200
6
1000
7
30000
8
1600
.
.
.
.
251
0
252
0
253
0
254
0
255
0
Modify Command
.M APP
Use the MODIFY command to change application delays. The message server prompts for the
application-delay index to be modified. Refer to the Modifiable Application–Delay Indexes section in
this chapter; only the delays that are listed can be modified at the Maintenance level. Enter the
application-delay index number. Type the new value, and press . The message server displays the
new value.
The delay values are entered in milliseconds and rounded to the nearest 20 ms value.
The following is an example of Application Delay Index 8 being modified to 1000 ms (1 second).
.M APP
Enter APPLICATION DELAY index.
MOD:8
Enter new value (in MILLISECONDS) for APP DELAY 8.
Note: Will be rounded to the nearest 20 MSEC.
(0–1310700 MSEC, (0 means Infinite, empty line = 800
MOD:1000
DELAY set to 1000 MSEC.
)
Changing an Application Delay from a nonzero value
to zero should never be done. A zero value sets an
infinite timeout that could result in permanently
locking up a port.
Caution!
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-56
6.4
Installation and Maintenance Volume
MESSAGE BLOCK AND MESSAGE PURGE
Voice and fax messages for the Octel Overture 200/300 can be marked as unplayable with the MBLOCK
message block command. Messages can be deleted on a mailbox-by-mailbox basis or from every mailbox
in the message server with the MPURGE message purge command.
To block or purge a message, the message header number must be identified. To determine the message
header number, use either the L M [mailbox number] M command to list mailbox message
information for a specific mailbox, or the L T (list trace) command if only the approximate time of the
message is known. Refer to the Mailbox Configuration Status section in this chapter, for more
information about listing mailbox messages.
Marking a Message Unplayable
Messages that are recorded and sent can be blocked from being played by the message recipients.
Blocking a message makes the message unplayable.
Making a message unplayable has no immediate effect on that message if it is already being played.
However, it prevents a mailbox holder from starting to play or to replay the message after it is blocked. If
a mailbox holder does attempt to play an unplayable message, the creator’s name is played. The status
prompt plays, followed by “This message has been marked unplayable by the system administrator.
Please erase.”
This same prompt is heard if the message is a fax message that the user is trying to print by entering
. The normal fax-message menu, with options to print the fax, is not played. The auto-print feature
is suppressed for fax messages marked unplayable.
If a message is marked for delivery to a remote mailbox but has not been sent, this same prompt is sent
over the network instead of the message. Messages already sent over the network are not deleted or
blocked by the MPURGE and MBLOCK commands.
The mailbox holder might hear silence rather than the preceding prompt, if the following occurs:
The MBLOCK command is entered at the same time the message is played for a local user or sent
over the network.
A mailbox holder has forwarded the message using the future-delivery option and then listens to the
message while it is still in the mailbox.
To block a message from being played, at the @ prompt, type
MBLOCK x y
In this command, x is message header number, and y indicates that the message is to be blocked.
The message server responds with a request to confirm this command.
MAKE MESSAGE 5001 UNPLAYABLE
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO DO THIS? Y
MESSAGE 5001 MADE UNPLAYABLE
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
6-57
A message that is marked as unplayable can be unmarked. To unblock a message so that it can be played
again, at the @ prompt, type
MBLOCK x n
In this command, x is message header number, and n indicates that the message is to be unblocked. The
message server responds with a request to confirm this command.
MAKE MESSAGE 5001 PLAYABLE
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO DO THIS? Y
MESSAGE 5001 MADE PLAYABLE
The messages server executes the MBLOCK command without checking whether the message is currently
playable or not.
Blocked messages are not automatically deleted from the message server. The space and message header
will be available for reuse whenever the message server has been restarted. When a message is blocked,
the message is flagged as UNPLAY.
@MBLOCK 6941Y
MAKE MESSAGE 6941 UNPLAYABLE
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO DO THIS? Y
MESSAGE 6941 MADE UNPLAYABLE
@L HE 6941
CREATOR MAILBOX NUMBER 8048
EXTENSION MESSAGE NUMBER:0000
.
.
.
.
.
.
FLAGS:UNPLAY
ADDRESSES:
The Call Processing Trace shows that the message has been made unplayable for all mailboxes for which
the M PURGE command was used.
@L T
.
.
.
.SELECT TRACE TO BE LISTED. (1–7), EMPTY LINE = EXIT).
:2
Enter mailbox (Empty line = ALL)
:4585
Enter start time : Year Month Day Hour Minute or C
(continuous)
:97 12 10 16 00
TIME 12/10/97 16:00
MSG 6941 MADE UNPLAYABLE
.
.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-58
Installation and Maintenance Volume
MPURGE Command Usage
A message that has been recorded and sent can be deleted from one or all mailboxes in the message
server.
From all mailboxes, the MPURGE command first initiates an MBLOCK command so that, while the
message server is searching each mailbox for an occurrence of the message, mailbox holders cannot play
that message.
The search that occurs after the MBLOCK command is issued can take some time to be executed. For
example, on a message server with 1,200 mailboxes, the search takes approximately 1/2 hour. Also,
seconds or even minutes might elapse between the display of the next “mailbox scheduled for deletion”
prompt. When the search has been completed, because the MBLOCK command is issued by the message
server before beginning the message-purge search, the message continues to use the header assigned to it,
and it remains on the disk until the message server is restarted.
When the MPURGE command is issued to delete a message from an individual mailbox, the MBLOCK
command is not evoked. The message is deleted from the mailbox specified. When issued for a particular
mailbox, the MPURGE command is quick to be executed. If a message was sent, for example, to three
mailboxes and purged one mailbox at a time from each of the three, after the final deletion, the message
is deleted from the disk and the header is made available for reuse.
Whether for a single mailbox or for all mailboxes, when the MPURGE command is issued to request that a
message be deleted, if the mailbox holder is logged on, the request to delete is queued, and the deletion
occurs after the mailbox holder logs off.
If the message server is restarted while deletion requests are queued, those queued requests are lost.
However, the message remains unplayable if it has been blocked (explicitly by MBLOCK or implicitly by
the all-mailbox MPURGE command). To verify that messages have been deleted before restarting the
message server, check the trace log.
MPURGE Command for All Mailboxes
To delete a message from every mailbox in the message server, at the @ prompt, type
MPURGE x
In this command, x is the message-header number.
DELETE MESSAGE 5001 FROM ALL MAILBOXES
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO DO THIS? Y
MESSAGE 5001 SCHEDULED FOR DELETION FROM MAILBOX 2021
MESSAGE 5001 SCHEDULED FOR DELETION FROM MAILBOX 2022
.
.
@
The message server searches all mailboxes for the message to be deleted before returning to the @ prompt.
As it searches, the following prompt is displayed each time there is an occurrence of the message:
MESSAGE xxx SCHEDULED FOR DELETION FROM MAILBOX yyy.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
Commands
The command can be canceled by entering
printed:
6-59
. The execution pauses, and the following message is
ABORT MPURGE (AND LEAVE MESSAGE UNPLAYABLE) .
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO DO THIS? Y
@
Enter Y to abort the message purge. If the message purge is aborted, all messages that have already been
queued for deletion are deleted.
MPURGE Command for Message-by-Message Use
To delete a message from one mailbox, at the @ prompt, type
MPURGE x z
In this command, x is the message header number and z is the mailbox number.
Before checking whether the message is actually present in the mailbox, the Octel Overture 200/300
requests confirmation before deleting a message from the mailbox. For example, when a message is to be
deleted from one mailbox, the message server responds with the following:
DELETE MESSAGE 5001 FROM MAILBOX 2022
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO DO THIS? Y
@
If an original recipient has forwarded the message, the forwarded instance of the message is not
deleted with the MPURGE x y command. However, if a message is deleted from every mailbox
by the MPURGE x command, the message, but not the forwarding comments, is blocked and
cannot play.
If the message should be restricted from all delivery, two options for removing the message are available:
Use MPURGE to delete the message from all mailboxes. If the message server is large, this could take
some time. The message could be heard by some users before the command to delete it from their
mailboxes is issued.
Do an MBLOCK and then a single-mailbox MPURGE for each mailbox to which the message was sent.
If the message should go to some of the originally addressed mailboxes, then the options are as follows:
Use MPURGE to delete the message from all mailboxes, and then create a new message with the
appropriate information. Send the message to the desired mailbox addresses.
Use a single-mailbox MPURGE for each mailbox that should not receive the message. If any of these
mailboxes are configured for Auto-Copy, perform the message purge from the Auto-Copy target.
Forwarded messages and network messages are not deleted.
PB60014–01
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
6-60
Installation and Maintenance Volume
MBLOCK and MPURGE Considerations
Blocked messages (explicitly by MBLOCK or implicitly by an all-mailbox MPURGE) are not
automatically deleted from the message server. The space used by the message and the associated
header become available for reuse when the message server is restarted.
If a message has been forwarded, the forwarded instance is not automatically deleted by the MPURGE
command. Make the message unplayable using the MBLOCK command. The message recipient hears
the sender’s name if available, but the message is not played. The prompt requesting that the
message be deleted is heard.
Any message can be Auto-Copied. If the single-mailbox MPURGE command is used to delete a
message, that message must be deleted from the Auto-Copy target as well. If the all-mailbox
MPURGE is used, in general, the message is deleted from Auto-Copy targets.
Even if a message is part of a forwarding chain, only that particular message is blocked or purged.
Block or purge all messages in the chain, if desired. For instance, if a voice-annotated fax message is
to be purged, enter the MPURGE command separately for both the voice annotation and for the fax
message. Similarly, if a message was forwarded with comments, delete both the comments and the
forwarded message with the MPURGE command.
If part of a forwarded message chain is marked unplayable, when the message server is restarted,
messages from the point of those marked unplayable are deleted. For example, if a message is
forwarded with comments and then forwarded a second time with comments, blocking the first
forwarded comments deletes those comments and the message, but the second forwarded comments
can still be played.
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
PB60014–01
7
LOG COMMANDS
LOG, LIST TRACE, CALL DETAIL RECORD
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
LOG Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Log Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Call Processing Trace (CPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Using the CPT Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Printing the CPT Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Using the List Trace Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Using the LOG PR CPT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Examples Using LOG PR CPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Examples Using LOG PR CPT for Untraced Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Displaying Types of Events and Supplemental (AUX) Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Call Detail Record Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Configuring the CDR Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Displaying Call Detail Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Setting Display Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
CDR Size by Transaction Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Examples of Various CDR Log Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Namesend Activity Trace Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Moves, Adds, and Changes Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Types of Configuration Table Entries Logged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Server Activity Trace Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Appendix A Call-Processing Trace Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-1
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
PB60014–01
Trace Activity Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Transaction Type Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Descriptions of the CDR Status That Can Be Logged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Information Logged by Transaction Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Call Detail Record Size by Transaction Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Namesend Activity Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
7-7
7–8
Event and Aux Activities in Namesend Activity Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
SAT Log Aactivity Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Octel Overture 200/300
Quick Reference Guide
LOG Commands
Command
LOG x y
Displays log option and log to be traced.
LOG ?
Displays all log options.
LOG ST CPT
Shows the beginning time and the time of the first
record presently in the CPT log.
LOG PR CPT
LOG PR CDR
Prompts for print options and filters to control output
format and record selection criteria.
LOG BE CDR
Used with CDR to set the begin time for the CDR
log.
LOG MF CDR
Used with CDR log to enable or disable filters for
logging combinations of transaction and status types.
LOG PF CDR
Used with the CDR log to display the enabled or
disabled filters modified by the LOG MF command.
LOG Commands
Call Processing Trace (CPT) Commands
L T
Display a menu of seven choices for call processing
trace activity. Enter the trace activity number to be
displayed.
L T x
Displays a specific call processing trace activity.
x = trace activity number to be displayed.
L T ?
Displays all LIST TRACE options
Call Detail Record (CDR) Command
PB60014–01
CDR
Displays the CDR log file.
CDR ?
Displays available options and all report filter types
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
Log Commands — Log, List Trace, Call Detail Record
7.1
7-1
LOG COMMAND
Use the LOG command to collect information about specific events for
Call Processing Trace (CPT) activities
Call Detail Record (CDR) log activities
Moves, Adds, and Changes (MAC) activities (beginning with Serenade 3.0)
Network Namesend activities (NAM)
Server Activity Trace Log (SAT) (beginning with Serenade 3.0)
It displays the collected data according to specific filters that can limit the time interval activities logged.
To execute the LOG command, at the @ prompt, type
LOG x y
In this command, x is a specific option type and y is the log to be traced.
Log Options. To display the log options, at the @ prompt, type
LOG ?
Five log options are displayed:
@LOG ?
PR
Print log file
BE
Set begin time of log file
PF
Print filters for input to log file
MF
Modify filters for input to log file
ST
Print status of log file
Logs To Be Traced. The log types that can be traced are CPT, CDR, MAC, SAT and NAM .
The following table shows the log options that can be used.
PB60014–01
Log
Type
PR
BE
PF
MF
ST
CPT
CDR
MAC
SAT
NAM
Octel Overture 200/300
Serenade 3.0
7-2
Installation and Maintenance Volume
Log Options
Several log options are available to the user. Details about each option and how it works with each log
type are presented in the following sections.
PR Option, Print Log Files
Use the LOG option PR to list filters for each log type. These filters designate the records that can be
collected and displayed.
When you enter LOG PR [log type], the Octel Overturet200/300 prompts for print options and
filters to control the output format and record selection criteria. The desired combinations of print options
and filters are entered in the command line. The print options are common for all log types; the filters
differ by log type. The PR filters for each log type are explained in the appropriate section.
@LOG PR
Specify Print Option(s):
“S”tart
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.2
Linearized : No
Create Date : 1998:07:20 11:38:25
Producer : Acrobat Distiller 3.01 for Windows
Author : gcyester
Creator : Interleaf, Inc.
Title : Document:
Modify Date : 1998:07:21 13:08:31
Page Count : 668
.